c4 Picasso

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.
com manuals search engine

On-line owner's handbook
You can find your handbook on the CITRON website, under Referring to the owner's handbook on-line also gives you
"MyCitron". access to the latest information available, easily identified by
the bookmark, associated with this symbol:
This personal and customisable space allows you to establish direct
and special contact with CITRON.
If the "MyCitron" function is not available on the CITRON public Select:

website for your country, you can find your handbook at the following The Vehicle documentation link in the home page (no registration is
address: needed),
http://service.citroen.com the language,
the vehicle, its body style,
the print edition of your handbook appropriate for the date of registration
of your vehicle.
You have access to your handbook on line, together with the latest
information, identified by the symbol:
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

We draw your attention to the following...
Your vehicle is fitted with only some of the equipment CITRON has a presence on every continent,
described in this document, depending on the trim level,
version and the specifications for the country in which it a complete product range,
is sold. bringing together technology and a permanent spirit of innovation,
The fitting of electrical equipment or accessories which for a modern and creative approach to mobility.
are not recommended by CITRON may result in a
failure of your vehicle's electronic system. Please note We thank you and congratulate you on your choice.
this specific warning and contact a CITRON dealer to
be shown the recommended equipment and accessories.
At the wheel of your new vehicle,

Key
getting to know each system,
safety warning
additional information
each control, each setting,
contributes to the protection of the environment makes your trips, your journeys
refer to the page indicated more comfortable and more enjoyable.
Key
This key will enable you to identify the special features
Happy motoring!
of your vehicle:
C4 Picasso
Grand C4 Picasso
Grand C4 Picasso with 5 seats
Grand C4 Picasso with 7 seats

243

Contents
Familiarisation Access Driving

Electronic key - remote control 61 Starting-switching off the engine
"Keyless Entry and Starting" with the electronic key 135
system 64 Starting-switching off the engine with the
Central locking 72 "Keyless Entry and Starting" system 137
Doors 73 Electric parking brake 141
Boot 75 Hill start assist 148
Motorised tailgate 76 5-speed manual gearbox 149
Eco-driving Alarm 79 6-speed manual gearbox 149
Electric windows 82 6-speed electronic gearbox system 150
Automatic gearbox 154
Gear shift indicator 159
Stop & Start 160
Display of inter-vehicle time 163
Speed limiter 168
Cruise control 171
Active cruise control 174
Monitoring Comfort
Collision risk alert 182
7-inch touch screen tablet 26 Front seats 84 Lane departure warning system 185
Instrument panels 33 Rear seats 92 Blind spot sensors 186
Indicator and warning lamps 38 Seat modularity 99 Parking sensors 189
Adjustment buttons 54 Mirrors 101 Reversing camera 191
Setting the date and time 57 Steering wheel adjustment 103 360 Vision 192
Trip computer 59 Ventilation 104 Park Assist 194
Heating 106
Manual dual-zone air conditioning 107
Dual-zone digital air conditioning 109
Rear screen demist - defrost 115
Scented air freshener 116
Interior fittings 118
Rear multimedia 127

Contents
Visibility Practical information Technical data

Lighting controls 202 Temporary puncture repair kit 260 Petrol engines 323
Automatic illumination of headlamps 207 Changing a wheel 268 Petrol weights 324
Automatic headlamp dipping 208 Snow chains 278 Diesel engines 325
Daytime running lamps 210 Changing a bulb 279 Diesel weights 328
Headlamp adjustment 211 Changing a fuse 288 Dimensions 331
Directional lighting 213 12 V battery 295 Identification markings 333
Wiper controls 214 Energy economy mode 298
Screenwash 216 Changing a wiper blade 299
Automatic rain sensitive wipers 217 Towing the vehicle 300
Courtesy lamps 219 Towing a trailer 302
Panoramic sunroof 220 Roof bars 304
Interior mood lighting 221 Very cold climate screen 306
Accessories 307
Audio and telematics

Safety Emergency or assistance 335
Checks Touch screen tablet 337
2
Hazard warning lamps 222 Bonnet 310
Horn 222 Petrol engines 311
Emergency or assistance call 223 Diesel engines 312
Warning triangle 223 Fuel 313
Tyre under-inflation detection 224 Misfuel prevention (Diesel) 315
ESC system 227 Running out of fuel (Diesel) 317 Alphabetical index
Seat belts 230 Checking levels 318
Airbags 235 Checks 321
Child seats 241
ISOFIX mountings 252
Child lock 259 Visual search

Familiarisation
Exterior
Electronic key: Keyless Distance alert
Entry and Starting Using a radar located at the front of the vehicle, this system provides:
- the Display of the inter-vehicle time, to help the driver maintain a safe distance between their
vehicle and the one in front,
163
- the triggering of a Collision risk alert, to warn the driver, in certain driving conditions, that
their vehicle is at risk of collision with the vehicle in front.
182
A system that allows the unlocking, locking and

starting of the vehicle by keeping the key on
your person and in the defined zone.
64
Active cruise control

This system makes it possible, in addition to automatically holding the vehicle at a speed
programmed by the driver, to maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front, by using engine
braking only. A radar is located at the front of the vehicle.
The driver can also programme an inter-vehicle time to maintain.
174

Familiarisation .
Exterior
Stop & Start
This system puts the engine temporarily into
standby during stops in the traffic (traffic
lights, traffic jams, etc...). The engine restarts
automatically as soon as you want to move
off. The Stop & Start system reduces fuel
consumption and exhaust emissions, as well as
noise levels when stationary.
160
Automatic headlamps
System that automatically dips the headlamps
Cornering lighting Directional lighting according to the lighting and traffic conditions,
At low speed, this additional lighting increases This lighting system automatically turns the using a camera located in the interior rear view
the driver's field of vision in corners, beams of the headlamps in the direction of a mirror.
junctions, when parking... by switching on the corner, to improve the quality of the lighting.
corresponding front foglamp.
208
213
212

Familiarisation
Exterior
Reversing camera 360 Vision
This system is activated automatically on This system provides an image in the
engaging reverse and provides an image in the instrument panel of the near surroundings of
instrument panel. your vehicle, using cameras located at the
front and rear of the vehicle and under the door
191 mirrors.
Park Assist Front and rear parking

This system provides active assistance when sensors
parking: it detects a parking space and then This system provides warnings when
controls the vehicle's steering to park the manoeuvring forwards and backwards by
vehicle. detecting obstacles in front of and behind the
vehicle.
194
189

Familiarisation .
Exterior
Blind spot sensors Motorised tailgate
In certain driving conditions, this system This system simplifies the opening and closing
detects the presence of vehicles in the blind of the boot by means of motorisation of the
spots. You are alerted by the illumination of a tailgate.
warning lamp in the corresponding mirror. 76
186
Under-inflation detection Temporary puncture repair

This system continuously monitors the kit
pressures in the tyres and alerts you in the This kit is a complete system, consisting of a
event of an under-inflated tyre. compressor and a sealant cartridge, for the
temporary repair of a tyre.
224
260

Familiarisation
Access
Electronic key - Remote Keyless Entry and Starting Motorised tailgate
control
This system allows the tailgate to be opened
remotely using motorisation.
The motorisation of the tailgate can be
activated or deactivated.
Ensure that there is enough space behind the
vehicle for the movement of the tailgate.
76
Unlocking - opening
With the electronic key on your person, in the
defined zone A, pass a hand behind one of the Fuel tank
front door handles to unlock the vehicle, then
A. Unlocking the vehicle. pull the door handle to open the door or press
B. Locking the vehicle. the opening control on the tailgate.
C. Unlocking of the vehicle and, depending
on version, release of or opening the
motorised tailgate.
61
Locking
With the electronic key in the defined zone A, With the vehicle unlocked, press on the rear of
press with a finger or thumb on one of the the filler flap to open it.
front door handles (at the markings) to lock the Tank capacity: around 57 litres (petrol) or
vehicle or on the opening control on the tailgate. 55 litres (Diesel).
64 313

Familiarisation .
Interior
Panoramic sunroof 7-inch touch screen tablet
This glazed roof increases the light in the It provides access to the heating and air
passenger compartment. It is fitted with an conditioning controls, to settings for vehicle
electric blind. systems, to controls for the audio, navigation
and telematic systems and to the display
220
configuration settings...
26
Massage system Electric parking brake Electric leg rest

This system provides a lumbar massage for a It combines the functions of automatic It provides additional comfort for the front
period of about 60 minutes. The massage is application on switching off the engine and passenger.
delivered in 6 cycles of 10 minutes each. automatic release when moving off.
The driver can intervene at any time to apply 90
or release the parking brake, by operating the
89 control lever.
141

Familiarisation
Interior
1. Bonnet release lever.
2. Fusebox.
3. Steering wheel adjustment controls.
4. Door mirror controls.
Electric window controls.
5. Side adjustable air vents.
Side window demisting vents.
6. Quarter light demisting windows.
7. Driver's airbag.
Horn.
8. Courtesy lamp and map reading lamps.
9. Panoramic glass roof panel blind control.
10. CITRON Localised Emergency Call -
CITRON Localised Assistance Call
(depending on country of sale).
11. Windscreen demisting/defrosting vent.
12. Scented air freshener.
13. Central adjustable air vents.
14. Passenger's airbag.
15. Glove box.
16. Central storage.
Audio sockets, 12V accessory socket
(120 W max), 230V socket (120 W max).
17. Storage below steering wheel (handbook
pack).
18. Gear lever (manual gearbox).
19. Console (fixed/removable).
20. Storage or rear multi-media.
Rear 12 V accessory socket (120 W max.).
10

Familiarisation .
Instruments and controls
1. Headlamp height adjustment.
2. Deactivation of volumetric alarm
monitoring, or
Ticket holder.
3. Lighting and direction indicator stalk
4. Steering mounted controls (6-speed
electronic gearbox system/automatic
gearbox).
5. Speed limiter / cruise control / active cruise
control controls.
6. Other steering mounted controls
(depending on equipment).
7. Audio system, telephone and navigation
(depending on equipment) steering
mounted controls.
8. Gear selector lever (electronic gearbox
system/automatic gearbox).
9. START/STOP button (engine starting).
10. Wiper / screenwash / trip computer stalk.
11. Electronic key reader.
12. Instrument panel.
13. Hazard warning lamps.
14. Touch screen tablet controls.
15. Deactivation of the DSC system.
16. Electric parking brake control.
17. Central locking control.
11

Familiarisation
Sitting comfortably
Driver's seat
Manual adjustments
1. Adjustment of the backrest angle of the
driver's seat.
2. Adjustment of the cushion height of the
driver's seat.
3. Forwards-backwards adjustment.
84
Electric adjustments
1. Adjustment of the cushion angle and
height, and forwards-backwards position.
2. Adjustment of the backrest angle.
86
Other functions...
Lumbar adjustment.
Massage function.
Heated seats.
12

Familiarisation .
Sitting comfortably
Head restraint adjustment Steering wheel adjustment Correct driving position
To raise it, pull it upwards. 1. Release. Before taking to the road, adjust in the following
To lower it, press on the lug A and on the head 2. Adjust for height and reach. order:
restraint at the same time. 3. Lock. - the position of the driver's seat
To incline it, move the bottom forwards or (longitudinal, height),
backwards. As a safety precaution, these - the height of the driver's head restraint,
operations must only be carried out - the height and reach of the steering wheel.
when stationary.
88
103 Once these adjustments have been made,

check that you can see the instrument
panel clearly from your driving position.
13

Familiarisation
Sitting comfortably
Door mirrors Rear view mirror
Adjustment Manual day/night model

A. Selection of the mirror to adjust. 1. Selection of the "day" position of the mirror.
B. Adjustment of the mirror position in four 2. Adjustment of the mirror.
directions.
C. De-selection of the mirror.
Automatic day/night model
101 A. Brightness detection in automatic day/night
mode.
Other functions available... B. Adjustment of the mirror.
Folding / Unfolding.
102
Automatic dipping of the mirror in
reverse for parking.
Blind spot monitoring.
14

Familiarisation .
Sitting comfortably
Front seat belts Centre rear seat belt in the Outer rear seat belts
2nd row (fastening) (stowing)
Pull the webbing and insert the tongue A in Guide the belt in and place the tongue on the
the right hand buckle. magnet of the outer anchorage.
Insert tongue B in the left hand buckle.
231, 232
1. Fastening the buckle.

2. Height adjustment
Squeeze the control to slide it.
230, 231
15

Familiarisation
Seeing clearly
Lighting Wipers
Ring A Stalk A: windscreen wipers Switching on "AUTO"

Lighting off/daytime running lamps. 2. Fast wipe. Press the stalk downwards.
1. Normal wipe.
Automatic illumination of headlamps.
Int. Intermittent wipe.
Sidelamps. 0. Off.
Switching off "AUTO"
AUTO Automatic wiping. Press the stalk downwards again or place
Dipped / main beam headlamps. Single wipe: pull the stalk briefly the stalk in another position (Int, 1 or 2).
towards you.
203
214 217
Ring B
Rear foglamps only. Ring B: rear wiper
Park.
Front and rear foglamps. Intermittent wipe.

Wash-wipe.
204 215
16

Familiarisation .
Passenger safety
Passenger's front airbag Seat belt warning lamps Manual child lock
A. Warning lamp for not fastened (front seat

belts) and unfastened (all seat belts).
B. Seat belt location indicator.
233
This manual device prevents opening of the
rear doors by the interior door handles.
The control is located on the edge of each rear
door.
1. Insert the key (integral to the electronic key).

2. Select the position:
"OFF" (deactivation), with "rear facing" 259
child seat,
"ON" (activation), with front passenger or
"forwards facing" child seat.
3. Remove the key keeping the switch in the
new position.
236
17

Familiarisation
Driving safely
Operation
Use the buttons arranged on each side of the
touch screen tablet for access to the menus,
then press on the virtual buttons in the touch
screen tablet.
From the primary page, use this

button for access to the secondary
page.
Use this button to return to the

primary page. Touch screen tablet menus
"Air conditioning". "Connected services".

Use this button for access to
additional information and to the
settings for certain functions.
" Driving assistance". "Telephone".
Use this button to confirm.
"Media".
Use this button to quit. Do not use pointed objects on the touch
screen tablet.
"Navigation". Do not touch the screen with wet hands.
26
"Configuration". Use a clean soft cloth to clean the touch

screen tablet.
18

Familiarisation .
Driving safely
Starting the engine Switching off the engine
With the electronic key
Immobilise the vehicle.
Place the gear selector lever at N for
vehicles with an electronic gearbox, P or N
for vehicles with an automatic gearbox or
neutral for vehicles with a manual gearbox.
Press the "START/STOP" button briefly.
The engine stops and the steering column
With the electronic key With the Keyless Entry and locks.
Starting system Remove the electronic key from the reader.
vehicles with an electronic gearbox, P or N Place the gear selector lever at N for
for vehicles with an automatic gearbox or vehicles with an electronic gearbox, P or N 136
neutral for vehicles with a manual gearbox. for vehicles with an automatic gearbox or
Insert the electronic key in the reader. neutral for vehicles with a manual gearbox With the Keyless Entry and
Press the brake pedal on vehicles with With the electronic key inside the vehicle Starting system
electronic gearbox or depress the clutch (it is not necessary to place it in the Immobilise the vehicle.
pedal fully on vehicles with manual reader), press the brake pedal on vehicles Place the gear selector lever at N for
gearbox. with electronic gearbox or depress the vehicles with an electronic gearbox, P or N
Press the "START/STOP" button briefly. clutch pedal fully on vehicles with manual for vehicles with an automatic gearbox or
The steering column unlocks and the gearbox. neutral for vehicles with a manual gearbox.
engine starts. Press the "START/STOP" button briefly. With the electronic key inside the vehicle,
The steering column unlocks and the press the "START/STOP" button.
engine starts. The engine stops and the steering column
locks.
135 137
Maintain pressure on the brake pedal until the engine starts.
138
19

Familiarisation
Driving safely
Electric parking brake
Manual application / release Automatic application / release
Manual application of the parking brake is First ensure that the engine is running Before leaving the vehicle, check that
possible by briefly pulling the control lever. and the driver's door is properly closed. the brake warning lamp in the instrument
With the ignition on or the engine running, panel and the P warning lamp in the
press the brake pedal and while maintaining control lever are on fixed (not flashing).
this pressure, briefly push the control lever to The parking brake is released automatically
release the parking brake. and progressively with the movement of the 141
vehicle.
With the vehicle at rest, the parking brake
is applied automatically on switching off the
ignition by pressing the START/STOP button.
If this warning lamp is on in the instrument

panel, the automatic application /
release is deactivated; apply and
release the parking brake manually.
20

Familiarisation .
Driving safely
6-speed electronic gearbox Automatic gearbox
system
Gear selector positions Gear selector positions

R Reverse. P Park.
N Neutral. R Reverse.
A Automated mode. N Neutral.
M Manual mode D Automatic mode.
Using the steering-mounted control paddles "A"
A M Manual mode.
and " B": Using the steering-mounted control paddles "A
A"
- changing gear in manual mode, and "B":
- temporarily taking control in automated - changing gear in manual mode,
mode. - temporarily taking control in automatic
mode.
Starting
Starting
Check that the gear selector is in position P or N.
Check that the gear selector is in position N. Press firmly on the brake pedal and press
Press firmly on the brake pedal and press the "START/STOP" button".
the "START/STOP" button.
150 To come out of position P, press the brake

pedal before moving the gear selector.
154
21

Familiarisation
Driving safely
Stop & Start
Going into engine STOP mode Going into engine START mode
The "ECO" warning lamp comes on in The "ECO" warning lamp goes off
the instrument panel and the engine and the engine restarts automatically:
automatically goes into standby:
- with a manual gearbox, when you fully
- with a manual gearbox, at speeds below depress the clutch pedal,
12 mph (20 km/h), when you put the - with a 6-speed electronic gearbox:
selector lever into neutral, and you release selector lever in position A or M, when
the clutch pedal, you release the brake pedal,
- with a 6-speed electronic gearbox, at or selector lever in position N and brake
speeds below 5 mph (8 km/h), when you pedal released, when you change to
press the brake pedal or when you put the position A or M,
selector lever in position N. or when you engage reverse.
- with an automatic gearbox, with the - with an automatic gearbox:
vehicle stationary, when you press the selector lever in position D or M, when
brake pedal or when you put the selector you release the brake pedal,
lever in position N. or selector lever in position N and brake
pedal released, when you change to
position D or M,
or when you engage reverse.
In some circumstances, STOP mode may not
be available; the " ECO" warning lamp flashes
for few seconds, then goes off.
160
161
22

Familiarisation .
Driving safely
Steering wheel with
integrated controls
Controls for speed limiter / cruise Other controls Audio system controls
control / active cruise control or
1. Black panel (black screen).
56
168, 171, 174 Audio system and telephone
2. Control of the display mode of the type 2 controls
instrument screen.
341
35, 37
3. Courtesy lamp on / off.
219
Audio system, navigation and
telephone controls
or
341
Park Assist
194
23

Familiarisation
Eco-driving
Eco-driving is a range of everyday practices that allow the motorist to optimise their fuel consumption and CO2 emissions.
Optimise the use of your gearbox Control the use of your electrical
equipment
With a manual gearbox, move off gently and change up without waiting. Before moving off, if the passenger compartment is too warm, ventilate it
During acceleration change up early. by opening the windows and air vents before using the air conditioning.
Above 30 mph (50 km/h), close the windows and leave the air vents
open.
With an automatic or electronic gearbox, give preference to automatic
Remember to make use of equipment that can help keep the
mode and avoid pressing the accelerator pedal heavily or suddenly.
temperature in the passenger compartment down (sunroof and window
blinds...).
The gear shift indicator invites you to change up: as soon as the Switch off the air conditioning, unless it has automatic digital regulation,
indication to change up is displayed in the instrument panel, follow it as soon as the desired temperature is attained.
straight away. Switch off the demisting and defrosting controls, if not automatic.
With an electronic or automatic gearbox, this indicator appears only in Switch off the heated seat as soon as possible.
manual mode.
Switch off the headlamps and front foglamps when the level of light
Drive smoothly does not require their use.
Maintain a safe distance between vehicles, use engine braking rather

Avoid running the engine before moving off, particularly in winter; your
than the brake pedal, and press the accelerator progressively. These
vehicle will warm up much faster while driving.
practices contribute towards a reduction in fuel consumption and CO2
emissions and also helps reduce the background traffic noise.
As a passenger, if you avoid connecting your multimedia devices
If your vehicle has cruise control, make use of the system at speeds (film, music, video game...), you will contribute towards limiting the
above 25 mph (40 km/h) when the traffic is flowing well. consumption of electrical energy, and so of fuel.
Disconnect your portable devices before leaving the vehicle.
24

Familiarisation .
Limit the causes of excess consumption Observe the recommendations on

maintenance
Spread loads throughout the vehicle; place the heaviest items in the Check the tyre pressures regularly, when cold, referring to the label in
bottom of the boot, as close as possible to the rear seats. the door aperture, driver's side.
Limit the loads carried in the vehicle and reduce wind resistance (roof Carry out this check in particular:
bars, roof rack, bicycle carrier, trailer...). Use a roof box in preference. - before a long journey,
Remove roof bars and roof racks after use. - at each change of season,
- after a long period out of use.
Don't forget the spare wheel and the tyres on any trailer or caravan.
At the end of winter, remove snow tyres and refit your summer tyres.
Have your vehicle serviced regularly (engine oil, oil filter, air filter...) and
observe the schedule of operations recommended by the manufacturer.
When refuelling, do not continue after the third cut-off of the nozzle to
avoid any overflow.
At the wheel of your new vehicle, it is only after the first 1 800 miles
(3 000 kilometres) that you will see the fuel consumption settle down to
a consistent average.
25

Monitoring
7-inch touch screen tablet

The 7-inch touch screen tablet gives access to: General operation
- the heating/air conditioning controls,
- menus for adjusting settings for vehicle Recommendations Principles
functions and systems, It is necessary to press firmly, particularly for Use the buttons on either side of the screen
- audio and display configuration menus, "flick" gestures (scrolling through lists, moving for access to the menus, then press the virtual
- audio system and telephone controls and the map...). buttons in the touch screen.
the display of associated information, A light wipe is not enough. Each menu is displayed over one or two pages
and, depending on equipment, allows: The tablet does not recognise pressing with (primary page and secondary page).
- the display of alert messages and the more than one finger.
visual parking sensors information, This technology allows use at all temperatures
- access to the controls for the navigation and when wearing gloves. Use this button to go to the
system and Internet services, and the Do not use pointed objects on the touch screen secondary page.
display of associated information. tablet.
Do not touch the tablet screen with wet hands.
Use this button to return to the
Uses a soft clean cloth to clean the tablet touch
primary page.
screen.
After a few moments with no action on

For reasons of safety, the driver the secondary page, the primary page
should only carry out operations is displayed automatically.
that require close attention, with the
vehicle stationary. Use this button for access to
Some functions are not accessible additional information and to the
when driving. settings for certain functions.
Use this button to confirm.
Use this button to quit.
26

Monitoring
Touch screen tablet menus

1
State of indicator lamps
Some buttons contain an indicator lamp that
gives the state of the corresponding function.
Green indicator: you have switched on the
corresponding function.
Orange indicator: you have switched off the
corresponding function.
1. Access the the "Air conditioning" menu. 5. Access to the "Configuration" menu
Allows adjustment of the various settings Allows configuration of the display and the
for temperature, air flow... See the sections system.
on "Heating", "Manual air conditioning" and 6. Access to the "Connected services*"
menu.
"Digital air conditioning".
See the Audio and telematics section.
2. Access to the "Driving assistance" menu.
7. Access to the " Telephone" menu.
Allows certain functions to be switched on See the Audio and telematics section.
and off and their settings adjusted.
3. Access to the "Media" menu. 8. Adjustment of volume / mute.
See the Audio and telematics section. See the Audio and telematics section.
4. Access to the "Navigation*" menu.
See the Audio and telematics section.
* Depending on equipment.
27

Monitoring
"Driving assistance" menu

The functions with settings that can be adjusted are detailed in the table below.
Button Corresponding function Comments
Speed settings Memorisation of speeds for use with the speed limiter or cruise control.
Under-inflation initialisation Reinitialisation of the under-inflation system.
Park Assist Activation of the Park Assist function.
Stop & Start Deactivation of the function.
Blind spot sensors Activation of the function.
360 vision Activation of the function then choice of options.
28

Monitoring
1
Vehicle settings Access to other functions with settings that can be adjusted. The functions are grouped
together under three tabs:
- " Driving assistance"
"Automatic rear wiper in reverse" (Activation of rear wiper linked to reverse gear; see
the "Visibility" section),
"Auto mirror dipping in reverse" (automatic dipping of door mirrors in reverse; see the
"Comfort" section).
- "Lighting"
"Guide-me-home lighting" (Automatic guide-me-home lighting; see the "Visibility" section),
"Welcome lighting" (Exterior welcome lighting; see the "Visibility" section),
"Adaptive lighting" (Cornering lighting / Directional lighting; see the "Visibility" section),
"Mood lighting" (mood lighting; see the "Visibility" section).
- " Vehicle access"
"Tailgate motorisation" (Automatic operation of the tailgate; see the Access section),
"Driver plip action" (Selective unlocking of the driver's door; see the Access section).
29

Monitoring
Diagnostic List of current alerts.
Lane departure warning system Activation of the function.
Parking sensors Deactivation of the function.
Inter-vehicle time Activation of the function.
Automatic headlamp dipping Activation of the function.
30

Monitoring
1
"Configuration" menu
The functions available through this menu are detailed in the table below.
Audio settings Adjustment of volume, balance...
Colour schemes Choice of a colour scheme.
Interactive help Simplified instructions.
Turn off screen Turns the screen off.
Brightness Adjustment of brightness.
31

Monitoring
System settings Choice of units:

- temperature (Celsius or Fahrenheit)
- distance and fuel consumption (l/100 km, mpg or km/l).
Time/Date Setting the date and time.
Languages Choice of language used (for the touch screen tablet and the type 2 instrument panel):
French, English, Italian, Spanish, German, Dutch, Portuguese, Polish, Turkish, Russian.
Screen settings Adjustment of the display settings (scrolling of text, animations...)
Calculator Displays the calculator.
Calendar Displays the calendar.
32

Monitoring
Type 1 instrument panel 1
Dials and screens Control buttons

Rev counter (x 1 000 rpm or tr/min), 5. Fuel gauge. A. Main lighting dimmer buttons.
graduation according to engine (petrol or 6. Service indicator, then total mileage B. Recall servicing information.
Diesel). recorder (miles or km). Reset the function selected to zero (service
2. Gear shift indicator, selector position These functions are displayed in turn when indicator or trip recorder).
and gear for an electronic or automatic the ignition is switched on.
gearbox. 7. Trip mileage recorder (miles or km).
3. Digital speedometer (mph or km/h). 8. Repeat of air conditioning information.
4. Cruise control or speed limiter settings.
33

Monitoring
Type 2 instrument panel

This instrument panel is presented in the form of a 12-inch panoramic HD screen.
It can be personalised. Depending on the display mode selected, some information can be hidden (see "Personalisation of the instrument panel").
Dials and screens Control button

1. Rev counter (x 1000 tr/min or rpm) 5. Fuel gauge. A. Recall servicing information.
("DIALS" mode). 6. Total distance recorder (miles or km). Reset the function selected to zero (service
2. Gear shift indicator, position of the selector 7. Trip distance recorder (miles or km). indicator or trip recorder).
lever and the gear on an electronic or 8. Repeat of the air conditioning settings.
automatic gearbox. 9. Repeat of the current media or telephone
3. Digital speedometer (mph or km/h). information.
4. Cruise control or speed limiter setting. 10. Repeat of the navigation information.
34

Monitoring
1
Display zones Personalisation of
the type 2 instrument panel
Choosing the display mode
instrument panel, by choosing:
Each mode corresponds to the type of
- a colour scheme,
information displayed in the configurable area.
- a display mode.
Choosing a colour scheme

It depends on the colour scheme chosen for
the touch screen tablet. To modify it with the
Whatever the display mode or colour scheme vehicle stationary:
chosen, the instrument panel contains select the "Configuration" menu of the
- a fixed display zone A with: touch screen tablet,
the speedometer, press the "Color schemes" button,
the warning lamps, choose a colour scheme,
the fuel gauge, confirm.
the various repeated information and The system restarts to take account of the
alert messages. modifications to the touch screen tablet
- "DIALS": permanent display of the
- a configurable display zone B. and the instrument panel.
trip computer, rev counter and coolant
Most of the warning lamps do not have a fixed temperature indicator.
position.
The warning and indicator lamps in the left
hand column are displayed from top to bottom
in order of importance.
For certain functions that have indicator lamps
for both on and off, there is just one dedicated
location.
35

Monitoring
- "MEDIA": display of information related to - "NAVIGATION": display of information - "PHOTOS": display of the photo selected
the media being played or the radio. related to the navigation in progress (map in the "Media" menu of the touch screen
and instructions). tablet.
36

Monitoring
- "DRIVING": used for the display of the To modify the display mode of the instrument once the selected display mode appears
inter-vehicle time and information related to panel: in the central window, press the wheel to
the active cruise control. turn the wheel on the left of the steering confirm your choice.
The recommended speed is displayed in wheel to display and run through the The new mode is applied immediately.
the central part. different modes in the right hand part of the
The driver remains responsible for instrument panel,
observing the driving regulations.
37

Monitoring
Indicator and warning lamps

Visual indicators informing the driver that a Associated warnings Certain warning lamps may come on in
system is in operation, switched off or has a
The switching on of certain warning lamps may one of two modes: fixed (continuous) or
fault.
be accompanied by an audible signal and a flashing.
message. Only by relating the type of illumination
The warning lamps may come on continuously to the operation of the vehicle can it
(fixed) or flash. be determined whether the situation is
normal or a fault has occurred. In the
When the ignition is switched on event of a fault, the illumination of the
Certain warning lamps come on for a few warning lamp may be accompanied by
seconds in the instrument panel when the a message.
vehicle's ignition is switched on. Refer to the tables on the following
When the engine is started, these same pages for more information.
warning lamps should go off.
If they remain on, before moving off, refer to the
information on the warning lamp concerned. The position of the warning lamps in the
type 2 instrument panel depends on the
colour scheme selected.
38

Monitoring
Operation indicator lamps

If one of the following indicator lamps comes on in the instrument panel, this confirms that the corresponding system has come into operation.
1
Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations
Left-hand direction flashing with buzzer. The lighting stalk is pushed down.
indicator
Right-hand flashing with buzzer. The lighting stalk is pushed up.

direction indicator
Sidelamps fixed. The lighting stalk is in the

"Sidelamps" position.
Dipped beam fixed. The lighting stalk is in the "Dipped

headlamps beam headlamps" position.
Main beam fixed. The lighting stalk is pulled towards Pull the stalk to return to dipped beam headlamps.
headlamps you.
39

Monitoring
Automatic fixed. The lighting control stalk is in the The camera, located in the door mirror, manages the
headlamp "AUTO" position, pulled towards operation of main beam, depending on the ambient
dipping you, and the function is activated lighting and driving conditions.
(" Driving assistance" menu). Pulling the lighting stalk again to deactivate.
The system is in dipped beam mode
For more information on this function, refer to the
as there is sufficient ambient light
Visibility section.
and/or the traffic conditions do not
allow illumination of main beam.
fixed. The lighting control stalk is in the

"AUTO" position, pulled towards
you, and the function is activated
(" Driving assistance" menu).
The system is in main beam mode
as the ambient lighting and traffic
conditions allow it.
Front foglamps fixed. The front foglamps are switched on. Turn the ring on the stalk rearwards twice to switch off
the front foglamps.
Rear foglamps fixed. The rear foglamps are switched on. Turn the ring on the stalk rearwards to switch off the
rear foglamps.
For more information on the lighting controls, refer to the corresponding section.
40

Monitoring
Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations 1

Diesel engine fixed. The "START/STOP" switch has been Wait until the warning lamp goes off before starting.
pre-heating pressed (ignition on). Once it goes off, starting is immediate, on condition
that you maintain pressure on the brake pedal for an
electronic or automatic gearbox, or the clutch pedal is
pressed fully down for a manual gearbox.
The period of illumination of the warning lamp is
determined by the ambient conditions (up to about
thirty seconds in extreme conditions).
If the engine does not start, switch the ignition off and
then on, wait until the warning lamp goes off again,
then start the engine.
Electric parking fixed. The electric parking brake is applied. Release the electric parking brake to switch off the
brake warning lamp: with your foot on the brake pedal, briefly
push the electric parking brake control lever.
Observe the safety recommendations.
For more information on the electric parking brake,
refer to the corresponding section.
Blind spot fixed. The blind spot monitoring function For more information, refer to the corresponding
sensors has been activated. section.
Park Assist fixed. The Park Assist function has been For more information, refer to the corresponding
activated. section.
41

Monitoring
Automatic fixed. The wiper control is pushed Automatic front wiping is activated.
wiping downwards. To deactivate automatic wiping, operate the control
stalk downwards or put the stalk into another position.
Passenger fixed. The control switch, located at the Turn the control switch to the "OFF" position to
airbag system passenger's end of the dashboard, is deactivate the front passenger's airbag.
in the "ON" position. In this case you can install a rearwards-facing child
The passenger's front airbag is
activated. seat.
In this case, do not install a
rearwards-facing child seat on the
front passenger seat.
Stop & Start fixed. When the vehicle stops (red lights, The warning lamp goes off and the engine restarts
traffic jams, ...) the Stop & Start system automatically in START mode, as soon as you want to
has put the engine into STOP mode. move off.
flashes for a few STOP mode is temporarily For more information on special cases with STOP
seconds, then goes unavailable. mode and START mode, refer to the "Stop & Start"
off. or section.
START mode is invoked
automatically.
42

Monitoring
Deactivation indicator lamps

If one of the following indicator lamps comes on, this confirms that the corresponding system has been switched off intentionally.
1
This is may be accompanied by an audible signal and the display of a message.
Passenger's fixed. The control switch, located at the Set the control to the "ON" position to activate the
airbag system right hand end of the dashboard is set passenger's front airbag.
to the OFF position. In this case, do not fit a child seat in the rearward-
The passenger's front airbag is facing position.
deactivated.
Dynamic fixed. The button, located on the centre Press the button to activate the DSC/ASR. Its indicator
stability control console, is pressed. Its indicator lamp lamp goes off.
(DSC/ASR) R is on. The DSC/ASR system is activated automatically when
The DSC/ASR is deactivated. the vehicle is started.
DSC: dynamic stability control. If deactivated, the system is reactivated automatically
ASR: anti-slip regulation. from around 30 mph (50 km/h).
Stop & Start fixed. The Stop & Start has been Reactivate the function via the " Driving assistance"
deactivated. menu.
43

Monitoring
Warning lamps
When the engine is running or the vehicle is being driven, illumination of one of the following warning lamps indicates a fault which requires action on
the part of the driver.
Any fault resulting in the illumination of a warning lamp must be investigated further using the associated message.
If you encounter any problems, contact a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop.
STOP fixed, associated with Illumination of this warning lamp is Stop as soon as it is safe to do so as the engine may
another warning lamp, related to a serious fault detected cut out.
accompanied by an with the braking or power steering Park, switch off the ignition and call a CITRON
audible signal and a systems, the electrical system, or dealer or a qualified workshop.
message. with engine lubrication or cooling or
a puncture.
44

Monitoring
State Cause Action / Observations 1

Service on temporarily. A minor fault has occurred for which Identify the fault by means of the associated message,
there is no specific warning lamp. such as:
- opening of a door, the boot or bonnet,
- low engine oil level,
- low screenwash/headlamp wash fluid level,
- discharged remote control battery,
- low tyre pressures,
- saturation of the particle emission filter (PEF) on
Diesel vehicles.
For more information on the PEF, refer to the
"Checks - particle emissions filter" section.
For any other faults, contact a CITRON dealer or a
qualified workshop.
fixed. A major fault has occurred for which Identify the fault by reading the message and contact
there is no specific warning lamp. a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop.
45

Monitoring
Electric parking flashing. When driving: the electric parking Fully release the parking brake by a quick press on the
brake brake is not fully released. control lever. If the warning persist, stop as soon as it
is safe to do so.
Contact a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop.
When stationary: parking brake Secure the immobilisation of the vehicle by engaging
applied, the system does guarantee a gear with a manual or electronic gearbox, by placing
immobilisation of the vehicle (when the gear selector in position P with an automatic
parking on a very steep slope, for gearbox, or by fitting a chock to one of the wheels.
example).
Electric parking fixed. The electric parking brake has a fault. Contact a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop
brake fault without delay.
The parking brake can be released manually.
For more information on the electric parking brake,
refer to the corresponding section.
Deactivation of fixed. The "automatic application" (on To reactivate the automatic functions, refer to the
the automatic switching off the engine) and "Electric parking brake" section.
functions of the "automatic release" functions are Contact a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop if
electric parking deactivated or faulty. automatic application / release is not possible.
brake In the event of a fault, illumination of The parking brake can be released manually.
this warning lamp is accompanied by For more information on the electric parking brake,
a message. refer to the corresponding section.
46

Monitoring

Braking fixed. The braking system fluid level has You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
dropped significantly. Top up with brake fluid listed by CITRON.
If the problem persists, have the system checked by a
CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop.
+ fixed, associated The electronic brake force distribution You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
with the ABS warning (EBFD) system has a fault. Have it checked by a CITRON dealer or a qualified
lamp. workshop.
Anti-lock fixed. The anti-lock braking system has a The vehicle retains conventional braking.
Braking System fault. Drive carefully at reduced speed and contact a
(ABS) CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop without
delay.
Dynamic flashing. The DSC/ASR regulation is The system optimises traction and improves the
stability control operating. directional stability of the vehicle.
(DSC/ASR)
fixed. Unless it has been deactivated Have it checked by a CITRON or a qualified
(button pressed and its indicator lamp workshop.
on) the DSC/ASR system has a fault.
Engine flashing. The engine management system has Risk of destruction of the catalytic converter.
autodiagnosis a fault. Have it checked by a CITRON dealer or a qualified
system workshop.
fixed. The emission control system has a The warning lamp should go off when the engine is started.
fault. If it does not go off, contact a CITRON dealer or qualified
workshop without delay.
47

Monitoring
Low fuel level fixed, accompanied by When it first comes on there remains You must refuel as soon as possible to avoid running
an audible signal and approximately 6 litres of fuel in the out of fuel.
a message. tank. Until sufficient fuel is added, this warning lamp will
You are then using the fuel reserve. come on every time the ignition is switched on,
accompanied by an audible signal and a message.
This audible signal and message are repeated with
increasing frequency as the drops towards "0".
Fuel tank capacity: approximately 57 litres (petrol) or
55 litres (Diesel).
Never continue to drive until you run out of fuel as
this could damage the emission control and injection
systems.
Seat belt(s) fixed A seat belt has not been fastened or Pull the strap then insert the tongue in the buckle.
not fastened / or flashing has been unfastened.
unfastened accompanied by an
audible signal.
Airbags on temporarily. This lamp comes on for a few This lamp should go off when the engine is started.
seconds when you turn on the If it does not go off, contact a CITRON dealer or a
ignition, then goes off. qualified workshop.
fixed. One of the airbag or seat belt Have it checked by a CITRON dealer or a qualified
pretensioner systems has a fault. workshop.
Passenger flashing. The passenger airbag system has a Do not have a passenger seated in the front
airbag system fault. passenger seat
Have it checked by a CITRON dealer or a qualified
workshop.
48

Monitoring

Directional flashing. The directional headlamps system Have it checked by a CITRON dealer or a qualified
headlamps has a fault. workshop.
Door(s) open* fixed, associated with A door or the boot is still open. Close the door or boot.
a message identifying
the door, if the speed is
below 6 mph (10 km/h).
fixed, associated with a

message identifying the
door, and accompanied
by an audible signal
if the speed is above
6 mph (10 km/h).
Battery charge fixed. The battery charging circuit has a The warning lamp should go off when the engine is
fault (dirty or loose terminals, slack or started.
cut alternator belt, ...). If it does not go off, contact a CITRON dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Maximum fixed red. The temperature of the cooling Stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
coolant system is too high. Wait until the engine has cooled down before topping
temperature up the level, if necessary.
If the problem persists, contact a CITRON dealer or
qualified workshop.
Engine oil fixed. There is a fault with the engine You must stop as soon it is safe to do so.
pressure lubrication system. Park, switch off the ignition and contact a CITRON
dealer or a qualified workshop.
* Only with the type 1 instrument panel.

49

Monitoring
Under-inflation fixed. The pressure in one or more wheels Check the pressure of the tyres as soon as possible.
is too low. This check should preferably be carried out when the
tyres are cold.
You must reinitialise the system after the adjustment
of one or more tyre pressures and after changing one
or more wheels.
+ flashing then fixed, The system has fault: the tyre Check the tyre pressures as soon as possible.
accompanied by the pressures are no longer monitored. Have the system checked by a CITRON dealer or a
Service warning lamp. qualified workshop.
Foot on the fixed. The brake pedal is not pressed. With an electronic gearbox, press the brake pedal to
brake pedal* start the engine (lever in position N).
If you wish to release the parking brake without
pressing the brake pedal, this warning lamp will
remain on.
With an automatic gearbox, press the brake pedal to
move the gear selector out of position P.
P
flashing. With an electronic gearbox, if you Use the brake pedal and/or the parking brake.
hold the vehicle on an incline using
the accelerator for too long, the clutch
overheats.
Foot on the fixed. In the STOP mode of Stop & Start, You must declutch fully to allow the change to engine
clutch* changing to START mode is refused START mode.
because the clutch pedal is not fully
down.
* Only with the type 1 instrument panel

50

Monitoring
Service indicator
1
System which informs the driver when the Between 600 miles (1 000 km) Less than 600 miles (1 000 km)
next service is due, in accordance with the and 1 800 miles (3 000 km) remain remain before the next service is due
manufacturer's servicing schedule. before the next service is due Example: 560 miles (900 km) remain before
The point at which the service is due is
For 5 seconds after the ignition is switched on, the the next service is due.
calculated from the last indicator zero reset. It
spanner symbolising the service operations comes For 5 seconds after the ignition is switched on,
is determined by two parameters:
on. The distance recorder display line indicates the the screen indicates:
- the distance travelled,
distance remaining before the next service is due.
- the time elapsed since the last service.
Example: 1 700 miles (2 800 km) remain before
the next service is due.
For 5 seconds after the ignition is switched on, the
screen indicates:
5 seconds after the ignition is switched on, the

distance recorder resumes its normal operation.
The spanner remains on to indicate that a
service must be carried out soon.
5 seconds after the ignition is switched on,

the spanner goes off; f the distance recorder
resumes its normal operation. The screen then
indicates the total and trip distances.
More than 1 800 miles (3 000 km)

remain before the next service is due
When the ignition is switched on, no service
information appears in the screen.
51

Monitoring
Service overdue Retrieving the service

For 5 seconds after the ignition is switched on, information
the spanner flashes to indicate that the service You can access the service information at any
must be carried out as soon as possible. time.
Example: the service is overdue by 186 miles Press the trip distance recorder zero reset
(300 km). button.
For 5 seconds after the ignition is switched on, The service information is displayed for a
the screen indicates: few seconds, then disappears.
Service indicator zero reset

After each service, the service indicator must
be reset to zero.
The procedure for resetting to zero is as
5 seconds after the ignition is switched on,
follows:
the distance recorder resumes its normal
switch off the ignition,
operation. The spanner remains on.
press and hold the trip distance recorder
zero reset button,
switch on the ignition; the distance recorder
The distance remaining may be display begins a countdown,
weighted by the time factor, depending when the display indicates "=0", release
on the driving conditions. the button; the spanner disappears.
Therefore, the spanner may also come
on if you have exceeded the period Following this operation, if you wish to
since the last service, indicated in the disconnect the battery, lock the vehicle
servicing and warranty booklet. and wait at least five minutes for the
zero reset to be taken into account.
52

Monitoring
Engine oil level indicator

1
System which informs the driver whether the
engine oil level is correct or not.
This information is indicated for a few seconds
when the ignition is switched on, after the
service information.
Oil level correct Oil level indicator fault
This is indicated by a message in the This is indicated by a message in the
The level read will only be correct if instrument panel. instrument panel. Contact a CITRON dealer
the vehicle is on level ground and the or a qualified workshop.
engine has been off for more than
30 minutes.
Dipstick
Refer to the "Checks" section to locate the
dipstick and the oil filler cap on your engine.
Oil level incorrect There are 2 marks on the dipstick:

This is indicated by a message in the - A = max; never exceed this
instrument panel. level,
If the low oil level is confirmed by a check using - B = min; top up the level via
the dipstick, the level must be topped up to the oil filler, using the grade
avoid damage to the engine. of oil suited to your engine.
53

Monitoring
Distance recorders
The total and trip distances are displayed for
thirty seconds when the ignition is switched off,
when the driver's door is opened and when the
vehicle is locked or unlocked.
To conform to legislation in the country

you are crossing, change the units
of distance (miles or km) via the
configuration menu.
Total distance recorder Trip distance recorder

System which measures the total distance System which measures a distance travelled
travelled by the vehicle since its first during a day or other period since it was reset
registration. to zero by the driver.
With the ignition on, press the button until
zeros appear.
54

Monitoring
1
Allows the manual adjustment of the brightness of the instrument panel and touch screen tablet to
suit the ambient light level.
Operates only when the vehicle lighting is on, with the exception of the daytime running lamps.
Two buttons Touch screen tablet

With the headlamps on, press button B to Press on the "Configuration" menu.
increase the brightness of the instruments Adjust the brightness by pressing on
and controls and the interior mood lighting or the "+" or "-" buttons.
button A to reduce it.
As soon as the lighting reaches the required
level of brightness, release the button.
55

Monitoring
Black screen (black panel) Black screen (touch screen tablet)

instrument panel to be switched off for night
driving.
The instrument panel remains on with the
vehicle speed, the gear selected in an
electronic or automatic gearbox, cruise control
or speed limiter information, if in use, and the
low fuel alerts as appropriate.
If there is an alert or a change in a function
or to a setting, the black panel mode is
interrupted.
Using the steering mounted control: Press on the "Configuration" menu.

With the vehicle lighting on, press this Press the " Turn off screen" button. The
button again to activate the black panel. screen in the touch screen tablet goes off.
Press this button again to deactivate it. Press the screen again (anywhere on its
surface) to switch it on again.
56

Monitoring
Setting the date and time 1
Select the "Configuration" menu. Select "Adjust time" or "Adjust date" and Press "Confirm" to quit.
modify the settings using the number pad,
From the secondary page, select then confirm.
"Time/Date".
57

Monitoring
Trip computer
System that gives you information on the journey in progress (range, fuel consumption).
The information is accessible in the " Driving assistance" menu.
Information display in the touch screen tablet Trip reset

- The current fuel consumption tab
with:
the range,
the current fuel consumption,
the Stop & Start time counter.
- The trip "1" tab with:

the distance travelled.
the average fuel consumption,
Permanent display: the average speed,
When the desired trip is displayed, press
Select the " Driving assistance" menu. for the first trip.
the reset button or on the end of the wiper
The trip computer information is displayed in control stalk.
the primary page of the menu. - The trip "2" tab with: Trips "1" and "2" are independent but their use
Press one of the buttons to display the the distance travelled. is identical.
desired tab. the average fuel consumption, For example, trip "1" can be used for daily
the average speed, figures, and trip "2" for monthly figures.
Temporary display in a new window: for the second trip.

Press the end of the wiper control stalk for
access to the information and display the
different tabs.
58

Monitoring
Trip computer 1
Information display in the instrument panel Trip reset
The display of trip computer information is
permanent when you select the "DIALS"
display mode.
- The current information tab with: When the trip required is displayed, press
the range, the control for more than two seconds
the current fuel consumption, or use the left hand thumb wheel of the
For all other display modes, pressing the end the Stop & Start time counter. steering mounted controls.
of the wiper stalk displays this information in a Trips "1" and "2" are independent but their use
- Trip "1" with:
new window. is identical.
the average speed.
For example, trip "1" can be used for daily
figures, and trip "2" for monthly figures.
Press the button on the end of the wiper the distance travelled,
control stalk to display the various tabs in for the first trip.
succession.
- Trip "2" with:
the average speed,
the distance travelled,
for the second trip.
59

Monitoring
Trip computer, a few definitions

Range Current fuel consumption Distance travelled
(miles or km) (mpg or l/100 km or km/l) (miles or km)
The distance which can still be Calculated over the last few seconds. Calculated since the last trip
travelled with the fuel remaining computer reset.
in the tank (related to the average
fuel consumption over the last
few miles (kilometres) travelled).
This function is only displayed from
20 mph (30 km/h).
This value may vary following a change

in the style of driving or the relief, Average fuel consumption Stop & Start time
resulting in a significant change in the counter
current fuel consumption. (mpg or l/100 km or km/l)
Calculated since the last trip (minutes / seconds or hours /
computer reset. minutes)
If your vehicle is fitted with Stop & Start, a time

counter calculates the time spent in STOP
When the range falls below 20 miles (30 km),
mode during a journey.
dashes are displayed. After filling with at least
It resets to zero every time the ignition is
5 litres of fuel, the range is recalculated and is Average speed
switched on with the START/STOP button.
displayed when it exceeds 60 miles (100 km). (mph or km/h)
Calculated since the last trip
If dashes are displayed continuously computer reset.
while driving in place of the digits,
contact a CITRON dealer or a
qualified workshop.
60

Access
Electronic key
Remote control
Unlocking the vehicle Unlocking the vehicle and
opening the boot
2
Complete unlocking Make a long press on this
button to unlock the vehicle
Press this button.
and, depending on version,
release the tailgate or open the
motorised tailgate.
Settings for the motorised tailgate can be

Selective unlocking adjusted in the "Driving assistance" menu,
To unlock only the driver's door, then " Vehicle settings ".
System which permits remote locking or press this button once. Motorised operation is activated by default.
unlocking of the vehicle as well as opening the
boot and, depending on version, operation of
To unlock the other doors and the boot,
the alarm.
press this button again.
It also allows the location and starting of the
vehicle as well as providing protection against
theft.
The electronic key includes an integral back-up The setting of the selective unlocking is done in
The direction indicators flash for a few
emergency key. the "Driving assistance" menu, then "Vehicle
seconds. The door mirror spot lamps
settings".
come on. Depending on version, the
Complete unlocking is activated by default.
door mirrors unfold, the welcome
lighting comes on, the alarm is
deactivated.
61

Access
Locking the vehicle
Normal locking
Press this button.
If a door or the boot is not properly The automatic folding and unfolding
Holding the button allows the
closed, locking does not take place. of the door mirrors can be deactivated
windows to be raised to the
Nevertheless, the alarm (if fitted) will be by a CITRON dealer or a qualified
desired position.
fully activated after around 45 seconds. workshop.
If the vehicle is unlocked by mistake
Ensure that nothing could prevent the and no action is taken on the doors or
correct closing of the windows. boot, the vehicle will lock itself again
Be aware of children when operating automatically after about thirty seconds.
the windows. if the alarm had already been activated,
it will not be reactivated automatically.
The direction indicators come on for a

few seconds.
Depending on your version, the door
mirrors fold, the alarm is activated.
62

Access
Locating your vehicle 2

Deadlocking This function allows you to identify your vehicle
from a distance, particularly in poor light. Your
Deadlocking renders the interior door vehicle must be locked.
controls inoperative.
It also deactivates the manual central Press this button.
locking button.
Therefore, never leave anyone inside
the vehicle when it is deadlocked.
This will switch on the courtesy lamps and the
direction indicators will flash for about
10 seconds.
With the vehicle unlocked, press

this button.
Within five seconds, press this button again

to deadlock the vehicle.
63

Access
"Keyless Entry and Starting" system

Unlocking the vehicle
Selective unlocking
To unlock only the drivers door, with the
electronic key on your person, pass your
hand behind the driver's door handle. Pull
the door handle to open.
To unlock the complete vehicle, pass your
hand behind one of the door handle of the
front passenger door with the electronic
key close to the passenger door, or
System that allows the opening, closing press the tailgate opening control with
and starting of the vehicle while keeping the the electronic key close to the rear of the
electronic key on your person. Complete unlocking vehicle.
With the electronic key on your person
The electronic key can also be used and in the defined zone A, pass your hand
as a remote control; refer to the "Key / behind the door handle of one of the front Activation or deactivation of the selective
remote control" section. doors to unlock the vehicle or press the unlocking is done in the "Driving assistance"
tailgate opening control. menu, then "Vehicle settings".
Pull the door handle to open the door. By default, complete unlocking is activated.
For reasons of safety and theft The direction indicators flash for
protection, do not leave your electronic a few seconds.
key in the vehicle, even when you are Depending on version, the door mirrors
close to it. unfold, the welcome lighting comes on,
It is recommended that you keep it on the alarm is deactivated.
your person: in a pocket, bag, ...
64

Access
Locking the vehicle

2
Normal locking
With the electronic key in the defined
Ensure that nothing could prevent the
zone A , press with a finger or thumb on
correct operation of the windows.
one of the door handles (at the markings)
Be aware of children when operating
or press the locking button on the tailgate.
the windows.
Maintaining pressure allows the windows to
be raised to the desired position.
The direction indicators come on for a

few seconds.
Depending on your version, the door
mirrors fold, the alarm is activated.
65

Access
By the doors:
Deadlocking renders the interior door
With the electronic key in the defined
controls inoperative.
zone A, press a finger or thumb on one of
It also deactivates the manual central
the front door handles (at the markings) or
control button.
the locking button located on the tailgate to
Therefore, never leave anyone inside
lock the vehicle.
the vehicle when it is deadlocked.
Within five seconds, press the door handle
or the locking button located on the tailgate
again to deadlock the vehicle.
66

Access
If one of the doors or the boot is still

open or if the electronic key for the
As a safety measure (children on
board), never leave the vehicle without
In order to preserve the battery in the
electronic key and the vehicle's battery,
2
Keyless Entry and Starting system has taking the key for the Keyless Entry and the "Hands-free" functions are put into
been left inside the vehicle, the central Starting system, even for a short period. long-term standby after 21 days without
locking does not take place. Be aware of the risk of theft when the use. To restore these functions, press
However, the alarm (if present) will be key for the Keyless Entry and Starting one of the remote control buttons or
fully activated after about 45 seconds. system is in one of the defined zones start the engine with the electronic key
with the vehicle unlocked. in the reader (see the "Starting with
the Keyless Entry and Starting system"
section).
If the vehicle is unlocked by mistake
and with no action on the doors or boot,
the vehicle will lock again automatically
after about thirty seconds.
If the alarm had been activated
previously, it will not be reactivated Accumulations (water, dust, grime,
automatically. salt...) on the inner surface if the door
handle may affect detection.
If cleaning the inner surface of the door
The automatic folding and unfolding handle using a cloth does not restore
of the door mirrors can be deactivated detection, contact a CITRON dealer or
by a CITRON dealer or a qualified a qualified workshop.
workshop. A sudden splash of water (stream of
water, high pressure jet washer, ) may
be identified by the system as the desire
to open the vehicle.
67

Access
Emergency procedure
Emergency unlocking/locking
using the integral key
The integral key is used to lock and unlock the Unlocking Depending on your version, the
vehicle when the electronic key cannot operate
Turn the key towards the front of the vehicle direction indicators flash for a few
and in the event of a fault with the Keyless
to unlock the vehicle. seconds, the door mirrors unfold and
Entry and Starting system:
the welcome lighting comes on.
- cell battery flat, vehicle battery discharged
If the alarm was activated, the siren will
or disconnected, ...
sound on opening the door with the key
- vehicle located in an area with strong
(in the remote control). It stops when
electromagnetic signals.
the ignition is switched on.
Press and hold the latch 1 to extract the

integral key 2.
The integral key is also used to deactivate/
reactivate the passenger's airbag.
It provides a backup means of locking the
passenger doors.
It also allows locking of the vehicle without
activation of the alarm.
68

Access
Normal locking Depending on your version, the

Turn the key towards the rear of the vehicle direction indicators flash for a
to lock the vehicle completely. few seconds, the door mirrors fold.
Deadlocking
Turn the key towards the rear in the driver's If your vehicle has an alarm, this
door lock to lock the vehicle completely. function is not activated by locking with
Turn the key towards the rear again within the integral key.
five seconds to deadlock the vehicle.
69

Access
Remote control problem -

reinitialisation
Following disconnection of the vehicle battery, Changing the battery of the Do not throw the remote control
replacement of the remote control battery or electronic key batteries away, they contain metals
in the event of a remote control malfunction,
Battery ref.: CR2032 / 3 volts. which are harmful to the environment.
you can no longer unlock, lock or locate your
A message appears in the instrument panel Take them to an approved collection
vehicle.
screen when replacement of the battery is point.
Place the mechanical key (integral with the
needed.
remote control) in the lock to unlock your
Unclip the cover using a small screwdriver
vehicle.
at the cutout.
Place the electronic key in the reader.
Lift off the cover.
Switch on the ignition by pressing START/
Remove the flat battery from its location.
STOP.
Fit the new battery into its location
The electronic key is fully operational again.
observing the original direction of fitment.
If the problem persists, contact a CITRON
Clip the cover onto the casing.
dealer or a qualified workshop as soon as
possible.
70

Access
Visit a CITRON dealer with the vehicle's registration document and your personal identification documents and if possible the key code label.
The CITRON dealer will be able to retrieve the key code and the transponder code required to order a new key.
2
Electronic key
The electronic key is a sensitive system; do not operate it while it is in your pocket as there is a possibility that it may unlock the vehicle, without
you being aware of it.
Do not repeatedly press the buttons of your electronic key out of range and out of sight of your vehicle. You run the risk of stopping it from
working and the remote control would have to be reinitialised.
The electronic key cannot operate as a remote control when it is in the reader or even when the ignition is switched on.
Locking the vehicle

Driving with the doors locked may make access to the passenger compartment by the emergency services more difficult in an emergency.
As a safety precaution (with children on board), take the electronic key with you when you leave the vehicle, even for a short time.
Electrical interference
The electronic key may not operate if close to certain electronic devices: telephone, laptop computer, strong magnetic fields, ...
Anti-theft protection
Do not make any modifications to the electronic engine immobiliser system; this could cause malfunctions.
When purchasing a second-hand vehicle

Have all of the keys in your possession paired by a CITRON dealer, to ensure that only your keys allow your vehicle to be unlocked and started.
71

Access
Central locking
Manual central Automatic central locking
locking of doors (anti-intrusion
security)
The doors and boot lock automatically when
When locking / deadlocking from the
driving, as soon as the speed exceeds 6 mph
outside
(10 km/h).
If the vehicle is locked or deadlocked
To activate or deactivate this function (activated
from the outside, the button is not
by default):
active.
with the ignition on, press this button until a
After normal locking, pull one of the
message appears in the instrument panel.
interior door handles to unlock the
vehicle.
If one of the doors or the boot is
After deadlocking, you have to use
open, automatic central locking does
the remote control, the Keyless Entry
not complete: the sound of the locks
and Starting system or the integral
rebounding can be heard.
Press this button to operate the central key to unlock the vehicle.
locking of the vehicle (doors and boot) from
inside the vehicle. Transporting long or voluminous
Pressing the button again unlocks the objects
vehicle completely. If you want to drive with the boot open
but the vehicle's side doors locked,
press the central locking control button
to lock the doors.
Driving with the doors locked may make

access to the passenger compartment
by the emergency services more
difficult in an emergency.
72

Access
Doors
Opening Closing
If a door is not properly closed:
- with the engine running, this
warning lamp and a message
2
appear in the instrument panel
(type 1) for a few seconds,
- when driving (speed above
6 mph (10 km/h)), this
warning lamp and a message,
accompanied by an audible
signal, appear in the instrument
panel (type 1 and type 2) for a
few seconds.
From outside From inside
After unlocking the vehicle using the Pull the front or rear door lever to open the
remote control or the Keyless Entry and door.
Starting system, pull the door handle.
73

Access
Back-up control
System allowing the doors to be locked and
unlocked manually in the event of a malfunction
of the central locking system or battery failure.
Locking the front and rear Unlocking the front and rear
passenger doors passenger doors
Open the doors. Pull the interior door opening control.
For the rear doors, check that the child
lock is not on (see the "Manual child lock"
section).
Locking the driver's door
Insert the integral key in the latch located To ensure complete locking of the
Insert the integral key in the door lock, then on the edge of the door and turn it an vehicle, only disconnecting the battery
turn it to the rear. eighth of a turn to the right for the right inhibits opening of the tailgate from the
You can also apply the procedure described for hand door, and to the the left for the left outside.
the passenger doors. hand door.
Locking is effective when the slot is
horizontal.
Unlocking the driver's door Close the doors and check that the vehicle
Insert the integral key in the door lock, then has locked correctly from the outside.
turn it to the front.
74

Access
Boot
Opening the tailgate Closing the tailgate
With the electronic key /
remote control
Lower the tailgate using the interior
grips.
Release the grips and press down on the
2
Make a long press on this button outside of the tailgate to close it.
to release the tailgate. If the
vehicle was locked, this action
first unlocks the vehicle. If the tailgate is not properly closed:
Raise the tailgate. - engine running, this warning
lamp and a message appear in
the instrument panel (type 1) for
a few seconds,
- vehicle running (speed above
When selective unlocking is activated, With the tailgate opening control 6 mph (10 km/h)), this warning
the electronic key must be close to the With the vehicle unlocked or with the lamp and a message appear
rear of the vehicle. electronic key of the Keyless Entry and in the instrument panel (type 1
Starting system in the zone covered, press and type 2) for a few seconds,
the tailgate control A . accompanied by an audible
Raise the tailgate. signal.
The tailgate is not designed to take a

bicycle carrier.
75

Access
Motorised tailgate
Tailgate controls
A: Exterior control
Never place a finger in the tailgate
locking system: risk of a serious
accident!
Check that there is enough space to allow for To avoid the risk of injury, ensure that
the movement of the tailgate. there is no person close to the rear of
the vehicle when opening and closing
Activation and deactivation of the motorised
the motorised tailgate.
tailgate function is done in the "Driving
Be careful of rear passengers.
assistance" menu, then " Vehicle settings".
This function is deactivated by default.
The motorised tailgate has an obstacle

The tailgate is not designed to support a detection system that automatically B: Interior control
bicycle carrier. interrupts its operation if it contacts an
When installing a bicycle carrier on a obstacle (the movement is reversed by
towbar, it is essential to deactivate the a few degrees to allow the tailgate to
automatic operation. be freed).
76

Access
Motorised opening Motorised closing Memorising an opening

Unlocking and opening the
tailgate with the electronic key /
remote control
There are two possibilities:
Press and release the exterior
control A.
position
Where height is restricted (garage with a low
ceiling, ...) it is possible to limit and memorise
2
or the opening angle of the tailgate.
Make a long press on this button.
Press and then release button B.
This memorisation is done as follows:
- open the tailgate to the desired position,
Unlocking and opening the - press button B or the exterior control A for
tailgate with the Keyless Entry The motorised tailgate has an anti- more than 3 seconds.
and Starting system pinch system that interrupts closing if it Memorisation of the maximum opening position
encounters an obstacle. of the tailgate is confirmed by an audible signal.
Press button A on the tailgate, with the
electronic key in the area of coverage.
Operation of the tailgate can be
interrupted at any time:
When selective locking is activated, the
- by pressing
electronic key must be near the rear of
one of these To cancel the memorised position:
the vehicle.
two buttons, - stop the tailgate in an intermediate position,
or - press button B or the exterior control A for
more than 3 seconds.
Opening the tailgate - by pressing the exterior
control A.
After complete unlocking of the vehicle,
press control A on the tailgate. After interruption of an operation,
The instruction is confirmed by an audible another press on one of the controls
signal. resumes the movement, with the
By default, the tailgate opens exception of a press on the remote
completely or alternatively to the control button, which only allows
memorised position. opening.
77

Access
Tailgate release
The motorised tailgate can be opened and System allowing the mechanical unlocking of
closed manually, even if motorisation is
Precautions in use the boot in the event of a battery or central
activated. In the event of an accumulation of snow locking system malfunction.
on the tailgate, clear the snow before
When opening and closing a motorised tailgate commanding an automatic opening of
manually, there is no assistance from gas-filled the tailgate.
struts. Resistance to opening and closing is The formation of ice can block the
therefore entirely normal. tailgate and prevent its opening: wait
until the ice melts with the heating of the
passenger compartment.
When washing the vehicle in an
automatic car wash, don't forget to
lock your vehicle to avoid the risk of
unexpected opening.
Reinitialising the tailgate Repeated opening and closing of the
This operation is necessary where there is no tailgate can cause overheating of its
movement - after detection of an obstacle, after electric motor, after which opening and
connecting or recharging the battery, ... closing will not be possible.
Unlocking
Open the tailgate by hand, if necessary. Allow 10 minutes for the motor to cool Fold back the rear seats to gain access to
Manually close the tailgate fully. down before operating the tailgate the lock from inside the boot.
If the problem persists, contact a CITRON again. Insert a small screwdriver into hole A of the
dealer or a qualified workshop. lock to unlock the tailgate.
Move the latch to the left.
Locking after closing

If the fault persists after closing again, the boot
will remain locked.
78

Access
Alarm
System which protects and provides a deterrent against theft and break-ins. It provides the following types of monitoring:
Self-protection function
The system checks for the
Locking the vehicle with full
alarm system 2
disconnection of any of its components.
The alarm is triggered if the battery, Activation
the button or the wires of the siren are Switch off the ignition and get out of the vehicle.
disconnected or damaged.
Lock the vehicle using the
remote control.
For all work on the alarm system,
contact a CITRON dealer or a
qualified workshop. or
Lock the vehicle using the "Keyless Entry
- Exterior perimeter and Starting" system.
The system checks for opening of the vehicle.
The alarm is triggered if anyone tries to open a The monitoring system is active: the indicator
door, the boot or the bonnet... lamp in the button flashes once per second and
the the direction indicators come on for about
2 seconds.
- Interior volumetric
After an instruction to lock the vehicle locked
The system checks for any variation in the using the remote control or the Keyless Entry
volume in the passenger compartment. and Starting system, the exterior perimeter
The alarm is triggered if anyone breaks a monitoring is activated after a delay of
window, enters the passenger compartment or 5 seconds, the interior volumetric monitoring
moves inside the vehicle. after 45 seconds.
If an opening (door, boot, bonnet...) is not

closed fully, the vehicle is not locked but the
exterior perimeter monitoring will be activated
after a delay of 45 seconds, at the same time
as the interior volumetric monitoring.
79

Access
Locking the vehicle

with exterior perimeter
monitoring only
Deactivation Deactivate the interior volumetric monitoring
Press one of the unlocking buttons on the to avoid unwanted triggering of the alarm in
In the case of automatic locking of the
remote control: certain cases such as:
vehicle (which occurs after a period of
short press 30 seconds if a door or the boot is not - leaving a window partially open,
opened), the monitoring system is not - washing your vehicle,
reactivated automatically. To reactivate - changing a wheel,
long press it, it is necessary to unlock the vehicle
and lock it again, using the remote
control or the "Keyless Entry and Deactivation of the volumetric
Starting" system. monitoring
or
Unlock the vehicle using the "Keyless Entry Switch of the ignition and within
and Starting" system. OFF ten seconds press this button
The monitoring system is deactivated: the until its indicator lamp is on fixed.
indicator lamp in the button is off and the
direction indicators flash for about 2 seconds.
Get out of the vehicle.
Immediately lock the vehicle using the
remote control or the "Keyless Entry and
Starting" system.
Only the exterior perimeter protection system is
active: the indicator lamp in the button flashes
once per second.
To be effective, this deactivation must be done
every time the ignition is switched off.
80

Access
Triggering of the alarm

This is indicated by sounding of the siren
and flashing of the direction indicators for
Locking the vehicle without
activating the alarm
Lock or deadlock the vehicle using the key
2
thirty seconds. (integral with the remote control) in the
Reactivation of the interior The monitoring functions remain active until driver's door lock.
volumetric monitoring the alarm has been triggered eleven times in
Deactivate the exterior perimeter succession.
When the vehicle is unlocked using the remote
monitoring by unlocking the vehicle using
control or the Keyless Entry and Starting Operating fault
the remote control or the Keyless Entry and
Starting system. system, rapid flashing of the indicator lamp When the ignition is switched on, fixed
The indicator lamp in the button goes off. in the button informs you that the alarm was illumination of the indicator lamp in the button
triggered during your absence. When the indicates a fault in the system.
Reactivate the full alarm system by locking ignition is switched on, this flashing stops Have it checked by a CITRON dealer or a
the vehicle using the remote control or the immediately. qualified workshop.
"Keyless Entry and Starting" system.
The indicator lamp in the button flashes once
per second again.
Failure of the remote control Automatic activation*

To deactivate the monitoring functions: 2 minutes after the last door or the boot is
Unlock the vehicle using the key (integral closed, the system is activated automatically.
with the remote control) in the driver's door To avoid triggering the alarm on entering
lock. the vehicle, first press the unlocking button
Open the door; the alarm is triggered. on the remote control or unlock the vehicle
Switch on the ignition; the alarm stops. The using the Keyless Entry and Starting
indicator lamp in the button goes off. system.
* According to country.
81

Access
Electric windows
Safety anti-pinch
To open or close the window, press or pull the When the window rises and meets an obstacle,
switch gently. The window stops as soon as the it stops and immediately partially lowers again.
switch is released. In the event of unwanted opening of the
window on closing, press the switch until the
window opens completely, then pull the switch
immediately until the window closes. Continue
to hold the switch for approximately one second
1. Left hand front electric window. after the window has closed.
2. Right hand front electric window.
Automatic operation The safety anti-pinch function is not active
3. Right hand rear electric window. To open or close the window, press or pull during this operation.
4. Left hand rear electric window. switch fully: the window opens or closes
5. Deactivating the electric window completely when the switch is released.
switches located at the rear seats. Pressing the switch again stops the movement
of the window.
The electric window switches remain

operational for approximately 45 seconds after
switching off the ignition.
Once this time has elapsed, the electric
windows will not operate. To reactivate them,
switch the ignition on again.
82

Access
Reinitialisation of the
Deactivating the rear controls for

electric windows
Following reconnection of the battery, the
In the event of contact during operation
2
the rear windows safety anti-pinch function must be reinitialised.
of the windows, you must reverse the
The safety anti-pinch function is not active
For the safety of your children, press movement of the window. To do this,
during these operations.
switch 5 to prevent operation of the press the switch concerned.
rear windows irrespective of their When operating the passenger electric
positions. For each window: window switches, the driver must
- lower the window completely, then raise it, ensure that nothing is preventing
it will rise in steps of a few centimetres with correct closing of the windows.
The warning lamp in the button comes on, each action. Repeat the operation until the The driver must ensure that the
accompanied by a message confirming window closes completely, passengers use the electric windows
activation. It remains on, as long as the child - continue to pull the switch for at least one correctly.
lock is deactivated. second after reaching this position, window Be aware of children when operating
Use of the rear electric windows from the closed. the windows.
driver's controls remains possible. Be aware of passengers or other
persons present when closing the
windows using the the electronic key
or the "Keyless Entry and Starting"
system.
83

Comfort
Front seats
Seat consisting of a seat cushion, a seat back and a head restraint which can all be adjusted to
adapt your position for ease of driving and comfort.
As a safety measure, seat adjustments should only be done when stationary.
Manual adjustments
Forwards-backwards Driver's seat backrest angle Driver's seat height

Raise the control bar and slide the seat Turn the knob to adjust the seat backrest. Pull the control upwards to raise or push
forwards or backwards. it downwards to lower, as many times as
When the seat is in the correct position, push necessary, to obtain the position required.
it forwards and backwards without raising the
control bar to check that the it has latched.
84

Comfort
Passenger's seat backrest angle Table position for the

Pull the control upwards to adjust the passenger's seat backrest
backrest. This position, associated with the position of
Check that there is no object that could
When the backrest angle is correct, release the the rear seats, allows you to carry long objects
interfere with the movement of the seat,
control. inside the vehicle.
both above and below.
Place the head restraint in the low position,

raise the armrest and fold the fixed table
When the backrest is at the correct angle,
onto the back of the seat.
release the control lever. To ensure that the
Pull the control fully up and tip the backrest
backrest does not suddenly fold forwards
forwards.
and hurt you, restrain it with your back or
To return to the normal position, guide the
your hand while operating the control.
backrest backwards until it locks.
85

Comfort
Front seats
Electric adjustments
Forwards-backwards (driver's Seat backrest angle Seat cushion height and angle
seat) Tilt the control forwards or rearwards to Operate the rear part of the control
Push the control forwards or rearwards to adjust the angle of the seat backrest. upwards or downwards to obtain the
slide the seat. desired height.
Operate the front part of the control
upwards or downwards to obtain the
desired angle.
To avoid discharging the battery, carry out

these adjustments with the engine running.
86

Comfort
Storing driving positions
Storing a position Recalling a stored position

Using buttons M / 1 / 2
Switch on the ignition.
Adjust your seat and the door mirrors.
Ignition on or engine running
Press button 1 or 2 to recall the
corresponding position.
3
Press button M, then press button 1 or 2 An audible signal confirms that adjustment
within four seconds. is complete.
An audible signal indicates that the position You can interrupt the current movement by
has been stored. pressing button M, 1 or 2 or by using one of the
Storing a new position cancels the previous seat controls.
position. A stored position cannot be recalled while
System which registers the electrical settings driving.
of the driver's seat and door mirrors. It enables Recalling stored positions is deactivated
you to store and recall two positions using the 45 seconds after switching off the ignition.
buttons on the side of the driver's seat.
87

Comfort
Additional adjustments
Head restraint height and angle Removing a head restraint Comfort head restraints
(depending on version)
To raise a head restraint, pull it upwards. To remove the head restraint, press the Depending on version, you can fold the sides to
To lower the head restraint, press the lug A lug A and pull the head restraint upwards. obtain a more comfortable position.
and the head restraint at the same time. To put the head restraint back in place,
To adjust the angle of the head restraint, tilt engage the head restraint stems in the
its lower part forwards or rearwards. openings keeping them in line with the seat
back and press the lug A at the same time.
The head restraint is fitted with a frame with
notches which prevents it from lowering; this is
a safety device in case of impact.
The adjustment is correct when the upper
edge of the head restraint is level with the
top of the head.
Never drive with the head restraints
removed; they must be in place and
adjusted correctly.
88

Comfort
Electric lumbar adjustment Massage function
Press the control to obtain the desired Activation Deactivation

lumbar support.
Press this switch. You can deactivate the massage
function at any time by pressing this
switch, its indicator lamp goes off.
Its indicator lamp comes on and the massage

function is activated for a period of 1 hour. This function provides the front occupants
During this time, massage is performed in with a lumbar massage. It only operates when
6 cycles of 10 minutes (6 minutes of massage the engine is running or in STOP mode of the
followed by 4 minutes break). Stop & Start system.
After one hour, the function is deactivated, the
indicator lamp goes off.
Adjustment of intensity
Press this button to select one of
the two levels of massage intensity
offered.
89

Comfort
Electric leg rest Heated seats control
Manual passenger seat Electric passenger seat Use the adjustment wheel to switch on and
select the level of heating required:
Press the front or rear part of the control to Push the control forwards or backwards to
unfold or fold away the leg rest. unfold or fold away the leg rest. 0: Off.
The movement stops when you release the The movement stops when you release the 1: Low.
control. control. 2: Medium.
3: High.
With the engine running, the front seats can be

heated separately.
Before operating the leg rest, ensure
that nothing could interfere with its
movement.
90

Comfort
Front armrest
Comfort system for the driver and front

passenger.
Height adjustment
Fully lower the armrest.
Raise it to the required position (low,
intermediate or high).
Once in the high position, lift to release it
and return it to the low position.
91

Comfort
Second-row seats
The 3 seats in the 2nd row are independent of each other and are all the same width. Their backrests can be folded to vary the load space in the boot.
Forwards-backwards adjustment
Raise the lever A , located at the front of

the seat cushion, and adjust the seat to the
desired position.
92

Comfort
"Comfort" position Rear head restraints
Pull the strap B and guide the seat The rear head restraints can be removed and Comfort head restraints
rearwards. have two positions:
Depending on version, the sides can be folded
The backrest reclines and the seat base pivots - high, position for use,
to obtain a more comfortable position.
slightly. - low, storage position.
To raise a head restraint, pull it upwards.
To lower it, press lug A then the head restraint.
Returning the seat to the initial Never drive with the head restraints
position removed; they must be in place and
To remove it: correctly adjusted.
Pull the strap B and guide the seat
- move the head restraint to the high position,
forwards.
- press lug A pulling the head restraint
upwards at the same time.
Supervise any movements of seats To refit it:

when made by children. - engage the rods of the head restraint in the
openings keeping then in line with the seat
back.
93

Comfort
Flat floor
Each seat can be folded onto the floor to vary
the the space available in the boot.
Folding a seat
Place the seats in the fully back position.
From the outside From the boot, when loading for example
Pull firmly upwards on strap C, as indicated You can fold the second-row seats from the
by the arrow, to unlock the seat; keep boot, after first folding the third-row seats.
pulling until the seat is fully folded. Pull on the strap D to release the seat in
Push the seat backrest gently forwards question then push forwards lightly on the
so that the backrest folds onto the seat backrest.
cushion. The assembly lowers onto the To avoid any damage to the mechanism,
floor. the strap D unclips if too much force is
applied. Simply clip it in place again for the
system to be operational again.
94

Comfort
Repositioning a seat Continuity panels

If necessary, straighten the continuity Each seat has a continuity panel at the bottom Releasing / locking the continuity panels
panels for the seats in the 2nd row and lock of the backrest, that once unfolded: Before unfolding the continuity panels,
them in place. - provides a continuous load surface in the check that the seats in the 2nd row are fully
Raise the backrest and push it rearwards boot, whatever the position of the seats, back.
until it locks in position - avoids objects sliding under the seats in Slide the continuity panel latch upwards to
the 2nd row. release.
Before operating the rear seats, check Straighten the continuity panel, then slide
that the outer rear seat belts are not the latch downwards to lock it.
loose, to avoid damaging them. The
centre belt must be stowed. Fix the
tongues of the three belts to their These continuity panels are not
anchorage points. designed to support a weight greater
than 30 kg.
95

Comfort
Access to the third row Leaving the vehicle from Repositioning a seat, from
seats the third-row seats the outside, with the door
Access to the third-row seats is via the outer open
second-row seats. If there are passengers seated in the third row:
manually return the assembly as far
as possible rearwards; the seat does
not return to the fully back position, so
as to retain legroom for the third-row
passengers,
fold the seat cushion until it locks.
Ensure that there is no object on or under the
seat that you want to move.
Lift the lever E. The seat unlocks and

the seat cushion comes up against the
Pull the lever E. The seat unlocks and backrest.
the seat cushion comes up against the Push the seat backrest, still holding the
backrest. lever E in the raised position. In the event of a failure of this system
Hold the lever E in the raised position,
(lever E), the passengers in the third
pushing forwards. The whole seat slides
row can also leave the vehicle after first
towards the front seat.
folding the backrests of the second-row
Space becomes free behind the seat, the third-
seats using the strap D.
row passengers can get to their seats.
Do not allow children to operate the
Before operating the seats, ensure that seats without supervision.
the tables on the back of the first-row
seats are folded away.
96

Comfort
Third row seats

Concertina boards Repositioning the
seats
Two rigid concertina boards, which cannot
be separated from the vehicle, cover the
2 third-row seats, when these are in the folded
position.
3
Folding the concertina boards Remove the luggage net (see the "Boot
fittings" section).
Pull on the control, the 3 sections of the board
Return the second-row continuity panels to
will fold like a concertina.
their initial position and lock them.
When the third-row seats are upright, these
Fold the concertina boards and position
concertina boards can be left either:
them vertically.
- flat behind the seats,
Pull on the strap F located behind the seat
- in the vertical position,
backrest. The backrest pivots rearwards,
thereby leaving a storage area available.
pulling the seat base with it. The seat locks
in the open position.
Each of the two floor panels can

support a load of 100 kg.
97

Comfort
Folding the seats
Return the second-row continuity panels to Next push the backrest gently forwards. Before moving the third-row seats,
their initial position and lock them. The backrest pivots, folding onto the seat return the rigid floor plates of the
Lower the head restraints. base. The seat base then folds into the second-row seats to the upright position
Correctly position the concertina board stowage area provided for that purpose. and lock them.
vertically behind the seat. Reposition the concertina boards over the Do not try to fold a third-row seat that
Check that the seat belts for the 3rd row folded seats. has not first had the backrest fully
seats are correctly fixed to the loops and
locked in place.
are not folded.
Do not leave objects either on or
Pull the strap G, located at the bottom of
underneath the seat bases of the third-
the seat backrest. The seat unlocks.
row seats when you are folding them.
Do not leave your hand on the control G
as you fold the seats, as you risk
trapping your fingers.
Do not allow children to operate the
seats without supervision.
98

Comfort
Seat modularity and configurations

Examples of configurations
5 seats 3 seats
4 seats Maximum loadspace
99

Comfort
Examples of seat configurations
7 seats Maximum loadspace 4 seats
For easy modification of your

interior vehicle space, all the rear seats
can be individually folded: onto the
second-row floor, and under the third-
row floor. You can then have a load
floor that is continuous up to the front
seat backrests.
The seats must only be folded and
unfolded with the vehicle stationary.
6 seats 5 seats
100

Comfort
Mirrors
Door mirrors
Folding
From outside: lock the vehicle using the
electronic key or the Keyless Entry and
Starting system.
From inside: with the ignition on, pull the
control A in the central position rearwards.
3
If the mirrors are folded using control A,
they will not unfold when the vehicle is
unlocked. Pull again on control A.
Each fitted with an adjustable mirror glass Adjustment

providing the lateral rearward vision necessary Unfolding
Move control A to the right or to the left to
for overtaking or parking. They can also be
select the corresponding mirror. From outside: unlock the vehicle using the
folded for parking in confined spaces.
Move control B in all four directions to electronic key or the Keyless Entry and
adjust. Starting system.
Return control A to the central position. From inside: with the ignition on, pull the
control A in the central position rearwards.
Demisting - Defrosting
Demisting-defrosting of the door The folding and unfolding of the door
mirrors operates with the engine mirrors using the remote control can be
running, by switching on the heated deactivated by a CITRON dealer or a
rear screen (refer to the "Rear screen The objects observed are, in reality, qualified workshop.
demist-defrost" section). closer than they appear.
Take this into account in order to
correctly judge the distance of vehicles If necessary, it is possible to fold the
approaching from behind. mirrors manually.
101

Comfort
Rear view mirror

Automatic tilting in reverse gear Adjustable mirror providing a central rearward view.
Equipped with an anti-dazzle system, which darkens the mirror glass and reduces the nuisance to
the driver caused by the sun, headlamps from other vehicles...
System which provides a view of the ground
during parking manoeuvres in reverse gear. As a safety measure, the mirrors should be adjusted to reduce the "blind spot".
With the engine running, on engaging reverse Manual day/night model Automatic day/night model
gear, the mirror glasses tilt downwards.
They return to their initial position:
- a few seconds after coming out of reverse gear,
- once the speed of the vehicle exceeds
6 mph (10 km/h),
- on switching off the engine.
This function can be deactivated in the

"Driving assistance" menu, then " Vehicle
settings".
Adjustment By means of a sensor, which measures the

light from the rear of the vehicle, this system
Adjust the mirror so that the glass is
automatically and progressively changes
directed correctly in the "day" position.
between the day and night uses.
Day / night position In order to ensure optimum visibility

Pull the lever to change to the "night" anti- during your manoeuvres, the mirror
dazzle position. lightens automatically when reverse
Push the lever to change to the normal gear is engaged.
"day" position.
102

Comfort
Steering wheel adjustment

Child surveillance mirror
3
When stationary, y pull the control lever to
release the adjustment mechanism.
Adjust the height and reach to suit your
A child surveillance mirror is fitted above the
driving position.
rear view mirror. This allows you to monitor the
Push the control lever to lock the
vehicles rear passengers, or it can facilitate
adjustment mechanism.
conversation between the front and rear
passengers without the need to move the rear
view mirror.
It can be folded away to eliminate dazzle.
As a safety precaution, these
operations should only be carried out
while the vehicle is stationary.
103

Comfort
Ventilation
The air circulating in the passenger compartment
is filtered and originates either from the outside via
the grille located at the base of the windscreen or
from the inside in air recirculation mode.
Air treatment
The incoming air follows various routes
depending on the controls selected by the
driver:
- direct arrival in the passenger compartment
(air intake),
- passage through a heating circuit (heating),
- passage through a cooling circuit (air
conditioning).
Control panel Air distribution

The controls of this system are accessible 1. Windscreen demisting-defrosting vents. 4. Central adjustable air vents.
in the "Air conditioning" menu of the touch 2. Front quarter light demisting-defrosting 5. Air outlets for the front footwells.
screen tablet A . vents. 6. Side vents for the 2nd row.
The demisting/defrosting controls for the 3. Front side window demisting/defrosting 7. Air outlets for 2nd row footwells.
windscreen and rear screen are located on the vents. 8. Sunshine sensor.
left of the touch screen tablet. Adjustable side air vents.
104

Comfort
Recommendations for ventilation and air conditioning

In order for these systems to be fully effective, follow the operation and maintenance If after an extended stop in sunshine,
guidelines below: the interior temperature is very high, first
To obtain an even air distribution, take care not to obstruct the exterior air intake grilles ventilate the passenger compartment for
located at the base of the windscreen, the nozzles, the vents and the air outlets, as well a few moments.
as the air extractor located in the boot.
Do not cover the sunshine sensor, located on the dashboard; this is used for regulation
of the digital air conditioning system.
Put the air flow control at a setting high
enough to quickly change the air in the
passenger compartment.
3
Operate the air conditioning system for at least 5 to 10 minutes, once or twice a month The air conditioning system does not
to keep it in perfect working order. contain chlorine and does not present
Ensure that the passenger compartment filter is in good condition and have the filter any danger to the ozone layer.
elements replaced regularly.
We recommend the use of a combined passenger compartment filter. Thanks to its
special active additive, it contributes to the purification of the air breathed by the
The condensation created by the air
occupants and the cleanliness of the passenger compartment (reduction of allergic
conditioning results in a discharge
symptoms, bad odours and greasy deposits).
of water under the vehicle which is
To ensure correct operation of the air conditioning system, you are also advised to have
perfectly normal.
it checked regularly as recommended in the maintenance and warranty guide.
If the system does not produce cold air, switch it off and contact a CITRON dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Stop & Start
When towing the maximum load on a steep gradient in high temperatures, switching off the The heating and air conditioning
air conditioning increases the available engine power and so improves the towing ability. systems only work when the engine
is running. To maintain a comfortable
temperature in the passenger
compartment, you can temporarily
deactivate the Stop & Start system (see
the corresponding section).
105

Comfort
Heating
The heating system works only when the The symbol for airflow (a fan) fills progressively The air distribution can be varied by using more
engine is running. according to the air flow setting made. than one button.
Press the button for the "Air conditioning" By reducing the air flow to the minimum, you Each press of a button activates or deactivates
menu to display the page for the system are stopping ventilation of the passenger the function.
controls. compartment. The indicator lamp is on when the button is
activated. For an even distribution of air in the
passenger compartment, the three buttons can
Avoid driving for too long without be activated simultaneously.
ventilation (risk of misting and
deterioration of air quality).
Air intake / Air recirculation
The intake of exterior air prevents and

Temperature adjustment Air distribution adjustment eliminates misting of the windscreen and side
Press one of these buttons, windows.
or move the cursor from blue Windscreen. The recirculation of interior air prevents exterior
(cold) to red (hot) to adjust the odours and smoke entering the passenger
temperature to your wishes. compartment.
Press this button to recirculate
Footwells.
the interior air. The indicator lamp
in the button comes on.
Air flow adjustment Press the button again to allow
Press one of these buttons to Centre and side vents. the intake of exterior air. This is
increase or decrease the speed confirmed by the indicator lamp
of the booster fan. going off.
106

Comfort
Dual-zone manual air conditioning with temperature regulation

The air conditioning system operates with the Temperature adjustment Air flow adjustment
engine running.
The temperature at the nozzles and vents
is regulated by the system according to the The driver and front passenger can each adjust Press one of these buttons to
temperature in the passenger compartment
and the temperature setting.
Press the button for the "Air conditioning"
menu to display the system controls page.
the temperature.
Press one of these buttons to

reduce (blue) or increase (red)
increase or decrease the speed of
the air booster fan.
3
the value. The air flow symbol (a fan) fills progressively
according to the quantity of air wanted.
The value indicated corresponds to a level of By reducing the air flow to minimum, you are
comfort and not to a temperature in degrees Celsius stopping ventilation.
or Fahrenheit (depending on the unit selected).
A setting of around 21 provides optimum
comfort. Depending on your requirements, a
setting between 18 and 24 is normal.
Avoid driving too long without ventilation
In addition, it is recommended that a difference
(risk of misting and deterioration of air
between left and right of more than 3 should be
quality).
avoided.
107

Comfort
Air distribution adjustment Air intake / Air recirculation Air conditioning On / Off
These buttons are used to arrange The intake of exterior air prevents the formation The air conditioning is designed to
the distribution of air in the passenger of mist on the windscreen and side windows. operate effectively in all seasons,
compartment by combining several air outlets. The recirculation of interior air isolates the with the windows closed.
passenger compartment from exterior odours
Windscreen. It enables you to:
and smoke.
- lower the temperature, in summer,
- increase the effectiveness of the demisting
in winter, above 3C.
Footwells. This function allows hot or cold air to be
delivered selectively and more quickly.
Switching on
Central and side vents. Press this button, the associated
indicator lamp comes on.
Press the button to recirculate
the interior air. The indicator lamp
The air distribution can be adapted by using comes on. The air conditioning does not operate
several buttons: illumination of the indicator Press the button again to permit when the air flow adjustment is set to
lamp confirms the presence of fan boosted air the intake of exterior air. The off.
in the direction indicated, the indicator lamp off indicator lamp goes off to confirm
indicates the absence of fan boosted air in the this.
direction indicated. Switching off
For a uniform distribution of air in the
Press the button again, the associated
passenger compartment, the three buttons can Avoid driving too long without indicator lamp switches off.
be activated simultaneously. recirculation of interior air (risk of
misting and deterioration of air quality).
108

Comfort
Dual-zone digital air conditioning

This air conditioning system operates with the engine running, but the ventilation and its controls Temperature adjustment
are available with the ignition on.
Operation of the air conditioning and regulation of temperature, air flow and air distribution in the
The driver and front passenger can each set
passenger compartment are automatic.
the temperature.
Press the button for the "Air conditioning" menu to display the controls for the air conditioning
system. Press one of these buttons
to increase the value.
3
Depending on the colour scheme chosen, the system controls page is displayed differently: Press one of these buttons
to decrease the value.
It is recommended that you avoid a left/right

setting difference of more than 3.
The value indicated corresponds to a level of

comfort and not to a precise temperature.
1. Automatic mode. 4. Air conditioning On / Off.

2. Driver's side temperature adjustment. 5. Air distribution adjustment.
3. Passenger's side temperature adjustment. 6. Air flow adjustment.
7. Air intake / air recirculation.
109

Comfort
Automatic comfort
programme
Press the "AUTO" button This setting is associated with AUTO mode
to activate or deactivate the only. However, on deactivation of AUTO mode,
automatic mode of the air the indicator for the last setting remains on.
conditioning system. Changing the setting does not reactivate AUTO
mode if deactivated.
When the indicator lamp in the button is on, the
air conditioning system operates automatically:
the system manages the temperature, air
flow and air distribution in the passenger
compartment in an optimum way according to
the comfort level you have selected.
It is possible to modulate the intensity of the To change the current setting, shown by the
automatic comfort programme by choosing one In cold weather with the engine cold,
green indicator lamp, press the button for the
of three mode settings offered in a secondary the air flow is increased gradually until
desired mode:
page of the "Air conditioning" menu. the system has warmed up, in order
"Soft": provides soft and quiet to limit the delivery of cold air into the
operation by limiting air flow. passenger compartment.
On entering the vehicle, if the interior
temperature is much colder or warmer
than the comfort value setting, there
"Normal": offers the best compromise
is no need to alter the value displayed
between a comfortable temperature
in order to reach more quickly the
and quiet operation (default setting).
required level of comfort. The system
compensates automatically and
"Fast": provides strong and effective corrects the temperature difference as
air flow. quickly as possible.
110

Comfort
Resuming manual control

You can manually adjust one or more settings, Air flow adjustment Air distribution adjustment
while retaining automatic control of the other
functions: Press one of these buttons to You can modulate the distribution of air in the
-
-
air flow,
air distribution.
increase or decrease the speed
of the booster fan.
passenger compartment using these three buttons.
Windscreen. 3
As soon as you modify a setting, the indicator The air flow symbol (a fan) is filled in
lamp in the "AUTO" button goes off. progressively in relation to the quantity of air Footwells.
wanted.
Press the "AUTO" button again
By reducing the air flow to minimum, you are
to activate the automatic comfort
stopping ventilation.
programme again. Centre and side vents.
"OFF" is displayed alongside the fan.
Avoid driving for too long with the

ventilation off (risk of misting and Each press on a button activates or deactivates
deterioration of air quality). the function. The indicator lamp is on when the
button is activated. For a uniform distribution in
the passenger compartment, all three buttons
can be pressed simultaneously.
In AUTO mode, the indicator lamps in all three

buttons are off.
111

Comfort
Air conditioning On/Off Air intake/Air recirculation "Mono" function

The air conditioning is designed to The intake of exterior air avoids misting of the The comfort setting for the passenger's side
operate efficiently in all seasons, with windscreen and side windows. can be indexed to the driver's comfort setting
the windows closed. (mono-zone).
It allows you: Air recirculation prevents exterior odours and From the secondary page of the "Air
- in summer, to lower the temperature, smoke from entering the passenger compartment. conditioning" menu:
- in winter, above 3 C, to improve demisting.
Press this button to activate /
This function also allows faster heating
deactivate the "Mono" function.
or cooling of the air in the passenger
The indicator lamp in the button
Switching on compartment.
is on when the function is
Press the "A/C" button to activate the air
Press this button to choose activated.
conditioning
When the indicator lamp under the button the mode for air entry to the
The function is deactivated automatically when
is on, the air conditioning function is passenger compartment.
the passenger uses their temperature setting
activated. When the indicator lamp under the button is off, buttons.
The air conditioning cannot operate when the the intake of exterior air is active.
air flow is set to off. When the indicator lamp under the button is
on, air recirculation is activated, the intake of
Switching off exterior air is off.
Press the "A/C" button again to deactivate
the air conditioning
When the indicator lamp under the button Avoid prolonged operation of the air
is off, the air conditioning function is recirculation function (risk of misting
deactivated. and of deterioration of the air quality).
112

Comfort
"Rear" function Settings for passengers in Settings for

the 2nd row of seats passengers in the
This function gives rear passengers access to 3rd row of seats
the adjustment controls and allows.
-
-
the distribution of air conditioned air to the
vents for the 2nd row of seats,
the distribution of ambient air to the vents
3
for the 3rd row of seats.
From the secondary page of the "Air

conditioning" menu:
Press this button to activate /
deactivate the "Rear" function
is on when the function is
Press the vent cover.
activated.
Adjust the flow of air to the two vents using
the four-position wheel (off, low, medium,
high).
Direct the vent by turning the cover.
Turn the upper wheel to open or close the
rear vent.
Turn the lower knob to reduce (to the left)
or increase (to the right) the air flow.
113

Comfort
Front Demist - Defrost

Ventilation with ignition on Press this button to demist or
defrost the windscreen and side
function windows as quickly as possible.
With the ignition on, you can use the
ventilation system and have access to the "Air
comes on.
conditioning" menu to adjust the air flow and
air distribution in the passenger compartment. The system automatically manages the air
This function is available for a few minutes, conditioning, air flow and air intake, and
depending on the state of charge of the battery provides optimum distribution towards the
of your vehicle. windscreen and side windows.
To switch it off press this button, the
indicator lamp goes off.
This function does not activate the air
conditioning.
You can make use of the residual heat in the
engine to warm the passenger compartment
With Stop & Start, when demisting has
using the temperature setting buttons.
been activated, the STOP mode is not
available.
114

Comfort
Rear screen demist - defrost

Switching off Switch off the heating of the rear screen
The demisting/defrosting switches off automatically and door mirrors as soon as you judge
to prevent an excessive consumption of current. it possible, as reducing the consumption
of electrical current reduces fuel
It is possible to stop the demisting/
defrosting operation before it is
switched off automatically by
consumption.
3
pressing the button again. The
indicator lamp associated with the
button switches off.
The rear screen demist - defrost

Switching on can only operate when the engine is
running.
Press this button to demist/defrost
the rear screen and (depending
on version) the door mirrors. The
indicator lamp associated with the
button comes on.
115

Comfort
Scented air freshener

The scented air freshener releases a fragrance into the passenger compartment via the central air vents.
The air freshener contains an empty To remove the air freshener To insert the air freshener
cartridge when your vehicle is delivered.
You therefore need to insert a cartridge
in order to use the air freshener.
Adjustment of flow
Press the button A , rotating it a quarter turn After fitting or changing a cartridge:
to the left as far as it will go. place the air freshener back in its housing.
Remove the air freshener from the rotate it a quarter turn to the right.
dashboard.
Replace the cartridge (see "Replacing a
cartridge").
Rotate the button A to adjust (to the left

to reduce, to the right to increase) or stop
(maximum to the left) the flow of scented
air.
The central air vents have to be open.
A cartridge lasts on average 3 months,

based on one hours usage per day.
116

Comfort
Replacing a cartridge Air freshener button
For safety, use only cartridges that are

provided for this purpose.
Retain the containers for storing used
3
cartridges.
Do not recharge or dismantle the
cartridges.
Keep them out of reach of children and
animals.
Avoid all contact with the skin and with
the eyes.
In the event of ingestion, consult a
The recharge for the air freshener consists of a The air freshener button A is independent of doctor and show them the product
cartridge B and its sealed container C. the cartridge. Cartridges are supplied without packaging or label.
Remove the protective film D. the air freshener button A . Do not install or remove a cartridge
Place the head of the cartridge B on the The button of the air freshener A can only be while you are driving.
button A of the air freshener. fitted to the centre of the dashboard with a
Rotate it a quarter turn to lock it on the cartridge attached.
button and remove the container. Therefore always keep the air freshener
Insert the air freshener into its housing. button A and one cartridge.
You can change cartridges at any time, keeping Replacement cartridges are available,
the used cartridges in their original containers. depending on country, either on the Internet
site or from a CITRON dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Locations are provided in the glove box for
storing cartridges and containers.
117

Comfort
Front fittings
Sun visor.
2. Card holder.
3. Glove box.
4. Central storage.
It contains the power and audio sockets.
5. Raised console with closed storage, low
console or removable console.
6. Cup holder.
7. Door pockets.
8. Storage below the steering wheel.
(Handbook pack).
118

Comfort
Sliding sun visor Glove box

Sliding blinds Sun visor rails
Sliding blinds are provided for your protection The blinds are extended on the sun visor rails. Depending on equipment, it may contain a CD
against bright sunlight. They can be adjusted Fold the visor downwards, to protect against player.
manually. dazzle to the face. To open the glove box, raise the handle.
Slide the blind to the desired position by If dazzle is coming from the side windows, It is illuminated when the lid is opened.
pushing at A. detach the visor from its housing above the It is cooled by a manual directional ventilation
centre of the windscreen and pivot it to the side. nozzle.
The visors are fitted with a locking system on It is connected directly to your vehicle's air
their central housing when the blind is reeled in. conditioning system and is supplied with cool
To detach the visor or to reposition it, it must be air whatever the temperature setting for the
in a vertical position. passenger compartment.
The refrigeration of your glove box operates
only with the engine running and the air
conditioning on.
Do not attach or suspend heavy objects

on the slide rail of the sun blind.
119

Comfort
Removable console
The removable console is a portable storage space secured to the lower centre console.
It has a sliding lid, an open storage space and two cup holders.
Releasing the removable Refitting the removable

console console
Raise the locking control located at the Carry out these operations in reverse
When not fixed to its carrier, the
front of the console. order. Ensure that the console has locked
removable console should be stowed
With one hand, lift the front part of the into place.
in the boot. It could become a projectile
console.
in the event of a sudden stop or violent
With the other hand, grasp the rear part to
impact.
release the removable console.
120

Comfort
Central storage compartment

230 V / 50 Hz power socket
3
To open the central storage compartment,
pull the grip and lower the cover.
A 230 V / 50 Hz socket (maximum power:
It is illuminated on opening. Connect only one device at a time to
120 W) is fitted in the central storage box.
A button on the upper part allows the lighting to the socket (no extension or multi-way
To use the socket:
be deactivated. connector).
open the central storage box,
Connect only devices with class II
check that the warning lamp is on green,
Depending on equipment, it may contain: insulation (shown on the device).
connect your multimedia or other electrical
- one 230 V socket, As a safety measure, when electrical
device (telephone charger, laptop
- one 12 V socket, consumption is high and when required
computer, CD-DVD player, baby food
- one or two USB ports, by the vehicle's electrical system
warmer...).
- one auxiliary socket (particular weather conditions, electrical
This socket works with the engine running, as
overload...), the current supply to the
well as in STOP mode with Stop & Start.
socket will be cut off; the green warning
lamp goes off.
In the event of a fault with the socket, the green
warning lamp flashes.
Have it checked by a CITRON dealer or a
qualified workshop.
121

Comfort
12 V accessory socket Auxiliary socket USB ports
To connect a 12 V accessory (maximum The auxiliary socket is located in the central Depending on equipment, one or two USB
power: 120 Watts), lift the cover and storage box. ports are located in the central storage box.
connect a suitable adaptor. It permits the connection of a portable device, They allow the connection of a portable device
such as a digital audio player of the iPod type, or a USB memory stick.
to listen to your music files using the vehicle's They read the audio files which are transmitted
speakers. to your audio equipment and played via the
The management of the files is done using your vehicle's speakers.
portable device. You can manage these files using the steering
mounted or touch screen tablet controls.
When a USB port is used, the portable

device charges automatically.
For more information on the use of this Only the right hand USB port can be
used to connect an Apple player or the
equipment, refer to the "Audio and telematics"
"CITRON MULTICITY CONNECT"
section.
connection key.
122

Comfort
Mats
Removable carpet protection.
Fitting Removal To avoid any risk of jamming of the

To remove the mat on the driver's side: pedals:
move the seat as far back as possible, - only use mats which are suited to
unclip the fixings,
remove the mat.
-
the fixings already present in the
vehicle; these fixings must be used,
never fit one mat on top of another.
3
The use of mats not approved by
CITRON may interfere with access to
the pedals and hinder the operation of
Refitting the cruise control / speed limiter.
The mats approved by CITRON have
To refit the mat on the driver's side:
two fixings located below the seat.
position the mat correctly,
refit the fixings by pressing,
When fitting the mat for the first time, on the
check that the mat is secured correctly.
driver's side use only the fixings provided in the
wallet attached.
The other mats are simply placed on the
carpet.
123

Comfort
Storage boxes Storage below the

steering wheel
Depending on equipment, storage boxes are
located under the front seat.
Opening
This storage compartment below the steering

wheel is intended for stowing your vehicle's
handbook pack.
Raise the grip and lower the storage box

cover.
Do not place heavy objects in the

boxes.
124

Comfort
Rear fittings
Aircraft-style rear tables Individual reading lamps
Rear table stowed Rear table opened Reading lamps C may be fitted in the front seat
backrests, behind the tables. They illuminate
These tables, fitted to the backs of the front the surface of the tables without disturbing the
seats, incorporate a cup-holder recess A and a other passengers.
retaining strap B. They can be used only while the table is down.
Press the "on/off" button to turn the lamp
on or off.
Pull the table downwards to open.
To stow the table, raise it until the latch
locks.
For safety reasons, these tables collapse
downwards if excessive pressure is exerted on
them.
125

Comfort
Side blinds Storage wells 12 V accessory socket
Fitted to the windows for the 2nd row seats, they protect There are two storage wells under the rear To connect a 12 V accessory (maximum
the passenger compartment from the sun's rays. passengers' feet. power: 120 Watts), lift the cover and
To open them, lift the cover at the cutout. connect a suitable adaptor.
Pull the tab A and anchor the blind on the
hook B.
126

Comfort
Rear multimedia
Description
The pack includes:
- the connection and control panel fitted on
the rear face of the centre console,
-
-
two 7-inch screens built into the front head
restraints (with protective covers),
two wireless Bluetooth technology
3
headphone sets with rechargeable
batteries,
- a 12 V charger with two outlets allowing the
simultaneous charging of two headphones,
This multimedia system allows rear passengers
to connect one or two external portable
systems (audio or video player, games 1. Power switch
consoles, DVD player...). The sound is played 2. AV1 video input (yellow RCA socket)
through two Bluetooth wireless headphone 3. Stereo audio input A (red and white RCA
sets, while the video content is displayed in two sockets)
7-inch screens built into the backs of the front 4. AV2 video input (yellow RCA socket)
seat head restraints. 5. Stereo audio input B (red and white RCA
sockets)
6. Selection of display in the left hand screen
(AV1 or AV2)
7. Selection of display in the right hand
screen (AV1 or AV2)
This system operates only with the
8. Connection indicator lamps for the
engine running.
Bluetooth audio headphones (blue)
127

Comfort
Operation
It is possible at any time to modify the
source for the video display (using button 6
or 7 on the control panel: the indicator lamp
for the source selected comes on) as well
as the audio channel (using the selector on
the headphones).
The Multimedia system allows the

connection of a third Bluetooth
headphone set, not supplied.
1. Screen power switch With the engine running, connect your

2. Display adjustment buttons portable system to the RCA connectors
(e.g. with AV1 on the left).
Press the switch on the control panel,
Each headphone set has a switch, the indicator lamp comes on and the AV1
a connection indicator lamp (blue) indicator lamps come on.
and a channel selector (A or B). Make a long press on the switch, its
indicator lamp flashes in blue.
Make a long press on the control panel
switch, the pairing with the headphone set
is complete when the blue indicator lamps
on the headphones and on the system are If your seat is in the table position,
on continuously. position a cover to avoid damaging the
Repeat the operation for the other screen.
headphone set. These covers also conceal each
Press the screen switch if you have a video screen.
source.
Start playing your portable system.
128

Comfort
Boot fittings
1. Rear parcel shelf
(see details on a following page)
2. Hooks
3.
4.
Torch
Storage boxes
3
5. Storage net
6. Lashing eyes
7. 12 V socket (maximum power: 120 Watts)
Versions with storage boxes: these

boxes must be put in place before
loading the boot.
129

Comfort
Rear parcel shelf Hooks Storage boxes
To remove the shelf: The hooks can be used to secure shopping Remove the boot carpet for access to the
unhook the two cords, bags. storage boxes.
raise the shelf slightly, then remove it.
Depending on the configuration, they are laid
out for storing:
There are several options for storing the shelf: - wheel chocks,
- either upright behind the front seats, - a tyre repair kit,
- or flat at the base of the boot. - two warning triangles,
- ...
130

Comfort
Boot fittings
1. Luggage cover blind
2. Torch
3.
4.
5.
6.
Concertina boards
Lashing eyes
12 V socket (maximum power: 120 Watts)
Arm rest with cup holder and storage space
3
7. Retaining straps
8. Location for stowing the luggage cover
blind
9. Open storage
131

Comfort
Luggage cover roller

In the 5-seat configuration, it is installed behind
the second-row seats, with the third-row seats
folded away.
In the 7-seat configuration, it is stowed behind
the third row seats.
Installation Removal
Position the left and right hand ends of the Disengage the roller guides from the rails
roller in cut-out A , with the mobile flap at in the pillars B.
the front. Guide the blind as it is reeled in.
Pull out the blind until it reaches the boot Unlock the roller by pressing one of
pillars. the grips located at the ends of the reel
Insert the guides of the blind into the rails support.
on the pillars B.
The mobile flap allows passengers in

the second row to place their seats in
the "comfort" position.
132

Comfort
3
Stowing behind the 3rd row seats
Ensure that the 3rd row seats are folded. To fold the 3rd row seats with the roller
Fold the first two concertina boards. stowed at the rear, it is necessary to raise the
Install the roller in the space above the arm concertina boards in order to allow access to
rest, one side after the other, inclining it the seat locking controls (red straps).
slightly.
Slide the roller as far as it will go, up to the
cut-outs provided at the back of the boot,
with the two flaps directed downwards.
Unfold the third row seats.
The folded concertina boards can be positioned
horizontally or vertically.
133

Comfort
Torch
This is a removable lamp, fitted in the side of Use
the boot, which can be used to illuminate the
Extract the torch from its location by pulling
boot or as a torch.
it from the front.
Press the switch, located on the back, to
switch the torch on or off.
Unfold the support, located on the back, to
set down and raise the torch; for example,
when changing a wheel.
Operation Storing
This torch operates with NiMH type Put the torch back in place in its location
rechargeable batteries. starting with the rear.
It has a battery life of approximately 45 minutes If you have forgotten to switch off the torch,
and charges while you are driving. this switches it off automatically.
Observe the polarities when fitting the It the torch is not engaged correctly, it
batteries. may not charge and may not come on
Never replace the rechargeable when the boot is opened.
batteries with single-use batteries.
134

Driving
Starting-switching off the engine with the electronic key

Starting the engine
If one of the starting conditions is not
met, a reminder message appears in
the instrument panel screen. In some
circumstances, it is necessary to turn
the steering wheel slightly while pressing
the "START/STOP" button to assist
unlocking of the steering; a message
warns you when this is needed. 4
Place the gear selector lever at N for Briefly press the " START/STOP" For Diesel vehicles, in
vehicles with an electronic gearbox, P or N button. temperatures below zero the
for vehicles with an automatic gearbox or The steering column unlocks and engine will not start until the preheater
neutral with a manual gearbox. the engine starts more or less warning lamp has gone off.
Insert the electronic key in the reader. immediately (see the advice for If this warning lamp comes on after
Press the brake pedal for vehicles with Diesel versions). pressing "START/STOP", you should
an electronic or automatic gearbox, or hold the brake or clutch pedal down
fully declutch for vehicles with a manual until the warning lamp goes off and
gearbox. do not press the START/STOP button
again.
135

Driving
Switching off the engine Emergency stop

Immobilise the vehicle. In the event of an emergency only,
Place the gear selector lever at N for the engine can be switched off
vehicles with an electronic gearbox, P or N without any conditions. To do this,
for an automatic gearbox, or neutral with a press the "START/STOP" button for
manual gearbox. about three seconds.
In this case the steering column locks
as soon as the vehicle stops
Briefly press the " START/STOP "
button
The engine stops and the Electronic key left in the reader
steering column locks. If the electronic key is left in the reader,
Remove the electronic key from the reader. on opening the driver's door a message
appears to warn you.
If the vehicle is not immobilised, the
engine will not stop.
136

Driving
Starting-switching off the engine with the "Keyless Entry and

Starting" system
Starting the engine
Briefly press the " START/STOP" If the electronic key is not detected in
button. the zone, a message is displayed. Move
The steering column locks and the electronic key into the zone so that
the engine starts more or less the engine can be started.
instantly (see the advice for
Diesel versions).
4
Place the gear selector lever at N for If one of the starting conditions is not For Diesel vehicles, in
vehicles with an electronic gearbox, P or N met, a reminder message appears in temperatures below zero the
with an automatic gearbox, or neutral with the instrument panel screen. In some engine will not start until the
a manual gearbox. circumstances, it is necessary to turn preheater warning lamp has
With the electronic key inside the vehicle the steering wheel slightly while pressing gone off.
(it is not necessary to put it in the reader), the "START/STOP" button to assist If this warning lamp comes on
press the brake pedal for vehicles with unlocking of the steering; a message after pressing "START/STOP",
an electronic or automatic gearbox, or warns you when this is needed. you should hold the brake or
fully declutch for vehicles with a manual clutch pedal down until the
The presence in the defined zone of the warning lamp goes off and do
gearbox.
electronic key for the "Keyless Entry not press the START/STOP
and Starting" system is essential. button again.
For safety reasons, do not leave this
zone with the vehicle running.
137

Driving
Switching off the engine Emergency starting

Immobilise the vehicle.
vehicles with an electronic gearbox, P or N
with an automatic gearbox, or neutral with
a manual gearbox.
With the electronic key inside

the vehicle, press the " START/
STOP " button.
The engine stops and the
steering column locks.
If the vehicle is not immobilised, the

engine will not stop.
When the electronic key is in the defined zone Insert the electronic key in the reader.
and your vehicle does not start after pressing Press the brake pedal on vehicles with an
Do not leave your vehicle with the the "START/STOP" button: electronic or automatic gearbox, or fully
electronic key still inside. Place the gear selector at N for vehicles declutch with a manual gearbox.
with an electronic gearbox, P or N for Press the "START/STOP" button.
vehicles with an automatic gearbox or The engine starts.
neutral for vehicles with a manual gearbox.
138

Driving
Emergency switch-off Electronic key not

recognised
In the event of an emergency only,
the engine can be switched of without
conditions. To do this, press and hold
the "START/STOP" button for about
3 seconds.
In this case the steering column locks as soon

4
as the vehicle stops.
If the electronic key is no longer in the defined

zone when driving or when you (later) request
switching off the engine, a message appears in
the instrument panel.
Press and hold the "START/

STOP" button for about
3 seconds if you want to force
switching off the engine (note
that restarting will not be
possible without the key y).
139

Driving
Ignition on without Anti-theft protection

starting Electronic engine immobiliser
With the electronic key in the reader or the The keys contain an electronic chip which has
Keyless Entry and Starting key inside the a secret code. When the ignition is switched
vehicle, pressing the "START/STOP" button, on, this code must be recognised in order for
with no action on the pedals, allows the starting to be possible.
ignition to be switched on. This electronic engine immobiliser locks the
engine management system a few minutes
after the ignition is switched off and prevents
Press the "START/STOP" button, starting of the engine by anyone who does not
the instrument panel comes on have the key.
but the engine does not start. In the event of a malfunction, you are informed
Press the button again to switch off the by a message in the instrument panel screen.
ignition and so allow the vehicle to be In this case, your vehicle does not start; contact
locked. a CITRON dealer as soon as possible.
With the ignition on, the system goes

into energy economy mode when
necessary to maintain the state of
charge of the battery.
140

Driving
Electric parking brake

Indicator lamp
This indicator lamp comes on in the
In the event of a battery failure, the
instrument panel and in the control
electric parking brake no longer works.
lever to confirm the application of the
As a safety measure, if the parking
parking brake.
brake is not applied, immobilise the
It goes off to confirm the release of the parking vehicle by engaging a gear or placing a
brake. chock at one of the wheels.
The system provides, in automatic operation,

The indicator lamp in the control lever flashes
during manual application or release.
After the parking brake has been applied, the
Contact a CITRON dealer or a
qualified workshop.
4
the application of the parking brake on simultaneous flashing of the two indicator
switching off the engine and release as the lamps in the instrument panel and the control
vehicle moves off. lever alerts you to the need to fully secure your
The driver can take over at any time to apply vehicle by engaging a gear (with a manual
or release the parking brake, by operating the or electronic gearbox) or by placing the gear
control lever: selector in position P with an automatic
- by briefly pulling the control lever to apply gearbox, or by fitting a chock to one of the
the brake, wheels. (E.g. : parking on a very steep slope or
- by briefly pushing the control lever, while on a slope with a low battery).
pressing the foot brake, to release.
Automatic mode is activated by default.
The technology adopted for the electric

parking brake does not allow the fitment
of wheels smaller than 16 inches.
141

Driving
Manual operation
Manual release
With the ignition on or the engine running, to
release the parking brake:
press the brake pedal,
while maintaining pressure on the brake
pedal, briefly push the control lever.
Label on door panel The complete release of the parking brake is
confirmed by the brake indicator lamp and the
Before leaving the vehicle, check that When towing, parking on a steep P indicator lamp in the control lever going off,
parking brake is applied: the indicator slope, or if your vehicle is heavily accompanied by the display of the message
lamps in the instrument panel and laden, turn the wheels towards the kerb "Parking brake released".
the control lever must be on fixed, not and engage a gear (with a manual or
flashing. electronic gearbox) or place the gear If you push the control lever without
If the parking brake is not applied, there selector in position P with an automatic pressing the brake pedal, the parking
is an audible signal and a message is gearbox). brake will not be released and a
displayed on opening the driver's door. For towing, you vehicle is approved for message is displayed.
parking on slopes of up to 12%.
Manual application
With the vehicle stationary: briefly pull the
Never leave a child alone inside the control lever.
vehicle with the ignition on, as they Confirmation of the instruction is signaled by
could release the parking brake. flashing of the indicator lamp in the control
lever.
Application of of the parking brake
is confirmed by illumination of the
brake indicator lamp and the P
indicator lamp in the control lever,
accompanied by the display of the
message "Parking brake applied".
142

Driving
Automatic operation
Automatic release Automatic application

Ensure first that the engine is running and the The complete release of the parking With the vehicle stationary, the parking brake
driver's door is properly closed. brake is confirmed by the brake is automatically applied when the engine
The electric parking brake releases indicator lamp and the P indicator is switched offf by pressing the START/STOP
automatically and progressively when you lamp in the control lever going off, button.
press the accelerator:
Manual gearbox: fully depress the clutch
pedal, engage 1st or reverse gear; press
accompanied by the display of the
message "Parking brake released". Application of of the parking brake
is confirmed by illumination of the
4
the accelerator pedal and let up the clutch brake indicator lamp and the P
pedal. When stationary with the engine running, do not indicator lamp in the control lever,
Automatic gearbox: select position D, M or depress the accelerator pedal unnecessarily, accompanied by the display of the
R then press the accelerator. you risk releasing the parking brake. message "Parking brake applied".
Electronic gearbox: select position A, M or
R then press the accelerator pedal.
With the engine stalled or in STOP
mode of Stop & Start, automatic
application does not take place.
In automatic mode, you can manually

apply or release the parking brake using
the control lever.
143

Driving
Special cases
In some situations, you may need to operate Parking the vehicle with the
the parking brake manually. brake released
The complete release of the parking
In very cold conditions, it is
brake is confirmed by the brake
Immobilisation of the vehicle recommended that the parking brake
indicator lamp and the P indicator
with the engine running not be applied (risk of freezing).
lamp in the control lever going off,
To immobilise your vehicle, engage a
To immobilise the vehicle with the engine accompanied by the display of the
gear or fit a chock to one of the wheels.
running, briefly pull the control lever. message "Parking brake released".
Application of of the parking brake
is confirmed by illumination of the Switch off the ignition.
Immobilisation of the vehicle with the
brake indicator lamp and the P parking brake released
indicator lamp in the control lever, Switch off the engine.
accompanied by the display of the Illumination of the warning lamps in the
message "Parking brake applied". instrument panel and control lever confirm
application of the parking brake,
Switch on the ignition again, without
starting the engine.
Release the parking brake manually by
pushing the control lever while keeping
your foot on the brake.
144

Driving
Deactivating automatic Emergency braking

operation The emergency braking should only be
used in an exceptional situation.
In some situations, such as very cold weather From this point the parking brake can only
or towing (caravan, recovery), it may be be applied and released manually using the
necessary to deactivate automatic operation of control lever. In the event of a failure of the main service
the system. brake or in an exceptional situation (e.g. driver
Start the engine.
Apply the parking brake with the control
lever, if it is released.
Repeat this procedure to reactivate automatic
operation.
Reactivation of automatic operation is
taken ill, under instruction, etc) a continuous
pull on the control lever will brake the vehicle.
Braking takes place while the control lever is
4
Take your foot off the brake pedal. being pulled. It is interrupted if the control lever
Push and hold the control lever in the confirmed by the indicator lamp in the is released.
release direction for at least 10 seconds instrument panel going off. The ABS and DSC systems provide stability of
and no more than 15 seconds. the vehicle during emergency braking.
Release the control lever. If the emergency braking malfunctions, the
Press and hold the brake pedal. message "Parking brake control faulty" will be
Pull the control lever in the apply direction displayed.
for 2 seconds.
If a failure of the ABS and DSC systems,

Deactivation of the automatic functions signalled by the illumination of one or both
is confirmed by illumination of this warning lamps in the instrument panel, then
indicator lamp in the instrument panel. stability of the vehicle is no longer guaranteed.
In this event, stability must be assured by the
Release the control lever and the brake
driver by repeating alternate "pull-release"
pedal.
actions on the control lever until the vehicle is
immobilised.
145

Driving
The various alert situations are described in the table below.

In the event of a fault with the electric parking brake it is recommended that you contact a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop without delay.
Situations Consequences
Display of the message "Parking brake fault" and the - Automatic release is not available.
following warning lamps: - If you attempt an automatic release, a help message is displayed on acceleration
when the parking brake is applied, prompting you to use manual release.
Display of the message "Parking brake fault" and of the - Secondary braking does not have full power.
following warning lamps: - If automatic release is not available, a help message is displayed on acceleration
when the parking brake is applied, prompting you to use manual release.
Display of the message "Parking brake fault" and of the - Automatic application is not available: use the control lever.
following warning lamps: - The electric parking brake can only be used manually.
- If automatic release is also not available, a help message is displayed on
acceleration when the parking brake is applied, prompting you to use manual
release.
Display of the message "Parking brake fault" and of the - If manual application and release do not work, the control lever is faulty.
following warning lamps: - The automatic functions must be used in all circumstances: they are
automatically reactivated in the event of failure of the control lever.
- You can no longer immobilise the vehicle with the engine running.
146

Driving
Situations Consequences
Display of the message "Parking brake fault" and of the The Parking Brake is faulty, the manual and automatic functions may not operate.
following warning lamps: When stationary, y to immobilise your vehicle:
- Pull and hold the control lever for about 7 to 15 seconds, until the warning lamp
comes on in the instrument panel.
If this procedure does not work, you should make your vehicle safe:
- Park on a level surface.
- Engage a gear with a manual or electronic gearbox, or place the gear selector in
position P with an automatic gearbox.
- If possible, fit a wheel chock.
Call on a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop.
4
Display of the message "Parking brake fault" and of the - The parking brake does not have its full performance to securely hold the vehicle
following warning lamps: in all situations.
You should make your vehicle safe:
- Park on a level surface.
- Engage a gear with a manual or electronic gearbox, or place the gear selector in
position P with an automatic gearbox.
- If possible, fit a wheel chock.
Call on a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop.
The flashing of the P warning lamps on starting the vehicle indicates that the parking
brake is not correctly applied.
As soon as possible, stop the vehicle and try to completely release the parking brake,
using the control lever, with your foot on the brake pedal.
Display of the message "Battery fault " and the following - The state of charge of the battery is very low and requires immobilisation of the
warning lamp: vehicle in a safe place: engage a gear with a manual gearbox or fit a chock to
one of the wheels.
- Once the battery is completely discharged, the controls do not operate: to
release the parking brake, call on a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop.
147

Driving
Hill start assist

System which keeps your vehicle immobilised Operation
temporarily (approximately 2 seconds) when
starting on a gradient, the time it takes to
move your foot from the brake pedal to the
accelerator pedal.
This system only operates when:
- the vehicle is completely stationary, with
your foot on the brake pedal,
- certain conditions of slope are met,
- with the drivers door closed.
The hill start assist system cannot be
deactivated.
On an ascending slope, with the vehicle On a descending slope, with the vehicle
Do not exit the vehicle while it is being
stationary, the vehicle is held for a stationary and reverse gear engaged, the
held in the hill start assist phase.
momentarily when you release the brake vehicle is held momentarily when you
If you need to exit the vehicle with
pedal: release the brake pedal.
the engine running, apply the parking
- provided you are in first gear or neutral on
brake manually then ensure that the
a manual gearbox,
parking brake warning lamp (and the
- provided you are in position A or M on an Operating fault
warning lamp P in the lever of the
electronic gearbox, D or M on an automatic
electric parking brake) are on fixed (not
gearbox.
flashing).
If a fault in the system occurs, these warning

lamps come on, accompanied by an alert
message. Contact a CITRON dealer or
a qualified workshop to have the system
checked.
148

Driving
5-speed manual 6-speed manual

gearbox gearbox
Engaging reverse gear Engaging 5th or 6th gear Engaging reverse gear
Raise the ring under the knob and move
the gear lever to the left then forwards.
Only engage reverse gear when the

vehicle is stationary with the engine at idle.
4
As a safety precaution and to facilitate
starting of the engine:
With clutch pedal fully down, place the gear Move the lever fully to the right to engage - always select neutral,
lever in neutral. 5th or 6th gear. - press the clutch pedal.
Push the gear lever to the right then
backwards.
Failure to follow this advice may cause
permanent damage to the gearbox
Only engage reverse gear when the (engagement of 3rd or 4th gear by
vehicle is stationary with the engine at idle. mistake).
As a safety precaution and to facilitate

starting of the engine:
- always select neutral,
- press the clutch pedal.
149

Driving
6-speed electronic gearbox system

Six-speed electronic gearbox system which Gear selector lever Steering mounted control paddles
offers a choice between the comfort of fully
automatic operation and manual gear changing.
There are two driving modes:
- automated mode for automatic control
of the gears by the gearbox, without any
action on the part of the driver
- manual mode for sequential gear changing
by the driver using the steering mounted
paddles.
In automated mode, you can temporarily take
over control of gear changing.
R. Reverse +. Change up paddle to the right of the

With your foot on the brake, move the steering wheel.
selector lever. Pull the "+" steering mounted paddle
N. Neutral. towards you to change up a gear.
With your foot on the brake, select this -. Change down paddle to the left of the
position to start the engine. steering wheel.
A. Automated mode. Pull the "-" steering mounted paddle
Move the selector lever to position A to towards you to change down a gear.
select this mode.
M. Manual mode with sequential manual gear
changing.
The steering mounted paddles cannot
Move the selector lever to position M to
be used to select neutral or to engage
select this mode, then use the steering
or disengage reverse gear.
mounted control paddles to change gear.
150

Driving
Displays in the instrument panel Moving off

Select position N. Select automated mode (position A A) or
Press the brake pedal down fully. manual mode (position M) or reverse
Start the engine. (position R).
Release the parking brake by pulling the
N appears in the instrument panel
control lever, if automatic operation has
screen.
been deactivated.
N flashes in the instrument panel,

accompanied by an audible signal and
Progressively take your foot off the brake
pedal,
If the parking brake is released, the vehicle
moves off.
4
a message, if the selector lever is not in
If the parking brake is applied and the
position N on starting.
automatc mode is activated, accelerate
N. Neutral
The Foot on brake warning progressively.
R. Reverse
M. (gear engaged) Manual mode. lamp comes on the instrument
AUTO or A. Automated mode. panel, accompanied by an
audible signal and a message, if the
brake pedal is not pressed on starting A or AUTO and 1, 1 or R is displayed
the engine. in the instrument panel.
151

Driving
Automated mode Manual mode

Select position A. Select position M.
AUTO or A and the gear engaged is The gears engaged are displayed in succession
displayed in the instrument panel. in the instrument panel.
The gear change requests are only acted on if
the engine speed permits.
The gearbox operates in auto-active mode,
It is not necessary to release the accelerator
without any action on the part of the driver. It
during gear changes.
continuously selects the most suitable gear for:
When braking or slowing down, the gearbox
- optimisation of fuel consumption,
changes down automatically to allow the
- the style of driving,
vehicle to accelerate in the correct gear.
- the profile of the road.
On sharp acceleration, the gearbox will not
- the vehicle load.
change up unless the driver acts on the
Temporary control of gear steering mounted paddles.
changing
You can temporarily take over control of
gear changing using the "+" and "-" steering
For optimum acceleration, for example
mounted paddles. If the engine speed allows,
when overtaking another vehicle, press
the instruction to change gear is acted on. You can change mode at any time by moving
the accelerator pedal firmly past the
This function allows you to anticipate certain the selector lever from A to M or the other way
point of resistance.
situations such as overtaking a vehicle or the round.
approach to a corner.
Never select neutral N when driving. After a few moments without any action on Never select neutral N while the vehicle is
the control paddles, the gearbox resumes moving.
automatic control of the gears.
152

Driving
Reverse Stopping the vehicle Operating fault

To engage reverse gear R, the vehicle must be Before switching off the engine, you can:
immobilised with your foot on the brake pedal. - move to position N to engage neutral, With the ignition on, the flashing of A or
Select position R. or AUTO, accompanied by an audible signal and
- leave the gear engaged; in this case, it will a message, indicates a malfunction of the
not be possible to move the vehicle. gearbox.
Engagement of reverse gear is accompanied
by an audible signal.
At low speed, if reverse gear is requested, the

In both cases, if automatic operation of the
electric parking brake has been deactivated,
you must apply the parking brake by pulling
qualified workshop.
4
N indicator flashes and the gearbox goes into
the control lever.
neutral automatically. To engage reverse, put
the selector lever in position N, then position R.
When immobilising the vehicle, with

the engine running, you must place the
selector lever in neutral N.
Before carrying out any work in the
engine compartment, ensure that the
selector lever is in neutral N and that
the parking brake is applied.
Whatever the circumstances, you must
manually apply the parking brake when
parking, if automatic operation has been
deactivated.
153

Driving
Automatic gearbox
This gearbox offers two driving modes. Gear selector lever
- automated mode for automatic
management of the gears by the gearbox, To come out of position P, move the
without any action on the part of the driver, gear selector to the right to the desired
- manual mode for sequential gear changing position, while keeping your foot on the
by the driver using the steering mounted brake pedal.
paddles.
To select position P, move the gear

selector to the highest position
(towards RR), then push it forwards and
It is possible to change from one mode
then to the left.
to the other at any time.
Only engage it when the vehicle is at a
With the automated mode, you can P. Park.
complete stop. In this position, the front
temporarily take control of the gear - Immobilisation of the vehicle, parking brake
wheels are locked. Ensure that the gear
changes at any time. applied or released.
selector is correctly positioned.
- Starting the engine.
R. Reverse.
- Reversing, vehicle stationary and engine at
idle.
N. Neutral. To move the gear selector, switch on
- Immobilisation of the vehicle, parking brake the ignition or start the engine.
applied. If the battery is not sufficiently charged,
- Starting the engine. it is not possible to move the gear
D. Automatic operation. selector.
M. Manual operation with sequential changing
of the six gears.
154

Driving
Steering mounted control paddles Displays in the instrument panel Moving off
With your foot on the brake pedal, select
position P or N.
Start the engine.
Otherwise, there is an audible signal

accompanied by a message.
If P is displayed in the instrument panel,

although the gear selector is in another
position, place the gear selector in
4
position P to be able to start the engine.
+. Control paddle for changing up, to the right When you move the gear selector, the symbol
of the steering wheel. corresponding to its position is displayed in the With the engine running, press the brake
Pull the "+" paddle towards you to change instrument panel. pedal.
up. P. Park. Select automated mode (position D),
-. Control paddle for changing down, to the R. Reverse. manual mode (position M) or reverse
left of the steering wheel. N. Neutral. (position R).
Pull the "-" paddle towards you to change D. Drive (automatic forward drive).
down. 1 to 6. Gears engaged in manual operation.
-. Invalid value in manual operation. If you do not press the
brake pedal to come out of
The steering mounted control paddles position PP, this warning lamp
or symbol appears in the instrument
cannot be used to select neutral or to
panel, accompanied by the message
select or come out of reverse.
"Place automatic gearbox in position P",
flashing of P in the instrument panel
and an audible signal.
155

Driving
Check that the symbol displayed in the

When the engine is running at idle, Never select position N when driving.
instrument panel agrees with the position
brakes releases, if position R, D or M is If position N is engaged in error when
engaged.
selected, the vehicle will move even if moving, allow the engine to idle, then
Progressively release the brake pedal.
the accelerator is not pressed. engage position D to accelerate.
If the parking brake is release, the vehicle
moves off.
If the parking brake is applied and
automatic operation is activated, accelerate
away.
Never press the accelerator and brake Never leave children unsupervised in Never select position P or R unless the
pedals at the same time. Braking and the vehicle when the engine is running. vehicle is a a complete stop with the
acceleration should be done only with When carrying out a maintenance brake applied.
the right foot. Pressing both pedals operation with the engine running, apply When you want to engage reverse, to
together risks damaging the gearbox. the parking brake and select position P. avoid jolt, do not accelerate immediately
after engaging R.
Changing into position R is
accompanied by an audible signal.
156

Driving
Automated mode Manual mode

Select position D. Temporary manual control of the Select position M.
gears Use the "+" and "-" steering mounted
control paddles to change gear.
The gears engaged are displayed successively
D and the gear engaged are displayed in the
in the instrument panel.
instrument panel.
When stationary or at very low speed, the
The gearbox operates in auto-active
mode, without any action from the driver. It
continuously selects the most appropriate gear
according to the following conditions:
gearbox automatically engages 1st gear.
In manual mode, it is not necessary to release
the accelerator pedal when changing gear.
The change from one gear to another is only
4
- optimisation of fuel consumption,
effected if the conditions of vehicle speed and
- driving style,
engine speed allow; otherwise the automatic
- relief of the road,
laws of operation are imposed temporarily.
- vehicle load.
If the engine speed is too high or too low,
You can temporarily take control of gear the display of the gear selected flashes for a
For maximum acceleration, without touching changes using the "+" and "-" steering mounted few seconds, then the new gear engaged is
the gear selector, press the accelerator fully control paddles. If the engine speed allows, the displayed.
down (kick down). The gearbox changes down instruction to change gear is acted on.
automatically and maintains the gear selected This function allows you to anticipate certain
until the maximum engine speed is reached. situations such as overtaking another vehicle or
When braking, the gearbox changes down approaching a bend.
automatically for more effective engine braking. After a few moments with no action on the Invalid value in manual operation
When you take your foot of the accelerator control paddles, the gearbox manages the
pedal suddenly, the gearbox does not change This symbol is displayed if a gear is
gears automatically again.
up, so as to improve safety. not engaged correctly (gear selector
between two positions).
It is possible to change mode at any

time, by moving the gear selector
from D to M or the other way round.
157

Driving
Parking the vehicle Operating fault

Before switching off the engine, you can
change to position P or N to be in neutral. In the event of a fault with the
In either case, apply the parking brake to gearbox, the service warning lamp
immobilise the vehicle, unless it is programmed comes on in the instrument panel,
in automatic mode. accompanied by a message and an
If the lever is not in position P
P, on opening the audible signal.
driver's door or approximately 45 seconds after
In this case the gearbox goes into back-up
switching off the ignition there is an audible
mode and stays in 3rd gear. You may then feel
signal and a message appears:
a noticeable jolt when going from P to R and
move the gear selector to position P; the
from N to R. This jolt does not present any risk
audible signal stops and the message
to the gearbox.
disappears.
Do not exceed 60 mph (100 km/h) while also
observing legal speed limits.
Whenever parking, you must apply the parking Have it checked by a CITRON dealer or a
brake to immobilise the vehicle, if automatic qualified workshop.
operation has been deactivated.
In all circumstances, ensure that the

gear selector is in position P before
leaving your vehicle.
158

Driving
Gear shift indicator

System which reduces fuel consumption by advising the driver to change up.
With an electronic gearbox, the system is only active in Manual mode.
Operation
Depending on the driving situation and your Example:
The system adapts its gear change
vehicle's equipment, the system may advise - You are in third gear.
recommendation according to the
you to skip one (or more) gear(s). You can - You press the accelerator pedal.
driving conditions (slope, load, ...) and
follow this instruction without engaging the
intermediate gears.
The gear engagement recommendations must
- The system may suggest that you engage a
higher gear.
the demands of the driver (power,
acceleration, braking, ...).
The system never suggests:
4
not be considered compulsory. In fact, the
- engaging first gear,
configuration of the road, the amount of traffic
- engaging reverse gear,
and safety remain determining factors when
- engaging a lower gear.
choosing the best gear. Therefore, the driver
remains responsible for deciding whether or not
to follow the advice given by the system.
This function cannot be deactivated.
The information appears in the instrument

panel in the form of an arrow.
On vehicles with manual gearbox, the arrow
can be accompanied by the recommended
gear.
159

Driving
Stop & Start

The Stop & Start system puts the engine temporarily into standby - STOP mode - during stops in the traffic (red lights, traffic jams, or other...). The
engine restarts automatically - START mode - as soon as you want to move off. The restart takes place instantly, quickly and silently.
Perfect for urban use, the Stop & Start system reduces fuel consumption and exhaust emissions as well as the noise level when stationary.
Operation
Going into engine STOP mode Special cases: STOP mode not
available
The "ECO" warning lamp comes on STOP mode is not invoked when:
For your comfort, during parking
in the instrument panel and the engine - the driver's door is open,
manoeuvres, STOP mode is not
goes into standby automatically: - the driver's seat belt is not fastened,
available for a few seconds after
- with a manual gearbox, at speeds below - the vehicle has not exceeded 6 mph
coming out of reverse gear.
12 mph (20 km/h), when you place the gear (10 km/h) since the last engine start using
STOP mode does not affect the
lever in neutral, and you release the clutch the START/STOP button,
functionality of the vehicle, such as for
pedal, - the electric parking brake is applied or
example, braking, power steering...
- with an electronic gearbox, at speeds being applied,
below 5 mph (8 km/h), when you press the - the engine is needed to maintain a
brake pedal or place the gear selector lever comfortable temperature in the passenger
in position N, compartment,
- with an automatic gearbox, with the - demisting is active,
vehicle stationary, when you press the Never refuel with the engine in STOP - some special conditions (battery charge,
brake pedal or place the gear selector lever mode; you must switch off the ignition engine temperature, braking assistance,
in position N. with the START/STOP button. ambient temperature...) where the engine is
If your vehicle is fitted with the system, a time needed to assure control of a system.
counter calculates the sum of the periods in
STOP mode during a journey. It resets itself to In this case, the "ECO" warning lamp
zero every time the ignition is switched on with flashes for a few seconds then goes
the START/STOP button. off.
This operation is perfectly normal.
160

Driving
Deactivation
Going into engine START mode Special cases: START invoked Deactivation of Stop & Start is done in the
automatically "Driving assistance" menu.
The "ECO" warning lamp goes off START mode is invoked automatically when: Press this button to deactivate the
and the engine starts automatically: - you open the the driver's door, system.
- you unfasten the driver's seat belt,
- with a manual gearbox, when you fully
- the speed of the vehicle exceeds 15 mph This is confirmed by the indicator
-
depress the clutch pedal,
with an electronic gearbox:
gear selector lever in position A or M,
(25 km/h) with a manual gearbox, 7 mph
(11 km/h) with an electronic gearbox and
2 mph (3 km/h) with an automatic gearbox,
lamp in the button and this symbol.
4
when you release the brake pedal, If the system has been deactivated
- the electric parking brake is being applied,
or gear selector lever in position N in STOP mode, the engine restarts
- some special conditions (battery charge,
and the brake pedal released, when immediately.
engine temperature, braking assistance,
you place the gear selector lever in
ambient temperature...) where the engine is
position A or M,
needed for control of a system.
or when you engage reverse gear.
When driving on a flooded road, it is
- with an automatic gearbox:
recommended that the Stop & Start
gear selector in position D or M, when
function be deactivated and that you
you release the brake pedal,
drive very slowly.
or gear selector in position N and brake
pedal released, when you place the gear
selector in position D or M,
or when you engage reverse. In this case the "ECO" warning lamp
flashes for a few seconds, then goes
off.
This operation is perfectly normal.
161

Driving
Reactivation Operating fault Maintenance
Press this button again. In the event of a fault with the

system, this warning lamp comes
on continuously.
The system is active again; this is
confirmed by the indicator lamp in the Have it checked by a CITRON dealer or a
button going off and illumination of qualified workshop.
this symbol. In the event of a fault in STOP mode, the This system requires a 12 V battery with a
vehicle may stall. special specification and technology (reference
All of the instrument panel warning lamps come numbers available from CITRON dealers).
The system is reactivated automatically on. Fitting a battery not listed by
every time the engine is started by the Depending on version, an alert message may CITRON introduces the risk of malfunction of
driver. also be displayed, asking you to place the gear the system.
selector lever in position N and put your foot on For charging, use a 12 V charger and do not
the brake pedal. reverse the polarity.
It is then necessary to switch off the ignition
and start the engine again using the "START/
STOP" button.
Before doing anything under the bonnet, The Stop & Start system makes use of
deactivate the Stop & Start system to advanced technology. For any work on
avoid any risk of injury resulting from the system go to a qualified workshop
automatic operation of START mode. with the skills and equipment required,
which a CITRON dealer is able to
provide.
162

Driving
Display of inter-vehicle time

Using a radar located at the front of the vehicle,
The system is active in a speed range Activation / deactivation
this system helps the driver maintain a safe
between 42 and 93 mph (70 and
distance between their vehicle and the one in Activation of the system is done in the " Driving
150 km/h).
front, by displaying the inter-vehicle time in the assistance" menu, with the ignition on.
Stationary vehicles and certain other
instrument panel.
road users (such as bicycles for Press this button, the indicator
It is the time interval, expressed in seconds,
example) are not detected. lamp comes on.
that separates two vehicles in line. The
The system displays inter-vehicle time
recommended safe value is about 2 seconds:
refer to the legislation or highway code in force
in your country.
values of between 3 seconds and 0.5 of
a second.
Below 0.5 of a second, the value
displayed is maintained at this level,
The state of the system is memorised when the
ignition is switched off. 4
even if the true inter-vehicle time is less. Activation of the active cruise control
automatically deactivates the system.
The measurement is displayed for

information only: the system takes no This system is only available with the
action on the vehicle. "DRIVING" display mode of the type 2
This system does not in any instrument panel.
circumstances replace the vigilance and
responsibility of the driver who must
remain in control of their vehicle at all
times.
The system is not designed for urban
use nor during more dynamic driving
(bends, acceleration, harsh braking)
but rather when driving at stable speed.
163

Driving
Displays
Once the system has been activated and the speed conditions are met, a symbol is displayed in the instrument panel.
Symbol Associated message Comments
No vehicle detected by the radar.
A vehicle is detected but the inter-vehicle time is more than 3 seconds. No value is
displayed.
A vehicle is detected. The inter-vehicle time is 3 seconds or less. The minimum value
displayed is 0.5 seconds, even if the true inter-vehicle time is lower.
164

Driving
" SYSTEM INACTIVE: Speed If the speed of your vehicle is outside the operating range.
unsuitable" Where the speed is not suitable, a message is displayed while the speed is outside limits
(below 42 mph (70 km/h) or above 93 mph (150 km/h), approximately). However, when
decelerating, the system is deactivated below 27 mph (45 km/h).
4
" System deactivated" On deactivating the function, in "DRIVING" display mode.
" SYSTEM INACTIVE: The system switches to standby automatically if the sensor does not detect the vehicle in
Visibility reduced" front correctly (very difficult weather conditions, sensor out of adjustment, ...).
165

Driving
Operating limits Operating fault
The vehicle being followed may not be detected In the event of a fault with the system,
The operation of the radar, located in
in certain conditions such as, for example: this warning lamp is displayed
the front bumper, may be disturbed by
- when turning, accompanied by a message.
accumulations of grime (dust, mud...)
- when changing lane,
Have the system checked by a CITRON or in certain weather conditions (snow,
- when the vehicle in front is out of the range
dealer or a qualified workshop. ice...).
of the sensor (maximum range: around
The message "SYSTEM INACTIVE:
100 m).
Visibility reduced" is displayed to signal
At the first use of the system after that the system has been put into
repair, a message may be displayed standby.
indicating that the system is initialising. Clean the front bumper regularly.
The system is not available while this is
in progress. As soon as the message
disappears the system is operational
again. If the message does not
disappear, contact a CITRON dealer
or a qualified workshop.
166

Driving
Memorising speeds
This function allows speeds to be saved, which can then be offered to set the two systems: the speed limiter (to limit the speed of the vehicle) or the
cruise control (for a vehicle cruising speed).
You can memorise up to six speed settings for each of the two systems. By default, some speeds are already memorised.
Memorisation
Go to the "Driving assistance" menu.
Select the " Speed settings".
Select the system for which you want to Enter the new value using the numerical
memorise speeds: keypad and confirm.
Confirm to save the modification and quit
speed limiter or
the menu.
cruise control.
For safety reasons, the driver must
carry out these operations when
stationary.
Choose the speed setting you want to
modify.
This button allows you return to the
factory settings.
167

Driving
Speed limiter
Once the programmed speed limit is reached, additional pressure on the accelerator pedal has no effect.
System which prevents the vehicle from Steering mounted controls Displays in the instrument panel
exceeding the speed programmed by the driver.
The speed limiter is switched on manually:

it requires a programmed speed of at least
20 mph (30 km/h).
The speed limiter is paused by operation of the
control.
The programmed speed can be exceeded
temporarily by pressing the accelerator firmly
beyond the point of resistance.
To return to the programmed speed, simply
release the accelerator pedal until the vehicle
returns to the programmed speed limit.
The controls are grouped together at the The information is grouped together in the
steering wheel. instrument panel.
1. Speed limiter mode selection wheel. 6. Speed limiter on / pause indication.
2. Value decrease button. 7. Speed limiter mode selection indication.
The programmed speed remains in the 3. Value increase button. 8. Speed value setting.
memory when the ignition is switched off. 4. Speed limiter on / pause button.
5. List of memorised speeds display button.
The speed limiter cannot, in any circumstances,

replace the need to observe speed limits, For more information on the list of memorised
nor can it replace the need for vigilance and speeds, refer to the "Memorising speeds"
responsibility on the part of the driver. section.
168

Driving
Adjusting the speed limit

setting
4
Turn wheel 1 to the "LIMIT" position: the You do not have to switch the speed limiter on - a press on button 5:
speed limiter mode is selected but is not in order to set the speed. the six speeds memorised, displayed in
switched on (Pause). Once the function is selected, you can modify the touch screen tablet,
Switch the speed limiter back on by the speed setting by: choosing a speed: it is displayed in the
pressing button 4, if the speed displayed - using buttons 2 and 3, increasing or instrument panel.
is suitable (by default, the last speed decreasing the speed displayed: The selection screen closes after a few
programmed). by successive short presses, to modify moments.
You can temporarily stop the the speed by + or - mph (1 km/h),
limiter by pressing button 4 again: the by a maintained press, to modify in steps
display confirms that it has been stopped of + or - 3 mph (5 km/h).
(Pause).
169

Driving
Temporarily exceeding Operating fault

the programmed speed
Press firmly on the accelerator pedal, Flashing of the dashes indicates a fault with the
On sharp acceleration, as when
going beyond the point of resistance, to speed limiter.
descending a steep hill, the speed
exceed the programmed speed limit. Have it checked by a CITRON dealer or a
limiter will not be able to prevent the
The speed limiter is deactivated temporarily qualified workshop.
vehicle from exceeding the programmed
and the displayed programmed speed flashes.
speed.
An audible signal accompanies the flashing
The limiter is temporarily deactivated
of the programmed speed when exceeding
and the displayed programmed speed
the speed is not due to an action by the driver
flashes.
(steep hill...).
An audible signal accompanies the
As soon as the vehicle's speed returns to the
flashing of the programmed speed
programmed value, the limiter operates again:
when exceeding the speed is not due to
the display of the programmed speed becomes
an action by the driver.
steady again.
CITRON may interfere with the
operation of the speed limiter.
To avoid any risk of jamming of the
pedals:
- ensure that the mat is positioned
correctly,
Switching off - do not fit one mat on top of another.
Turn wheel 1 to the "0" position.

The display of information related to the
speed limiter disappears.
170

Driving
Cruise control
System which automatically maintains the speed of the vehicle at the value programmed by the driver, without any action on the accelerator pedal.
The cruise control is switched on manually: it Steering mounted controls Displays in the instrument panel
requires a minimum vehicle speed of 25 mph
(40 km/h) and engagement of:
- at least fourth gear on a manual gearbox,
- second gear on an electronic or automatic
gearbox, in manual driving mode,
- position A on an electronic gearbox or D on
an automatic gearbox.
4
The cruise control is paused manually or
by pressing the brake or clutch pedal or
on triggering of the ESP system for safety The controls of this system are grouped The information is grouped together in the
reasons. together at the steering wheel. instrument panel.
It is possible to exceed the programmed speed 1. Cruise control mode selection wheel. 6. Cruise control pause / resume indication.
temporarily by pressing the accelerator pedal. 2. Decrease value or speed setting on the fly 7. Cruise control mode selection indication.
To return to the programmed speed, simply button. 8. Speed value setting.
release the accelerator pedal until the 3. Increase value or speed setting on the fly
programmed cruise speed is reached again. button.
4. Cruise control pause / resume button.
5. Memorised speeds display button.
For more information on the list of memorised
speeds, refer to "Memorising speeds" section).
Switching off the ignition cancels any
programmed speed value.
The cruise control system cannot, in any circumstances, replace the need to observe speed limits, nor can it replace the need for vigilance and
responsibility on the part of the driver.
You are advised to keep your feet near the pedals at all times.
171

Driving
Turn wheel 1 to the "CRUISE" position: the Modification of the initial speed
cruise control mode is selected but is not setting
switched on (Pause).
Press button 2 or 3 : your vehicle's current If the cruise control is on, you can then modify - pressing button 5:
speed becomes the cruise speed (selected the initial speed in one of the following ways: the six memorised speeds are displayed
on the fly). - using buttons 2 or 3: in the touch screen tablet,
The cruise control is activated (ON). by successive short presses, to modify choose a value: it is displayed in the
the speed by + or - 1 mph (km/h), instrument panel.
by a long press, to modify the speed in The selection screen closes after a few
steps of + or - 5 mph (km/h), moments.
The modification is then accepted.
Pause
Once switched on, you can pause the cruise
control at any time by pressing button 4:
the screen confirms the pause.
172

Driving
Operating fault
Exceeding the programmed Flashing of the dashes indicates a fault with the
When the cruise control is switched on,
speed cruise control.
be careful if you maintain the pressure
If the programmed speed is exceeded, the on one of the programmed speed
qualified workshop.
displayed speed flashes. changing buttons: this may result in a
Once the vehicle returns to the programmed
speed, the display becomes steady again.
very rapid change in the speed of your
vehicle.
Do not use the cruise control on
4
slippery roads or in heavy traffic.
On a steep descent, the cruise control
Switching off will not be able to prevent the vehicle
Turn wheel 1 to the "0" position. from exceeding the programmed speed.
The display of information related to the On steep climbs or when towing, the
cruise control disappears. programmed speed may not be reached
or maintained.
operation of the cruise control.
To avoid any risk of jamming of the
pedals:
- ensure that the mat is positioned
correctly,
- never fit one mat on top of another.
173

Driving
Active cruise control

This systems allows, in addition to maintaining Principles of operation
your vehicle's speed at a value that you
have defined, the inter-vehicle time you have
selected between your vehicle the the one Using a radar with a range of about 100 metres,
The active cruise control operates by
ahead to be maintained (2 seconds by default, located at the front of the vehicle, this system
day and at night, in fog or in moderate
on activating the function). detects a vehicle running in front of your
rainfall.
vehicle.
It automatically adapts the speed of the vehicle
to that of the vehicle in front. The activation of this system
If the vehicle in front is running more slowly, deactivates the function of inter-vehicle
the system progressively reduces the speed of time.
your vehicle using just engine braking (as if the
driver had pressed the "-" button). The system does not act on the braking
If your vehicle is too close to or approaching too system, but works only with engine
quickly the vehicle in front, the cruise control braking.
is automatically deactivated. The driver is then The regulation range is limited: there will
alerted by an audible signal, accompanied by a no longer be any adjustment of speed if the
message. difference between the programmed speed
If the vehicle in front accelerates or changes setting and the speed of the vehicle in front
lane, the active cruise control progressively becomes too high (18 mph (30 km/h).
accelerates your vehicle to return to the
programmed speed.
If the driver operates a direction indicator to If the difference between the
the left (left hand drive) or the right (right hand programmed speed setting and the
drive), to overtake a slower vehicle, the active speed of the vehicle in front is too
cruise control allows your vehicle to temporarily great, the speed cannot be adjusted:
approach the vehicle in front to assist the the cruise control is automatically
overtaking manoeuvre, though never exceeding deactivated.
the programmed speed.
174

Driving
General points
The active cruise control is switched on The active cruise control can above be paused
The active cruise control cannot in any
manually: it requires that the speed of the vehicle manually with the control, or automatically:
circumstances replace the observation
be between 25 mph (40 km/h) and 90 mph - by pressing the brake or clutch pedal,
of speed limits, nor the the vigilance
(150 km/h), as well as the engagement of: - in the event of operation of the DSC, for
and responsibility of the driver.
- at least fourth gear with a manual gearbox, safety reasons,
It is recommended that you always keep
- second gear with an electronic or automatic - in the event of an action of the electric
your feet close to the pedals.
-
gearbox in manual mode,
position A with an electronic gearbox or D
with an automatic gearbox.
-
parking brake control,
when an inter-vehicle time threshold is
reached (calculated according to the
relative speeds of your vehicle and the
4
vehicle in front and the inter-vehicle time
setting chosen),
- when the distance between your vehicle
and the one in front becomes to small,
- when the speed of the vehicle in front is to
low,
If the speed setting selected is above - when the speed of your vehicle becomes
93 mph (150 km/h), the system switches too low.
to normal cruise control operation
(a message appears in the instrument
panel).
Switching off the ignition cancels any

programmed value, and the inter-
vehicle time is reset to 2 seconds.
175

Driving
Steering mounted controls Operation

Switching on
Turn the wheel 1 to the "CRUISE" position:
cruise control mode is selected, but not
started (Pause).
Press one of the buttons 2 or 3: the current
speed of your vehicle becomes the cruise
speed setting (set on the fly).
The cruise control is activated (ON).
The inter-vehicle time is set at 2 seconds.
Modification of the cruise control

The controls for this system are grouped Modification of the cruise control speed
p and/or the inter-vehicle
together on the steering wheel. speed only time
1. Cruise control mode selection wheel.
Buttons 2 and 3 Button 5 (MEM)
2. Button for reducing the cruise value setting Press button 5, the six memorised speeds and
or for setting the cruise value on the fly. By successive short presses, to modify by
the inter-vehicle time setting are displayed in
3. Button for increasing the cruise value steps of + or - 1 mph (km/h),
the touch screen tablet.
setting or for setting the cruise value on the by a maintained press, to modify in steps Choose a speed setting: it is displayed in
fly. of + or - 5 mph (km/h). the instrument panel,
4. Button for pausing / resuming the cruise press or the "+" or "-" button to choose
control. As a precaution, it is recommended that you a new inter-vehicle time setting between
5. Button for displaying the list of memorised select a speed setting close to the current 2.5 seconds and 1 second.
speed of your vehicle. The selection screen closes after a few
speeds and for adjusting the inter-vehicle
moments. The modifications are then accepted.
time.
For more information on the list of memorised
speeds, refer to "Memorising speeds".
If the active cruise control has not been
switched on, pressing this button has
no effect.
176

Driving
Displays in the instrument panel

In the event of the presence of a Exceeding the programmed
vehicle detected by the radar, if the speed
speed selected is much higher than It is possible to exceed the programmed speed
the speed of that vehicle, the system temporarily by depressing the accelerator
is not activated and the alert message pedal. Simply release the accelerator pedal to
"Activation not possible, conditions return to the programmed speed.
unsuitable" is displayed until driving
conditions are safe to allow activation of
the system.
If the programmed speed is unintentionally
exceeded, descending a steep hill for example,
the speed setting in the instrument panel
The information is grouped together in the
instrument panel.
4
flashes as a warning.
6. Indication of cruise control pause/resume.
7. Indication of selection of cruise control
mode, or
vehicle speed adjustment phase.
8. Cruise speed setting, or
adjusted speed lower than the cruise
setting.
177

Driving
Driving situations and associated alerts

The table below describes the alerts and the messages displayed for the different driving situations.
The display of these alerts is not sequential.
Display in the
instrument panel
No vehicle detected:
the system operates as a conventional cruise control.
Detection of a vehicle, at the limit of the range of the radar:

the system operates as a conventional cruise control.
178

Driving
Display in the
instrument panel
"SPEED ADJUSTED" Detection of a vehicle that is too close or running at a speed lower than your
vehicle's cruise speed setting.
The system uses engine braking to slow your vehicle and then hold it at the speed of
the vehicle in front so as to maintain the programmed inter-vehicle time.
4
The regulation range is limited to a maximum difference of 20 mph (30 km/h)
between the speed setting and the speed of the vehicle ahead.
"Cruise control If the system exceeds the limit of speed adjustment possible by the system and in
paused". the absence of any reaction by the driver (operation of the direction indicator, change
of lane, reduction of the speed of the vehicle), the system is automatically paused.
The display of the deactivation message is accompanied by an audible signal.
not possible, conditions unsuitable" is displayed while reactivation is not possible.

When the conditions allow, it is recommended that the function be reactivated by pressing button 2 or 3, which will make the current speed of
your vehicle the new cruise speed setting, rather than by pressing button 4 (on/pause) which reactivates the cruise control using the old cruise
speed setting, which may be very different from the current speed of your vehicle.
179

Driving
Limits of operation
The active cruise control uses only engine As the radar's field of view is quite narrow, it is
braking to slow the vehicle. Consequently the possible that the system may not detect:
vehicle looses speed slowly, as when releasing
the accelerator pedal.
The system is paused automatically:
- if the vehicle in front slows down to much
or too suddenly, and the driver does not
brake,
- vehicles entering a corner,
- if a vehicle comes between your vehicle
- vehicles changing lane at the last moment.
and the vehicle in front,
- if the system does not slow the vehicle - vehicles of reduced width, such as
enough to continue to maintain a safe motorcycles, for example,
distance, for example when descending a
steep hill. The cruise control does not take account of:
- stationary vehicles,
The regulation range is limited to a maximum - vehicles driving in the opposite direction.
difference of 20 mph (30 km/h) between the
speed setting and the speed of the vehicle
ahead. Above this, the system goes into pause
if a safe distance is not maintained. - vehicles not running in the middle of the
lane,
Severe weather conditions (very heavy
rain, accumulations of snow in front
of the radar) can interfere with the
operation of the system, resulting in
the display of the message "SYSTEM
INACTIVE: Visibility reduced". The
function remains unavailable until the
message disappears.
180

Driving
Operating fault
In the event of a fault with the active cruise

When the cruise control is working, take The operation of the radar, located in
control, you are alerted by an audible signal
care if making a maintained press on the front bumper, may be disturbed by
and display of the message message "Driving
one of the cruise control programmed accumulations of grime (dust, mud...)
aid functions fault".
speed modification buttons: this can or in certain weather conditions (snow,
Have the system checked by a CITRON
4
lead to a very quick change in the ice...).
speed of your vehicle. The message "SYSTEM INACTIVE:
Do not use the active cruise control on Visibility reduced" is displayed to signal
slippery surfaces or in heavy traffic. that the system has been put into
When descending a steep hill, the standby.
cruise control may not be able to Clean the front bumper regularly.
prevent the vehicle from exceeding the
programmed speed.
When ascending a steep hill or when
towing, it might not be possible to attain
or maintain the programmed speed.
operation of the cruise control.
To avoid any risk of jamming the pedals:
- ensure that mats are positioned
correctly,
- never fit one mat on top of another.
181

Driving
Collision risk alert

System providing a warning to the driver that their vehicle is at risk of collision with the vehicle in front.
The collision risk alert system can be activated Setting the thresholds for
or deactivated by the driver.
From the secondary page of the " Driving
the alert
assistance" menu: The alert thresholds determine how you want to
select the " Vehicle settings" menu, be alerted to the presence of a vehicle running
check the "Collision risk alert" line and in front of you.
confirm. You can choose from three thresholds:
This system operates from 20 mph - 1: "Distant", to be given an early alert
(30 km/h), only when other vehicles are (cautious driving).
running in the same direction as your - 2: "Normal".
This function can be deactivated
vehicle; the system does not detect - 3: "Close", to be given a later alert (sporty
permanently by a CITRON dealer or a
stationary objects. A radar is fitted at driving).
qualified workshop.
the front of the vehicle.
From the secondary page of the "Driving
assistance" menu:
This system has been designed to
select the "Vehicle settings" menu,
improve driving safety.
check the "Collision risk alert " line,
It is the responsibility of the driver to
press on the magnifying glass,
keep a constant check on the state of
modify the alert threshold and press on
the traffic, to assess the relative speed
"Finish" to memorise the threshold and
and distance of other vehicles.
leave the menu.
The collision risk alert system can never
replace the vigilance and responsibility
of the driver.
182

Driving
Alerts
According to the collision risk detected by the Level 3: an increase in
The change from one level of alert
system and the alert threshold chosen, three the tension of the driver's
to the next takes place if the driving
levels of alert can be triggered: seat belt, to hold the driver
conditions do not change (speed
against the backrest of their
unchanged, no change of lane...)
Level 1: visual alert only (orange) seat.
indicating that the vehicle in front is
very close. The message " Vehicle
close" is displayed. The 3rd level of alert is not triggered or If the speed of your vehicle is too high
4
is interrupted in the event of an impact when approaching another vehicle, the
between the two vehicles. first level of alert may not be displayed:
This level of alert is based on the inter-vehicle The increase in the tension of the the level 2 alert may be displayed
time between your vehicle and the one in front. driver's seat belt is not intended as an directly.
alert for the driver: it does not in any On the other hand, the level 1 alert
circumstances assure the function of is never displayed with the triggering
Level 2: visual (red) and audible driver safety. threshold 3 (close).
alerts indicating that a collision is The triggering of this alert does not act
imminent. The message "Brake!" is on the safety functions provided by the
displayed. seat belts. Severe weather conditions (very heavy
rain, accumulation of snow in front
of the radar) may interfere with the
This level of alert is based on a time before
operation of the system, resulting in
collision. It takes account of the vehicle
the display of the message " System
dynamics, the speed of your vehicle and
inactive: Reduced visibility". The
the speed of the vehicle in front, the driving
system remains unavailable until the
conditions, the situation with your vehicle
message disappears.
(cornering, pedals pressed, etc.) to trigger the
alert at the right moment.
183

Driving
Operating fault
In the event of a fault, you are

The operation of the radar, located in
alerted by the display of the Service
the front bumper, may be disturbed by
warning lamp, accompanied by a
accumulations of grime (dust, mud...)
message.
or in certain weather conditions (snow,
Consult a CITRON dealer or a
ice...).
qualified workshop.
The message "SYSTEM INACTIVE:
Visibility reduced" is displayed to signal
that the system has been put into
standby.
Clean the front bumper regularly.
184

Driving
Lane departure warning system

Activation / deactivation Operating fault
Activation and deactivation of the function is In the event of a fault, this warning
done in the " Driving assistance" menu of the lamp comes on accompanied by an
touch screen tablet. audible signal and a message.
Press this button, the indicator lamp Contact a CITRON dealer or a qualified
workshop.
comes on. The function is activated
Press this button again, the
indicator lamp goes off. The
function is deactivated
4
System which, using a camera which
The status of the system remains in the
recognises solid or broken lines, detects the
memory when the ignition is switched off.
involuntary crossing of longitudinal traffic lane
markings on the ground.
To provide safe driving, the camera analyses
the image then, if the driver's attention drops,
triggers a warning if the vehicle drifts over
Detection - alert The detection may be impeded:
a lane marking (speed higher than 50 mph - if the markings on the ground are
The driver is alerted by vibration of the seat belt worn,
(80 km/h)). (at the level of the reel):
This system is particularly useful on motorways - if there is little contrast between the
No warning is transmitted while the direction markings on the ground and the
and main roads. indicator is active and for approximately road surface,
20 seconds after the direction indicator is - if the windscreen is dirty,
switched off. - in certain severe weather
The lane departure warning system conditions: fog, heavy rain, snow,
cannot, in any circumstances, replace bright sunlight or direct exposure
the need for vigilance and responsibility to the sun (low sun, leaving a
on the part of the driver. tunnel, ...) and shade.
185

Driving
Blind spot sensors

Activation of the system is done in the " Driving
assistance" menu, with the ignition on.
Press this button to activate the

function; the associated indicator
lamp comes on.
instrument panel.
This driving assistance system warns the driver A warning lamp appears in the door mirror on Sensors fitted in the front and rear bumpers
of the presence of another vehicle in the blind the side in question: monitor the blind spots.
spot angle of their vehicle (areas masked from - immediately, when being overtaken,
the driver's field of vision), as soon as this - after a delay of about one second, when
presents a potential danger. overtaking a vehicle slowly.
This system is designed to improve safety when driving and is in no circumstances a

substitute for the use of the interior rear view mirror and door mirrors. It is the driver's
responsibility to constantly check the traffic, to asses the distances and relative speeds of
other vehicles and to predict their movements before deciding whether to change lane.
The blind spot sensor system can never replace the vigilance and responsibility of the
driver.
186

Driving
comes on in the door mirror on the side in

question as soon as a vehicle - car, lorry,
bicycle - is detected and the following
conditions are fulfilled:
- all the vehicles must be moving in the same
-
direction,
the speed of your vehicle is between 7 and
87 mph (12 and 140 km/h),
the difference in speed between your
4
vehicle and the other vehicles must be less
than 6 mph (10 km/h),
- the traffic must be flowing normally,
- in the case of an overtaking manoeuvre,
if this is prolonged and the vehicle being
overtaken remains in the blind spot, No alert will be given in the following situations: - when overtaking (or being overtaken by) a
- you are driving on a straight or slightly - in the presence of stationary objects very long vehicle (lorry, coach...) which is
curved road, (parked vehicles, barriers, street lamps, at the same time detected at the rear in the
- your vehicle is not pulling a trailer, road signs...), blind spot angle and present in the driver's
a caravan... - with vehicles moving in the opposite forward field of vision,
direction, - in very heavy traffic: vehicles detected in
- driving on a sinuous road or a sharp corner, front and behind are confused with a lorry
or a stationary object,
- when overtaking quickly.
187

Driving
Operating fault The system may suffer temporary

interference in certain weather
To deactivate the system, press In the event of a fault, the warning conditions (rain, hail...).
this button again; its indicator lamp flashes then goes off. In particular, driving on a wet surface
lamp goes off as well as the or moving from a dry area to a wet area
associated indicator in the can cause false alerts (for example, the
Have it checked by a CITRON dealer or a presence of a fog of water droplets in
instrument panel.
qualified workshop. the blind spot angle is interpreted as a
The state of the system remains in memory on vehicle).
switching off the ignition. In bad or wintry weather, ensure that
the sensors are not covered by mud, ice
or snow.
The system is automatically deactivated
Take care not to cover the warning zone
when towing with a towbar approved by
in the door mirrors or the detection
CITRON.
zones on the front and rear bumpers
with adhesive labels or other objects;
they may hamper the correct operation
of the system.
High pressure jet wash

When washing your vehicle, direct the
lance at least 30 cm away from the
sensors.
188

Driving
Parking sensors
Rear parking sensors
The system is switched on by engaging reverse
gear. This is accompanied by an audible signal.
The system is switched off when you exit
reverse gear.
4
This system indicates the proximity of an
obstacle (person, vehicle, tree, gate, etc.) which
comes within the field of detection of sensors Visual assistance
located in the bumper. This supplements the audible signal by
Certain types of obstacle (stake, roadworks displaying bars in the screen or the instrument
cone, etc.) detected initially will no longer be panel which move progressively nearer to
detected at the end of the manoeuvre due to the vehicle. When the obstacle is near, the
the presence of blind spots. "Danger" symbol is displayed.
Audible assistance
The proximity information is given by an
intermittent audible signal, the frequency of which
This function cannot, in any
increases as the vehicle approaches the obstacle.
circumstances, take the place of the
The sound emitted by the speaker (right or left)
vigilance and responsibility of the driver.
indicates the side on which the obstacle is located.
When the distance between the vehicle and
the obstacle becomes less than approximately
thirty centimetres, the audible signal becomes
continuous.
189

Driving
Front parking sensors Operating fault
In addition to the rear parking sensors, the front Deactivation / Activation of the In the event of a malfunction of
parking sensors are triggered when an obstacle front and rear parking sensors the system, when reverse gear
is detected in front and the speed of the vehicle is engaged this warning lamp is
The system is deactivated in the " Driving
is still below 6 mph (10 km/h). displayed in the instrument panel and/
assistance" menu in the touch screen tablet.
The front parking sensors are interrupted if or a message appears, accompanied
the vehicle stops for more than three seconds by an audible signal (short beep).
in forward gear, if no further obstacles are Contact a CITRON dealer or a qualified
detected or when the speed of the vehicle Press this button. The indicator workshop.
exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h). lamp in the button comes on.
In bad weather or in winter, ensure

Pressing this button again reactivates the system.
that the sensors are not covered with
The indicator lamp in the button goes off.
mud, ice or snow. When reverse gear is
engaged, an audible signal (long beep)
The sound emitted by the speaker (front The system will be deactivated indicates that the sensors may be dirty.
or rear) indicates whether the obstacle automatically if a trailer is being Certain sound sources (motorcycle,
is in front or behind. towed or a bicycle carrier is fitted on lorry, pneumatic drill, etc.) may trigger
a towbar (vehicle fitted with a towbar the audible signals of the parking
installed in line with the manufacturer's sensor system.
recommendations).
The parking sensors are deactivated High pressure jet wash

while the Park Assist system is When washing your vehicle, do not
measuring a space. direct the lance within 30 cm of the
See the "Park Assist" section. sensors.
190

Driving
Reversing camera
4
The reversing camera is activated automatically The space between the blue lines represents The blue lines represent the general direction
when reverse gear is engaged. the width of your vehicle except for the door of the vehicle.
Depending on version, the image is displayed in mirrors. The red lines represent a distance of about
the touch screen tablet or the instrument panel. 30 cm beyond the edge of your vehicle's
rear bumper. The audible signal becomes
continuous from this limit.
The reversing camera function may be
The green lines represent distances of about 1
completed with parking sensors.
and 2 metres beyond the edge of your vehicle's
rear bumper.
The turquoise blue curves represent the
The reversing camera cannot in any maximum turning circle.
circumstances be a substitute for the
vigilance and responsibility of the driver.
Opening the tailgate causes the display
High pressure jet washing to disappear.
When washing your vehicle, do not
direct the lance within 30 cm of the
Clean the reversing camera regularly
camera lens.
using a soft, dry cloth.
191

Driving
360 Vision
This system is a visual aid which in no Rear vision
circumstances can replace the vigilance The camera located in the tailgate is activated
and responsibility of the driver. and the view of the area behind your vehicle is
The images provided by the cameras displayed in the instrument panel and behaves
may be deformed by the relief. The like a reversing camera, whatever the position
presence of areas in shade, in sunny of the gear selector lever.
conditions, or of low ambient light may The blue lines represent the width of your
darken the image and reduce contrast. vehicle (excluding mirrors): they move
according to the position of the steering wheel.
The red line represents a distance of 30 cm
from the rear bumper, and the two green
This system provides a view in the instrument lines, 1 m and 2 m from the rear bumper,
panel of the near surroundings of your vehicle, Forward vision respectively.
using cameras mounted at the front and rear of The camera located in the front bumper is
your vehicle and under the door mirrors. activated and views of the areas located at front Rear vision is displayed automatically
Depending on the angle of view chosen (front left and front right appear simultaneously in the when engaging reverse, regardless of
view, rear view or 360 panoramic view), instrument panel. the state of the system.
360 Vision provides special visual assistance
in particular driving conditions such as when
entering a blind crossing or monoeuvring in
areas of reduced visibility.
Once activated, this function operates up to
9 mph (15 km/h). Above 18 mph (30 km/h), the
function is deactivated automatically.
192

Driving
Operation
360 vision "Rear camera".
The cameras located in the front and rear
bumpers and under the door mirrors are The view selected is displayed in the instrument panel.
activated and a reconstruction of the view from
above your vehicle in its immediate surroundings
The display in the instrument panel
is displayed in the instrument panel.
Opening a door or the tailgate disturbs

the 360 and rear views.
disappears above 9 mph (15 km/h).
Deactivating the function

4
Fitting the very cold conditions screen
affects the image transmitted by the Activating the function Accelerate so as to exceed 18 mph (30 km/h).
front camera. With the engine running: or
Select the " Driving assistance" menu of Select the "Driving assistance" menu of
the touch screen tablet. the touch screen tablet.
Press this button for access to

the "360 vision" sub-menu. Press this button for access to
the " 360 vision" sub-menu.
With this menu displayed, select one of the Select "Camera Off".
three views:
"Front camera".
Check the cleanliness of the camera
"360 camera". lenses regularly.
High pressure jet wash
The image transmitted by the camera
When washing your vehicle, direct the
can be slightly affected by the presence
lance at least 30 cm away from the
of the very cold conditions screen.
camera.
193

Driving
Park Assist
This system provides active assistance with The Park Assist system provides assistance for
During a manoeuvre the steering wheel
parking, detecting a parking space then the following manoeuvres:
turns quickly: do not hold the steering
controlling the steering to park in the space.
wheel, do not place your hand between
It controls the steering while the driver
the spokes of the steering wheel and
manages the accelerator, brakes, gears and
take care with loose and bulky clothing,
clutch (manual gearbox). During phases of
scarves, handbags... There is a risk of
entry into and exit from a parking space, the
injury.
system provides visual and audible information
to the driver in order to make the manoeuvres
- entry into a parallel parking space
safe. It may be necessary to move forwards
and backwards more than once.
When Park Assist is activated, it

prevents a change to STOP mode of
The driver can take control at any time by Stop & Start. In STOP mode, activation
gripping the steering wheel. of Park Assist restarts the engine.
The Park Assist system cannot in any

circumstances replace the care and
responsibility of the driver. - exiting from a parallel parking space
The driver must remain in control
of their vehicle ensuring that the
The Park Assist system takes control
space remains clear throughout the
of the power steering for a maximum
manoeuvre.
of 4 manoeuvre cycles. The function
In some circumstances, the sensors
is deactivated after these 4 cycles.
may not detect small obstacles located
If you think that your vehicle is not
in their blind spots.
positioned correctly, you should then
take control of the steering to carry out
The Park Assist system cannot work the manoeuvre.
with the engine off. - bay parking
194

Driving
The sequence of manoeuvres and the You should always check the The park sensors function is not
driving instructions are displayed in the surroundings of your vehicle before available during parking space
instrument panel. starting a manoeuvre. measurement. It intervenes later when
The assistance is manoeuvring to warn you that your
activated: the display of this vehicle is approaching an obstacle: the
symbol and a speed limit audible signal becomes continuous
indicate that the steering when the obstacle is less than thirty
manoeuvres are controlled
by the system: do not touch
the steering wheel.
centimetres away.
If you have deactivated the parking
sensors, they are automatically
reactivated during assisted parking
4
manoeuvres.
The assistance is
deactivated: the display of
this symbol indicates that
the steering manoeuvres
Activation of Park Assist inhibits the
are no longer controlled by
blind spot monitoring function.
the system: you must take
control of the steering.
195

Driving
Operation
Operate the direction indicator on the

Assistance with parallel parking parking side chosen to activate the
manoeuvres measurement function. You should drive
When you have identified a parking space, Limit the speed of the vehicle to at a distance of between 0.5 m and 1.5 m
a maximum of 12 mph (20 km/h) from the row of parked vehicles.
and select " Enter parking slot"
Press this control at the steering in the touch screen tablet.
wheel,
To enter a parking space, the system

or does not identify spaces that are clearly
Select " Park Assist" in the smaller or larger than the vehicle.
of the touch screen tablet to
activate the function.

instrument panel to confirm activation Drive slowly following the instructions until
of the function. the system finds a free space.
196

Driving
4
Move forwards slowly until a message is The assisted parking manoeuvre is in At the end of the manoeuvre, the operating
displayed, accompanied by an audible progress. indicator lamp goes out in the instrument
signal, asking you to engage reverse gear. Without exceeding 5 mph (8 km/h), move panel, accompanied by a message and an
forwards and backwards, aided by the audible signal.
warnings from the "Parking sensors" The assistance is deactivated: you can
system, until the indication of the end of the take over control.
manoeuvre.
Select reverse, release the steering wheel

and start moving without exceeding 5 mph
(8 km/h).
197

Driving
Assistance in exiting from a Operate the direction indicator for the exit The manoeuvre is complete when the vehicle's
parallel parking space side chosen. front wheels are clear of the parking space.
When you want to leave a parallel parking Engage reverse or forward gear and At the end of the manoeuvre, the indicator lamp
space, start the engine. release the steering wheel. in the instrument panel goes off, accompanied
by a message and an audible signal.
With the vehicle stationary, press The assistance is deactivated: you can take
this control at the steering wheel, over control.
or
Select "Park Assist " in the
" Driving assistance" menu
of the touch screen tablet to
activate the function.
The assisted parking manoeuvre is in
This indicator lamp comes on in progress. Without exceeding 3 mph
the instrument panel to confirm the (5 km/h), move forwards and backwards,
activation of the function. aided by the warnings from the "Parking
Press on "Exit parking slot " in sensors" system, until the indication of the
the touch screen tablet. end of the manoeuvre.
198

Driving
When several successive bays are

found, the vehicle will be directed
towards the last one.
Assistance with bay parking

Operate the direction indicator on the
4
manoeuvres
parking side chosen to activate the
Once you have identified a
measurement function. You should drive
parking zone, press this control
at a distance of between 0.5 m and 1.5 m
at the steering wheel,
from the row of parked vehicles.
or
Select "Park Assist" in the

of the touch screen tablet to Move forwards slowly until a message is
activate the function. displayed, accompanied by an audible
signal, asking you to engage reverse gear.
This indicator lamp comes on in
the instrument panel to confirm the
activation of the function.
Limit the speed of the vehicle to
a maximum of 12 mph (20 km/h) Drive slowly following the instructions until
and select " Start parking in a the system finds a free space.
bay" on the touch screen tablet.
199

Driving
During a bay parking manoeuvre, the

Park Assist system is automatically
deactivated once the rear of the vehicle
is within 50 cm of an obstacle.
During parking and exit from

Select reverse, release the steering wheel At the end of the manoeuvre, the operating
parking manoeuvres, the reversing
and start moving without exceeding 5 mph indicator lamp goes out in the instrument panel,
camera function may come into
(8 km/h). accompanied by a message and an audible
operation. It facilitates monitoring
signal.
of the surroundings of the vehicle,
The assistance is deactivated: you can take
by displaying additional information
over control.
in the instrument panel (see the
corresponding section).
The assisted parking manoeuvre is in

progress.
Without exceeding 5 mph (8 km/h), follow
the instructions displayed in the instrument
panel, aided by the warnings from the
"Parking sensors" system, until the
indication of the end of the manoeuvre.
200

Driving
Deactivation Switching off

The system is deactivated automatically: The system is switched off automatically: In the event of a fault with the
- on switching off the ignition, - when towing a trailer, power steering, this warning lamp
- if the engine stalls, - if the driver's door is opened, comes on in the instrument panel
- if no manoeuvre is started within 5 minutes - if the speed of the vehicle is above 42 mph accompanied by an alert message.
of selection of the type of manoeuvre, (70 km/h). Contact a CITRON dealer or a qualified
- after a prolonged stop of the vehicle during To switch the system of for a prolonged period, workshop.
-
a manoeuvre,
if the road wheel anti-spin regulation (ASR)
is triggered,
if the speed of the vehicle exceeds the
contact a CITRON dealer or a qualified
workshop. 4
stated limit,
- when the driver interrupts movement of the
If the lateral distance between your vehicle
steering wheel,
and the space is too great, the system may
- if the driver presses the Park Assist control. Operating faults not be able to measure the space.
- after 4 manoeuvre cycles,
Anything projecting beyond the envelope
- on opening the driver's door,
In the event of a fault with the system, of the vehicle (long or wide load) is not
- if one of the front wheels encounters an
this warning lamp is displayed in the taken into account by the Park Assist
obstacle.
instrument panel and a message appears, system during a manoeuvre.
The operation indicator lamp goes off in the
instrument panel and a message is displayed
The indicator lamp for the function
The driver should then take back control of the In bad weather or in winter, ensure that
flashes for a few seconds.
vehicle's steering. the sensors are not covered by road
If the fault occurs during the use of
the system, the indicator lamp goes dirt, ice or snow.
off. In the event of a fault, have the system
If the system is deactivated during a checked by a CITRON dealer or a
manoeuvre, the drive should reactivate it qualified workshop.
manually to repeat the measurement.
201

Visibility
Exterior lighting controls

System for selection and control of the various front and rear lamps providing the vehicle's lighting.
Main lighting Additional lighting Programming

The various front and rear lamps of the vehicle Other lamps are provided to meet the The setting of some functions can be adjusted:
are designed to adapt the driver's visibility requirements of particular driving conditions: - automatic illumination of headlamps,
progressively according to the climatic - rear foglamps, - Automatic headlamps,
conditions: - front foglamps with cornering lighting, - guide-me-home lighting,
- sidelamps, to be seen, - directional headlamps for improved - welcome lighting,
- dipped beam headlamps to see without visibility when cornering, - cornering lighting,
dazzling other drivers, - daytime running lamps to be more visible - directional lighting.
- main beam headlamps to see clearly when during the day,
the road is clear. - guide-me-home and welcome lighting to
facilitate access to the vehicle,
- parking lamps as vehicle position markers. Travelling abroad
Halogen headlamps
For motoring in countries that drive
on the other side of the road, it is
necessary to adapt the adjustment of
the dipped beams so as to not dazzle
the drivers of approaching vehicles.
Contact a CITRON dealer or qualified
workshop.
In some weather conditions (e.g. low Xenon headlamps
temperature or humidity), the presence The design of the dipped beam
of misting on the internal surface of the headlamps allows you to drive in a
glass of the headlamps and rear lamps country that drives on the other side
is normal; it disappears after the lamps of the road, without the need for any
In the event of the failure of one or more modification.
have been on for a few minutes.
bulbs, a message advises you to check
the lamp(s) in question.
202

Visibility
Main lighting Displays

Selection of main lighting mode Illumination of the corresponding indicator
lamp in the instrument panel confirms that the
lighting selected is on.
Turn the ring A to place the desired symbol

against the mark.
Lighting off / daytime running lamps.
Automatic illumination of headlamps.
Model without AUTO lighting

Daytime running lamps / Dipped
beam / Main beam.
Sidelamps.
5
Dipped headlamps or main beam
headlamps.
Headlamp dipping
Pull the stalk B towards you to switch the The rear sidelamps and direction
lighting between dipped and main beam indicators are located on the tailgate.
headlamps or to activate automatic headlamp When they are on, opening the tailgate
dipping. automatically transfers illumination to
the lamps located in the rear bumper, to
Model with AUTO lighting In the lamps off and sidelamps modes, the
maintain the safety of the vehicle.
driver can switch on the main beam headlamps
temporarily ("headlamp flash") by maintaining a
pull on the stalk.
203

Visibility
Foglamps
The foglamps operate with the dipped and main When the headlamps switch off with automatic
beam headlamps. illumination of headlamps or when the dipped
beam headlamps are switched off manually, the
Rear foglamps
foglamps and sidelamps remain on.
Turn the ring rearwards to switch off the
foglamps, the sidelamps will then switch
To switch on the foglamps, turn the ring C off.
forwards.
To switch off the foglamps, turn the ring C
rearwards.
When switching off dipped beam

manually, the rear foglamps also go off.
Front and rear foglamps
Rotate and release the ring C:

forwards a first time to switch on the front
foglamps,
forwards a second time to switch on the
rear foglamps,
rearwards a first time to switch off the rear
Model with front and rear foglamps,
foglamps rearwards a second time to switch of the
front fog lamps.
204

Visibility
Operation of the rear foglamps is In good or rainy weather, by both day Switching off the lighting
inhibited with the tailgate open. and night, the front foglamps and the when switching off the ignition
Opening the boot when these lamps are rear foglamps are prohibited. In these
When the ignition is switched off, all of the
on causes them and their indicator lamp situations, the power of their beams
lamps switch off immediately, except for the
in the instrument panel to go off. may dazzle other drivers. They should
dipped beam headlamps if automatic guide-
They do not come back on only be used in fog or falling snow.
me-home lighting is activated.
automatically when the boot is closed: In these weather conditions, you should
they must be switched on again using switch on the foglamps and dipped
the control stalk. beam headlamps manually, as the
sunshine sensor may detect sufficient Switching on the lighting
light.
Do not forget to switch off the front and
rear foglamps when they are no longer
when switching on the ignition
To reactivate the lighting control stalk, turn
the ring A to position "0" - lighting off, then
5
necessary. to the position of your choice.
If the lighting is switched on manually after
switching off the ignition, there is an audible
signal when a front door is opened to warn
the driver that they have forgotten to switch
off the vehicle's lighting, with the ignition off.
They switch off automatically after a period
which depends on the state of charge of the
battery (entry to energy economy mode).
205

Visibility
Manual guide-me-home
lighting
Side markers for the vehicle by illumination of The temporary illumination of the dipped beam
the sidelamps on the traffic side only. headlamps after the vehicle's ignition has been
Within one minute of switching off the switched off makes the driver's exit easier when
ignition, operate the lighting control stalk up the light is poor.
or down depending on the traffic side (for
example: when parking on the left; lighting Switching on
control stalk upwards; the right hand
With the ignition off, "flash" the headlamps
sidelamps are on).
using the lighting stalk.
This is confirmed by an audible signal and
A further "headlamp flash" switches the
illumination of the corresponding direction
function off.
indicator warning lamp in the instrument panel.
To switch off the parking lamps, return the
lighting control stalk to the central position.
Switching off
The manual guide-me-home lighting switches
off automatically after a set time.
206

Visibility
Automatic illumination Automatic "guide-me-

of headlamps home" lighting
Deactivation
Turn the ring to another position. When the automatic illumination of headlamps
Deactivation of the function is function is activated, under low ambient
accompanied by the display of a message. light the dipped beams headlamps come on
automatically when the ignition is switched off.
Operating fault Programming

In the event of a malfunction of the Activation or deactivation, as well as the
When a low level of ambient light is detected

by a sunshine sensor, the number plate
sunshine sensor, the lighting comes
on, this warning lamp is displayed
in the instrument panel accompanied by an
duration of the guide-me-home lighting, is set
in the " Driving aids" menu, then "Vehicle
settings".
5
lamps, sidelamps and dipped beam headlamps audible signal and/or a message.
are switched on automatically, without any
Contact a CITRON dealer or a qualified
action on the part of the driver. They can also
workshop.
come on if rain is detected, at the same time as
automatic operation of the windscreen wipers. In fog or snow, the sunshine sensor may
As soon as the brightness returns to a detect sufficient light. In this case, the
sufficient level or after the windscreen wipers lighting will not come on automatically.
are switched off, the lamps are switched off Do not cover the sunshine sensor,
automatically. coupled with the rain sensor and
located in the centre of the windscreen
Activation behind the rear view mirror; the
Turn the ring to the "AUTO" position. The associated functions would no longer
activation of the function is accompanied be controlled.
by the display of a message.
207

Visibility
Automatic headlamp dipping

System which automatically changes between
dipped and main beam according to the
ambient light level and the driving conditions,
using a camera located in the rear view mirror.
This automatic headlamp dipping

system is a driving aid. The driver
remains responsible for the vehicle's
lighting, its correct use for the prevailing
conditions of light, visibility and traffic
and observation of driving and vehicle
regulations.
The system will be operational as soon as

you have exceeded 15 mph (25 km/h).
If the speed drops below 9 mph (15 km/h),
the system no longer operates.
208

Visibility
Switching on Pause
Put the lighting control stalk ring If the situation requires a change of headlamp
in the "AUTO" position. beam, driver can take over at any time.
The system may suffer interference or
not work correctly:
In the " Driving assistance" Flashing the headlamps - under conditions of poor visibility
menu, press the button, its again pauses the (for example, snowfall, heavy rain
indicator lamp comes on. function and the or thick fog, ...),
system changes to - if the windscreen is dirty, misted or
Flash the headlamps "automatic illumination obscured (by a sticker, ...) in front of
(going beyond the point
of resistance) to activate
the function.
of headlamps" mode:
- if the AUTO indicator lamp was on in
green, the system changes to main
-
the camera,
if the vehicle is facing highly
reflective signs.
5
beam,
Operation - if the AUTO indicator lamp was on in
The system is not able to detect:
Once the function is activated, the system blue, the system changes to dipped
- road users that do not have their
operates as follows: beam.
own lighting, such as pedestrians,
To reactivate the system, flash the headlamps
If the ambient light level is sufficient and/or - road users whose lighting is
again.
if the traffic conditions do not allow illumination obscured, such as vehicles running
Depending on the
of the main beam headlamps: behind a safety barrier (on a
situation, one of these two
- dipped beam is maintained, this motorway, for example),
indicator lamps comes on.
indicator lamp comes on in the - road users at the top or bottom of
instrument panel. Switching off a steep slope, on twisty roads, on
If the ambient light level is very low and the In the "Driving assistance" crossroads.
traffic conditions permit: menu, press the button, its
indicator lamp goes off and
- main beam comes on
the the system changes to
automatically: this indicator lamp
"automatic illumination of
comes on in the instrument panel.
headlamps" mode.
209

Visibility
Daytime running lamps Door mirror spotlamps Exterior welcome lighting

(LEDs) The remote switching on of the lighting makes
your approach to the vehicle easier in poor
light. It is activated when the lighting control
is in the "AUTO" position and the level of light
detected by the sunshine sensor is low.
Switching on
Press the open padlock on the
remote control or one of the front
door handles with Keyless Entry
and Starting.
To make your approach to the vehicle easier, The dipped beam headlamps
They come on automatically when the engine
these illuminate: and the sidelamps come on; your
is started, when the lighting control stalk is in
- the zones facing the drivers and vehicle is also unlocked.
position "0" or "AUTO".
passengers doors,
- the zones forward of the door mirrors and
rearward of the front doors.
In some weather conditions (e.g. low Switching off
temperature or humidity), the presence
Switching on
The exterior welcome lighting switches off
of misting on the internal surface of the The spotlamps come on automatically:
automatically after a set time, when the ignition
glass of the headlamps and rear lamps - when you unlock the vehicle,
is switched on or on locking the vehicle.
is normal; it disappears after the lamps - when you remove the electronic key from the reader,
have been on for a few minutes. - when you open a door,
- when you use the remote control to locate the Programming
vehicle.
The activation, deactivation and choice of
Switching off welcome lighting duration are done in the
They go off automatically after 30 seconds. " Driving assistance" menu then "Vehicle
settings".
210

Visibility
Manual adjustment
of headlamps
To avoid causing a nuisance to other road

users, the headlamps should be adjusted
5
according to the load in the vehicle.
0. 1 or 2 people in the front seats.
-. Intermediate setting.
1. 5 people + maximum authorised load.
2. Driver + maximum authorised load.
3. 5 people + maximum load in the boot.
The initial setting is position "0".
211

Visibility
Cornering lighting
Switching on
This system starts:
- when the corresponding direction indicator
is switched on,
or
- from a certain angle of rotation of the
steering wheel.
With dipped or main beams, this system with cornering lighting Switching off
makes use of the beam from a front foglamp to
The system does not operate:
illuminate the inside of a bend, when the vehicle
- below a certain angle of rotation of the
speed is below 25 mph (approximately 40 km/h)
steering wheel,
(urban driving, winding road, intersections,
- above 25 mph (40 km/h),
parking manoeuvres...).
- when reverse gear is engaged.
The cornering lighting can be activated or

deactivated in the "Driving assistance menu"
menu, then "Vehicle settings".
without cornering lighting
212

Visibility
Directional lighting
Operating fault
on, this system allows the light beams to better
If a fault occurs, this warning lamp flashes
follow the road.
in the instrument panel, accompanied by
The use of this system, coupled with the
a message in the screen.
xenon headlamps and the cornering lighting,
considerably improves the quality of your
lighting round bends.
workshop.
The directional lighting can be activated or

deactivated via the " Driving aids" menu, then
"Vehicle settings".
with directional lighting
5
without directional lighting

This system is inactive:
- when stationary or at low speeds,
- when reverse is engaged.
213

Visibility
Wiper controls
Programming Manual controls
Your vehicle may also include some functions The wipers are controlled directly by the driver. Windscreen wipers
that can be configured:
- automatic rain sensitive windscreen wipers, The front wiper system includes a
- rear wiping on engaging reverse gear. safety device which can temporarily
inhibit operation if it detects obstacles
such as ice or snow.
In wintry conditions, remove snow, ice Wiping speed control stalk: raise or lower the
or frost present on the windscreen, stalk to the desired position.
around the wiper arms and blades and
the windscreen seal, before operating Fast wipe (heavy rain).
the wipers.
Normal wipe (moderate rain).
Model without AUTO wiping
Intermittent wipe (proportional to the
Do not operate the wipers on a dry speed of the vehicle).
windscreen. Under extremely hot or Park.
cold conditions, ensure that the wiper
blades are not stuck to the windscreen,
Single wipe (press downwards or pull
before operating the wipers.
the stalk briefly towards you, then
release).
or
Automatic wiping (press down,
then release).
Single wipe (pull the stalk briefly
Model with AUTO wiping towards you).
214

Visibility
Rear wiper
Rear wiper selection ring:
park,
intermittent wipe,
wash-wipe (set duration).
5
If a significant accumulation of snow or Reverse gear
ice is present, deactivate the automatic When reverse gear is engaged, the rear wiper
rear wiper via the " Driving assistance" will come into operation if the windscreen
menu, then "Vehicle settings". wipers are operating.
This function can be deactivated in the

"Driving assistance" menu, then " Vehicle
settings".
215

Visibility
Windscreen wash and

headlamp wash
Screenwash and washer jets Headlamp wash

Pull the windscreen wiper stalk towards Adjusting the jets The headlamps operate when the vehicle is
you. The windscreen wash then the The front washers include an adjustment for the moving and when the dipped beam headlamps
windscreen wipers operate for a fixed height of delivery from the jets. are on. However, to reduce the consumption
period. If you want to modify the factory setting, turn of screenwash fluid, the headlamp wash only
A few moments after releasing the wiper stalk, the screw on each jet anti-clockwise, towards operates with every 7th use of the screenwash
there is a last wipe to clear any runs from the the "+" to raise the jet or clockwise, towards the or once every 25 miles (40 km), during a given
screen. "-" to lower it. journey.
216

Visibility
Automatic rain sensitive

windscreen wipers
The windscreen wipers operate automatically,
without any action on the part of the driver, if
rain is detected (sensor behind the rear view
mirror), adapting their speed to the intensity of
the rainfall.
Switching on Switching off The automatic rain sensitive windscreen

Briefly push the control stalk Briefly push the control stalk wipers must be reactivated by pushing
downwards. downwards again, or place the the control stalk downwards, if the
A wiping cycle confirms that the control stalk in another position ignition has been off for more than one
instruction has been accepted. (Int, 1 or 2). minute.
This warning lamp comes on in the This warning lamp goes off in the instrument
instrument panel and a message is panel and a message is displayed.
displayed.
217

Visibility
Special position of the

windscreen wipers
Operating fault
If a fault occurs with the automatic rain
sensitive wipers, the wipers will operate in
intermittent mode.
Have it checked by CITRON dealer or a
qualified workshop.
This position permits release of the windscreen
To maintain the effectiveness of the
wiper blades.
"flat-blade" type of wiper blades, it is
It is used for cleaning or replacement of the
advisable to:
Do not cover the rain sensor, linked with blades. It can also be useful, in winter, to
- handle them with care,
the sunshine sensor and located in the detach the blades from the windscreen.
- clean them regularly using soapy
centre of the windscreen behind the rear water,
view mirror. - avoid using them to retain
On switching off the ignition:
Switch off the automatic rain sensitive cardboard on the windscreen,
any action on the wiper stalk in the minute
wipers when using an automatic car wash. - replace them at the first signs of
after switching off the ignition places the
In winter, it is advisable to wait until the wear.
blades vertically on the screen.
windscreen is completely clear of ice
When the system is no longer powered - at least
before activating the automatic rain
one minute after switching off the ignition - it is
sensitive wipers.
possible to move the arms manually.
Replacement of the arms must only
To park the blades again, switch on the
be done by a CITRON dealer or a
ignition and operate the wiper stalk.
qualified workshop.
218

Visibility
Courtesy lamps
Front - rear courtesy lamps Front - rear map reading
In this position, the courtesy lamp
lamps
comes on gradually: With the ignition on, press the
corresponding switch.
- when the vehicle is unlocked,
- when the electronic key is removed from
the reader, Take care to avoid leaving anything
- when opening a door, in contact with the courtesy lamps.
- when the remote control locking button is
activated, in order to locate your vehicle.
It switches off gradually:
-
-
-
when the vehicle is locked,
when the ignition is switched on,
30 seconds after the last door is closed.
5
Permanently off.
Permanent lighting.
Depending on
version, you can With the "permanent lighting" mode, the lighting
also switch the time varies according to the circumstances:
courtesy lamp on or - with the ignition off, approximately ten
1. Front courtesy lamp off by pressing this minutes,
2. Front map reading lamps button. - in energy economy mode, approximately
3. Rear courtesy lamp thirty seconds,
4. Rear map reading lamps - with the engine running, unlimited.
219

Visibility
Panoramic sunroof
It is fitted with an electrically controlled blind.
Opening the roof blind Closing the roof blind Anti-pinch

Rotate the control A to position 0 to close
the roof blind.
Rotate the control A to slide the roof blind The blind has an anti-pinch function.
to the desired position (positions 1 to 4). At the end of its travel, when the blind
encounters an obstacle on closing, it stops and
moves back slightly.
Following a fault or after a battery
disconnection during the movement of the blind
or after it has stopped, you must re-initialise the
anti-pinch function:
place the blind in the closed position,
press control knob B for approximately
two seconds.
220

Visibility
Interior mood lighting Footwell lighting

The dimmed passenger compartment lighting improves visibility in the vehicle when the light is
poor.
Switching on
The interior mood lighting can be activated
or deactivated via the "Driving assistance"
menu, then " Vehicle settings".
The soft lighting provided by the footwell lamps

5
improves visibility in the vehicle when the light
At night, the lighting of the dashboard, is poor.
centre console, courtesy lamp... come on
automatically when the sidelamps are switched
on.
The interior mood lighting switches off
automatically when the sidelamps are
Activation
switched off. Its operation is identical to that of the courtesy
lamps. The lamps come on when one of the
doors is opened.
221

Safety
Direction indicators Hazard warning lamps Horn
Left: lower the lighting stalk passing the A visual warning by means of the direction Audible warning system to alert other road
point of resistance. indicators to alert other road users to a vehicle users to an imminent danger.
Right: raise the lighting stalk passing the breakdown, towing or accident. Press the central part of the steering
point of resistance. Press this button, the direction indicators wheel.
flash.
They can operate with the ignition off.
Three flashes of the direction Automatic operation of Use the horn moderately and only in the
indicators hazard warning lamps following circumstances:
Press briefly upwards or downwards, When braking in an emergency, depending on - immediate danger,
without going beyond the point of the deceleration, the hazard warning lamps - overtaking a cyclist or pedestrian
resistance; the direction indicators will flash come on automatically. - approaching a location lacking
3 times. They switch off automatically the first time you visibility.
accelerate.
You can also switch them off by pressing
the button.
222

Safety
Emergency or Warning triangle

assistance call
This safety device should be used in addition to
the hazard warning lamps.
Its presence in the vehicle is mandatory.
Before leaving your vehicle to set up

and install the triangle, switch on the
hazard warning lamps and put on your
high visibility vest.
Refer to the manufacturer's instructions

This system allows you to make an emergency
on unfolding and installing supplied with
or assistance call to the emergency services or
6
the triangle.
to the dedicated CITRON service.
For more information on the use of this Placing the triangle in the road
function, refer to the "Audio and telematics" Place the triangle behind the vehicle, as
section. required by the legislation in force in your
country.
A location for stowing the warning triangle is

provided in the tailgate interior trim.
223

Safety
Tyre under-inflation detection

System which automatically checks the pressure of the tyres while driving.
The system continuously monitors the
The under-inflation detection system The inflation pressures defined for
pressures on the four tyres, once the vehicle is
does not replace the vigilance or the your vehicle can be found on the tyre
moving.
responsibility of the driver. pressure label (see the "Identification
It compares the information given by the four
This system does not avoid the need to markings" section).
wheel speed sensors with reference values,
check the tyre pressures (including the Tyre pressures should be checked
which must be reinitialised every time the tyre
spare wheel) every month as well as when the tyres are "cold" (vehicle
pressures are adjusted or a wheel changed.
before a long journey. stopped for 1 hour or after a journey of
The system triggers an alert as soon as it
Driving with under-inflated tyres impairs less than 6 miles (10 km) at moderate
detects a drop in the inflation pressure of one
road holding, extends braking distances speeds).
or more tyres.
and causes premature tyre wear, Otherwise, add 0.3 bar to the pressures
particularly under arduous condition shown on the label.
(high loading, high speed, long journey).
Driving with under-inflated tyres

increases fuel consumption.
224

Safety
Under-inflation alert Reinitialisation
This is given by fixed illumination of In the event of a puncture, use the A label reminds you of the need to reinitialise
this warning lamp, accompanied by temporary puncture repair kit or the spare the system every time one or more tyre
an audible signal and, depending on wheel (depending on equipment), pressure is adjusted, and after changing one or
equipment, the display of a message. or more wheels.
if you have a compressor, such as the one
Reduce speed immediately, avoid in the temporary puncture repair kit, check
excessive steering movements and sudden the pressures of the four tyres when cold,
braking. or
Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe if it is not possible to make this check
to do so. immediately, drive carefully at reduced
speed.
The loss of pressure detected does not

always cause visible bulging of the tyre.
6
Do not satisfy yourself with just a visual The alert is maintained until the system
check. is reinitialised.
225

Safety
Operating fault
Reinitialisation of the system is done with the

Before reinitialising the system, ensure
ignition on and the vehicle stationary.
that the pressures of the four tyres are
From the secondary page of the " Driving
correct for the use of the vehicle and in
assistance" menu:
line with the recommendations on the The flashing and then fixed illumination of the
tyre pressure label. Press " Under-inflation under-inflation warning lamp accompanied
The under-inflation detection system initialisation". by illumination of the "service" warning lamp
does not give a warning if a pressure is indicates a fault with the system.
incorrect at the time of reinitialisation.
Confirm the instruction by pressing "Yes". In this case, under-inflation monitoring of the
tyres is no longer assured.
Have the system checked by a CITRON
The new pressure settings registered are
considered to be reference values by the
system. Before doing anything to the system,
Snow chains the pressures of the four tyres must be
checked and the system reinitialised.
The system does not have to be
reinitialised after fitting or removing
snow chains. The under-inflation alert can only be
considered reliable if reinitialisation of
the system is done with the the four tyre
pressures correctly set.
226

Safety
Electronic stability programme (ESC)

Electronic Stability Programme (ESC: Definitions
Electronic Stability Control) incorporating the
following systems: Anti-lock braking system (ABS) Anti-slip regulation (ASR)
- the anti-lock braking system (ABS) and the and electronic brake force The ASR system (also known as Traction
electronic brake force distribution (EBFD), distribution (EBFD) Control) optimises traction in order to avoid
- the emergency braking assistance, This system improves the stability and wheel slip by acting on the brakes of the driving
- the anti-slip regulation (ASR) or traction manoeuvrability of your vehicle when braking wheels and on the engine. It also improves
control, and provides improved control in corners, in the directional stability of the vehicle on
- the dynamic stability control (DSC). particular on poor or slippery road surfaces. acceleration.
The ABS prevents wheel lock in the event of
emergency braking.
The electronic brake force distribution system
manages the braking pressure wheel by wheel.
Emergency braking assistance

In an emergency, this system enables you to
Dynamic stability control (DSC)
If there is a difference between the path
6
reach the optimum braking pressure more followed by the vehicle and that required by
quickly and therefore reduce the stopping the driver, the DSC monitors each wheel and
distance. automatically acts on the brake of one or more
It is triggered according to the speed at which wheels and on the engine to return the vehicle
the brake pedal is pressed. This is felt by a to the required path, within the limits of the laws
reduction in the resistance of the pedal and an of physics.
increase in the effectiveness of the braking.
227

Safety
Intelligent traction control Operation

system ("Snow motion")
Your vehicle has a system to help driving on Anti-lock braking system (ABS) When changing wheels (tyres and rims),
snow: intelligent traction control. and electronic brake force make sure that these are approved for
This system detects situations of difficult distribution (EBFD) your vehicle.
surface adhesion that could make it difficult to
Normal operation of the ABS may make
move off or make progress on deep fresh snow When this warning lamp comes on,
itself felt by slight vibrations of the brake
or compacted snow. accompanied by an audible signal
pedal.
In these situations, the intelligent traction and a message, it indicates that there
control limits the amount of wheel slip to is a fault with the ABS, which could
provide the best traction and trajectory control cause loss of control of the vehicle
for your vehicle. when braking. In emergency braking, press
In extremely severe conditions (deep snow, very firmly without releasing the
mud, ...), when it proves impossible to move off, pressure.
When this warning lamp comes on,
it may be useful to temporarily deactivate the
coupled with the STOP warning lamp,
ESP/ASR systems to allow the wheels to spin
accompanied by an audible signal and a
freely and so allow movement of the vehicle.
message, it indicates that there is a fault
with the electronic brake force distribution
(EBFD), which could cause loss of
control of the vehicle when braking.
You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
The use of snow tyres is strongly In both cases, contact a CITRON dealer or a
recommended on surfaces offering low levels qualified workshop.
of adhesion.
228

Safety
Deactivation Operating fault

In exceptional conditions (starting a vehicle If this warning lamp comes on,
which is bogged down, stuck in snow, on soft accompanied by an audible signal
ground...), it may be advisable to deactivate and a message, this indicates a fault
the DSC system, so that the wheels can move with the system.
freely and regain grip.
But it is recommended that the system be workshop to have the system checked.
reactivated as soon as possible.
Press the button.

The DSC system offers exceptional
Dynamic stability control
(DSC)
Activation
This warning lamp and the indicator
lamp in the button come on: the
safety in normal driving, but this should
not encourage the driver to take extra
risks or drive at high speed.
6
This system is activated automatically each DSC system no longer acts on the The correct operation of the system
time the vehicle is started. operation of the engine. depends on observation of the
It comes into operation in the event of a grip or manufacturer's recommendations
trajectory problem. Reactivation regarding the wheels (tyres and rims),
the braking components, the electronic
The system is reactivated automatically each
This is indicated by flashing of this components and the assembly and
time the ignition is switched back on or from
warning lamp in the instrument panel. repair procedures used by CITRON
30 mph (50 km/h).
dealers.
Press the button again to After an impact, have the system
reactivate it manually. checked by a CITRON dealer or a
qualified workshop.
229

Safety
Seat belts
Front seat belts
Seat belt reels with reversible
pretension
This system provides automatic adjustment of
the tension of the driver's and passenger's seat
belts after fastening, once the vehicle's speed
is above 6 mph (10 km/h).
In addition, as soon as the system detects a
potentially dangerous driving situation, this
system reacts by drawing in slack in the belt,
(for example, under heavy or sharp braking or
sudden avoiding manoeuvres). By automatically
increasing the tension of the seat belts, the Front seat belt anchorage height
system holds the driver and passenger against adjustment
their seat backrests. To adjust the height of the anchorage point,
The front seat belts are fitted with a Once the driving situation returns to normal, the squeeze the control and slide it up or down
pretensioning and force limiting system. belt reel is released: the belt tension returns to to the desired notch.
This system improves safety in the front the initial level of comfort.
seats in the event of a front or side impact.
Depending on the severity of the impact, the
pretensioning system instantly tightens the seat
belts against the body of the occupants.
The pretensioning seat belts are active when Deactivation of the passenger's airbag
the ignition is on. causes deactivation of the reversible
The force limiter reduces the pressure of the seat belt reel on the passenger's side.
seat belt on the chest of the occupant, so
improving their protection.
230

Safety
2nd row seat belts 2nd row outer seat belts

(stowing)
Fastening The rear seats are each fitted with a seat belt, Guide the belt as it reels in and place the
Pull the strap, then insert the tongue in the
buckle.
Check that the seat belt is fastened
three-point anchorages with inertia reel and
force limiter (except for the centre rear seat).
tongue on the magnet at the side anchorage
point. 6
correctly by pulling the strap.
Unfastening
Press the red button on the buckle.
Guide the seat belt as it reels in.
231

Safety
2nd row centre seat belt 3rd row seat belts

The seat belt for the centre rear seat is built into the roof.
Fastening Unfastening Fastening

Pull the strap and insert the tongue A into Press the red button in buckle B, then Detach the seat belt strap from its retaining
the right hand buckle. buckle A. loop located on the side trim of the boot.
Insert tongue B into the left hand buckle. Guide the seat belt as it reels in and place Pull on the strap and insert the tongue into
Check that each buckle is correctly the tongue B and then A on the magnet in the buckle.
fastened by pulling on the belt webbing. the roof anchorage point. Check that the buckle is correctly fastened
by pulling on the belt strap.
Before any operation of the rear seats, Unfastening and stowing

to avoid damage to the seat belts Press the red button in buckle.
check that there is no slack in the outer Guide the seat belt strap as it reels in.
belts and secure their tongues on the Secure the strap, flat in the retaining loop.
anchorage points. The centre seat belt
must be fully reeled in.
Ensure that the the seat belts are
secured when not in use.
232

Safety
Seat belt not fastened and

unfastened alerts
Seat belts unfastened alert
The instrument panel includes a seat belt not- At speeds above 12 mph (20 km/h), these
fastened warning lamp A as well as an indicator alerts flash, accompanied by an audible signal
of the location of the non-fastened belts B. for two minutes. After this period, these alerts On switching on the ignition, the warning
When the system detects a non-fastened or remain on fixed, while the front seat belts are lamp A remains on, as well as the
unfastened seat belt, the warning lamp A come not fastened. corresponding points in the indicator B, if the
on as well as the corresponding points in the driver and/or one or more passengers have not
indicator B.
Front seat belts not fastened Rear seat belts not fastened
fastened their seat belt.
At speeds above 12 mph (20 km/h), these
alerts flash, accompanied by a message and
an audible signal for two minutes. After this
6
alert alert period, these alerts remain on fixed, while the
seat belts are not fastened.
On switching on the ignition, the warning On switching on the ignition, engine running
lamp A comes on, as well as the corresponding or the vehicle at a speed of up to 12 mph
points in the indicator B, if the driver and/or (20 km/h), the warning lamp A as well as the
front passenger have not fastened their seat corresponding points in the indicator B come
belt. on for about thirty seconds, if one or more rear
passengers have not fastened their seat belt.
233

Safety
The driver must ensure that passengers use In order to be effective, a seat belt must: Recommendations for children
the seat belts correctly and that they are all - be tightened as close to the body as
Use a suitable child seat if the passenger is
restrained securely before setting off. possible,
less than 12 years old or shorter than one
Wherever you are seated in the vehicle, - be pulled in front of you with a smooth
and a half metres.
always fasten your seat belt, even for short movement, checking that it does not
Never use the same seat belt to secure more
journeys. twist,
than one person.
Do not interchange the seat belt buckles as - be used to restrain only one person,
Never allow a child to travel on your lap.
they will not fulfil their role fully. - not bear any trace of cuts or fraying,
The seat belts are fitted with an inertia reel - not be converted or modified to avoid
permitting automatic adjustment of the length affecting its performance.
of the strap to your size. The seat belt is
In accordance with current safety
stowed automatically when not in use.
regulations, for all repairs on your vehicle,
Before and after use, ensure that the seat
go to a qualified workshop with the skills and
In the event of an impact
belt is reeled in correctly.
equipment needed, which a CITRON dealer Depending on the nature and
The lower part of the strap must be
is able to provide. seriousness of the impact, the
positioned as low as possible on the pelvis.
Have your seat belts checked regularly by pretensioning device may be deployed
The upper part must be positioned in the
a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop, before and independently of the airbags.
hollow of the shoulder.
particularly if the straps show signs of Deployment of the pretensioners is
The inertia reels are fitted with an automatic
damage. accompanied by a slight discharge of
locking device which comes into operation in
Clean the seat belt straps with soapy harmless smoke and a noise, due to the
the event of a collision, emergency braking
water or a textile cleaning product, sold by activation of the pyrotechnic cartridge
or if the vehicle rolls over. You can release
CITRON dealers. incorporated in the system.
the device by pulling firmly on the strap and
After folding or moving a seat or rear bench In all cases, the airbag warning lamp
releasing it so that it reels in slightly.
seat, ensure that the seat belt is positioned comes on.
and reeled in correctly. Following an impact, have the seat belts
system checked, and if necessary replaced,
by a CITRON dealer or a qualified
workshop.
234

Safety
Airbags
System designed to maximise the safety of the
occupants (with the exception of the rear centre
passenger) in the event of violent collisions.
The airbags supplement the action of the force-
limiting seat belts (with the exception of the
centre rear passenger).
If a collision occurs, the electronic detectors
record and analyse the front and side impacts
sustained in the impact detection zones:
- in the case of a serious impact, the airbags
are deployed instantly and contribute
towards better protection of the occupants
of the vehicle (with the exception of the rear Impact detection zones
centre passenger); immediately after the Deployment of the airbag(s) is
impact, the airbags deflate rapidly so that A. Front impact zone. accompanied by a slight emission
-
they do not hinder visibility or the exit of the
occupants,
in the case of a minor or rear impact
B. Side impact zone. of smoke and a noise, due to the
activation of the pyrotechnic cartridge
incorporated in the system.
This smoke is not harmful, but sensitive
6
or in certain roll-over conditions, the
airbags will not be deployed; the seat belt individuals may experience slight
alone contributes towards ensuring your irritation.
protection in these situations. The noise of the detonation may result
in a slight loss of hearing for a short
time.
The airbags do not operate when the
ignition is switched off.
This equipment will only deploy once.
If a second impact occurs (during the
same or a subsequent accident), the
airbag will not be deployed again.
235

Safety
Front airbags
To assure the safety of your child,
the passenger's front airbag must be
deactivated when you install a "rear
facing" child seat on the front passenger
seat.
Otherwise, the child would risk being
seriously injured or killed if the airbag
were deployed.
System which protects the driver and front

passenger in the event of a serious front impact
in order to limit the risk of injury to the head and Reactivation
thorax. When you remove the child seat, with the
The driver's airbag is fitted in the centre of the ignition off,
f turn the switch to the "ON"
steering wheel; the front passenger's airbag is position to reactivate the airbag and so assure
fitted in the dashboard above the glove box. the safety of your front passenger in the event
Deactivation
of an impact.
Deployment Only the passenger's front airbag can be
The airbags are deployed, except the passenger's deactivated.
When the ignition is switched on,
front airbag if it is deactivated, in the event of a With the ignition offf, insert the key in the
this warning lamp comes on in the
serious front impact to all or part of the front impact passenger airbag deactivation switch.
instrument panel for approximately
zone A, in the longitudinal centreline of the vehicle Turn it to the "OFF" position.
one minute to signal that the front
on a horizontal plane and directed from the front to Remove the key keeping the switch in the
airbag is activated.
the rear of the vehicle. new position.
The front airbag inflates between the thorax and
When the ignition is on, this warning
head of the front occupant of the vehicle and the
lamp comes in the instrument
steering wheel, driver's side, and the dashboard,
panel. It stays on while the airbag is
passenger's side to cushion their forward movement.
deactivated.
236

Safety
Operating fault
If this warning lamp comes on in the If this warning lamp flashes, contact
instrument panel, accompanied by a CITRON dealer or a qualified
an audible warning and a message, workshop. The passenger's front
contact a CITRON dealer or a airbag may no longer be deployed in
qualified workshop to have the the event of a serious impact.
system checked. The airbags may no
longer be deployed in the event of a
In the event of a fault, identified by at
serious impact.
least one of the two airbag warning
lamps, do not install a child seat or seat
an adult on the front passenger seat.
Have it checked by a CITRON dealer
or qualified workshop.
237

Safety
Lateral airbags
System which protects the driver and front Impact detection zones
passenger in the event of a serious side impact
A. Front impact zone.
in order to limit the risk of injury to the chest,
B. Side impact zone.
between the hip and the shoulder.
Each lateral airbag is fitted in the seat backrest
frame, door side.
Deployment
The lateral airbags are deployed unilaterally in
the event of a serious side impact applied to all
or part of the side impact zone B, perpendicular
to the longitudinal centreline of the vehicle on a
horizontal plane and directed from the outside
towards the inside of the vehicle.
The lateral airbag inflates between the hip and
shoulder of the front occupant of the vehicle
and the corresponding door trim panel.
238

Safety
Curtain airbags
System which protects the driver and Deployment Operating fault
passengers (with the exception of the rear
The curtain airbag is deployed at the same If this warning lamp comes on in the
centre passenger) in the event of a serious side
time as the corresponding lateral airbag in the instrument panel, accompanied by an
impact in order to limit the risk of injury to the
event of a serious side impact applied to all or audible signal and a message, contact
side of the head.
part of the side impact zone B, perpendicular a CITRON dealer or a qualified
Each curtain airbag is built into the pillars and
to the longitudinal centreline of the vehicle on a workshop to have the system checked.
the upper passenger compartment area.
horizontal plane and directed from the outside The airbags may no longer be deployed
towards the inside of the vehicle. in the event of a serious impact.
The curtain airbag inflates between the front or
rear occupant of the vehicle and the windows. In the event of a minor impact or bump
on the side of the vehicle or if the
vehicle rolls over, the airbag may not be
deployed.
In the event of a rear or front collision,
the curtain airbag is not deployed. 6
239

Safety
For the airbags to be fully effective, observe the following safety rules:
Sit in a normal upright position. Front airbags Lateral airbags
Wear a correctly adjusted seat belt.
Do not drive holding the steering wheel by its Use only approved covers on the seats,
Do not leave anything between the
spokes or resting your hands on the centre compatible with the deployment the lateral
occupants and the airbags (a child, pet,
part of the wheel. airbags. For information on the range of seat
object...). This could hamper the operation of
Passengers must not place their feet on the covers suitable for your vehicle, you can
the airbags or injure the occupants.
dashboard. contact a CITRON dealer.
After an accident or if the vehicle has been
If possible, do not smoke as deployment of Refer to the "Accessories" section.
stolen or broken into, have the airbag
the airbags can cause burns or the risk of Do not fix or attach anything to the seat
systems checked.
injury from a cigarette or pipe. backs (clothing...). This could cause injury
All work on the airbag system must be
Never remove or pierce the steering wheel or to the chest or arms if the lateral airbag is
carried out by a CITRON dealer or a
hit it violently. deployed.
qualified workshop.
Do not sit with the upper part of the body any
Even if all of the precautions mentioned
nearer to the door than necessary.
are observed, a risk of injury or of minor
burns to the head, chest or arms when an
airbag is deployed cannot be ruled out. The
bag inflates almost instantly (within a few
milliseconds) then deflates within the same Curtain airbags
time discharging the hot gas via openings Do not fix or attach anything to the roof. This
provided for this purpose. could cause injury to the head if the curtain
airbag is deployed.
If fitted on your vehicle, do not remove the
grab handles installed on the roof, they play
a part in securing the curtain airbags.
240

Safety
General points relating to child seats

Although one of CITRON main criteria when designing your vehicle, the safety of your children
also depends on you.
For maximum safety, please observe the CITRON recommends that children
following recommendations: should travel in the rear seats of your
- in accordance with European regulations, vehicle.
all children under the age of 12 or less - "rearward-facing" up to the age of 3,
than one and a half metres tall must - "forward-facing" over the age of 3.
travel in approved child seats suited to
their weight, on seats fitted with a seat
belt or ISOFIX mountings*,
- statistically, the safest seats in your
vehicle for carrying children are the
rear seats,
- a child weighing less than 9 kg must
travel in the "rearwards-facing" position
both in the front and in the rear. 6
* The rules for carrying children are specific to

each country. Refer to the legislation in force
in your country.
241

Safety
Child seat in the front
"Rearward facing" "Forward facing" Passenger seat in the midway longitudinal

position, the lowest height position, then
When a "rearward-facing" child seat is When a "rearward-facing" child seat is
the height control lever pulled 11 times.
installed on the front passenger seat, adjust installed on the front passenger seat, adjust
the vehicle seat to the midway longitudinal the vehicle seat to the midway longitudinal
position, the lowest height position, backrest position, the lowest height position, backrest
straightened. Then pull the height control lever straightened. Then pull the height control lever
11 times. 11 times. Leave the passenger's airbag active.
The passenger's airbag must be deactivated.
Otherwise, the child risks being seriously
injured or killed if the airbag is deployed.
Ensure that the seat belt is properly
tightened.
For child seats with a stay, ensure
that this is in firm and steady contact
with the floor. If necessary, adjust the
passenger's seat.
242

Safety
Deactivating the passenger's airbag

The warning label present on both sides of
Never install a rearward-facing child
the passenger's sun visor repeats this advice.
restraint system on a seat protected by
In line with current legislation, the following
an active front airbag. This could cause
two pages contain this warning in all of the
the death of the child or serious injury.
languages required.
Passenger airbag OFF
For information on deactivating the

airbag, refer to the "Airbags" section.
243

Safety
AR
BG .
.
CS NIKDY neumisujte
j dtsk zdrn zazen orientovan smrem dozadu na sedadlo chrnn AKTIVOVANM elnm AIRBAGEM. Hroz nebezpe
SMRTI DTTE nebo VNHO ZRANN.
DA Brug aldrig en bagudvendt barnestol p et sde der er beskyttet af en aktiv airbag. Dd eller alvorlig skade p barnet kan forekomme.
DE Verwenden Sie NIEMALS einen Kindersitz oder Babyschale gegen die Fahrtrichtung bei AKTIVIERTEM Airbag, TOD oder ERNSTHAFTE
VERLETZUNGEN knnen die Folge sein.
EL ,
.
EN NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can
occur
ES NO INSTALAR NUNCA EL SISTEMA DE RETENCIN PARA NIOS DE ESPALDAS AL SENTIDO DE LA CIRCULACIN SOBRE UN ASIENTO
PROTEGIDO CON UN COJN INFLABLE FRONTAL ( AIRBAG ) ACTIVADO. ESTO PUEDE CAUSAR LA MUERTE DEL BEBE O HERIRLO
GRAVEMENTE.
ET rge kasutage kunagi lapse turvatooli seljaga sidusuunas siduki istmel mis on kaitstud AKTIVEERITUD TURVAPADJAGA. See vib phjustada lapsele
RASKEID VIGASTUSI vi SURMA.
FI L KOSKAAN aseta lapsen turvaistuinta selk ajosuuntaan istuimelle, jonka edess suojana on kyttn aktivoitu TURVATYYNY. Sen laukeaminen voi
aiheuttaa LAPSEN KUOLEMAN tai VAKAVAN LOUKKAANTUMISEN.
FR NE JAMAIS installer de systme de retenue pour enfants faisant face vers larrire sur un sige protg par un COUSSIN GONFLABLE frontal ACTIV.
Cela peut provoquer la MORT de lENFANT ou le BLESSER GRAVEMENT
HR NIKADA ne p postavljati
j djeju
j j sjedalicu
j leima u smjeru vonje na sjedalo zatieno UKLJUENIM prednjim ZRANIM JASTUKOM. To bi moglo
uzrokovati SMRT ili TEKU OZLJEDU djeteta.
HU SOHA ne hasznljon menetirnynak httal beszerelt gyermeklst olyan lsen, amely AKTIVLT LLAPOT (BEKAPCSOLT) FRONTLGZSKKAL
van vdve. Ez a gyermek hallt vagy slyos srlst okozhatja.
IT NON installare MAI seggiolini per bambini posizionati in senso contrario a quello di marcia su un sedile protetto da un AIRBAG frontale ATTIVATO. Ci
potrebbe provocare la MORTE o FERITE GRAVI al bambino.
LT NIEKADA nerenkite vaiko prilaikymo priemons su atgal atgrtu vaiku ant sdyns, kuri saugoma VEIKIANIOS priekins ORO PAGALVS.
Isiskleidus oro pagalvei vaikas gali bti MIRTINAI arba SUNKIAI TRAUMUOTAS.
LV NAV PIEAUJAMS
uzstdt uz aizmuguri
g vrstu brnu sdeklti priekj
p pasaiera viet, kur ir AKTIVIZTS priekjais DROBAS GAISA SPILVENS.
Tas var izraist BRNA NVI vai radt NOPIETNUS IEVAINOJUMUS.
244

Safety
MT Qatt mghandek thalli tifel/tifla marbut fsiggu dahru lejn l-Airbag attiva, ghaliex tista tikkawza korriment serju jew anke mewt lit-tifel/tifla
NL Plaats NOOIT een kinderzitje met de rug in de rijrichting op een zitplaats waarvan de AIRBAG is INGESCHAKELD. Bij het afgaan van de airbag kan het
KIND ERNSTIG OF DODELIJK GEWOND raken.
NO Installer ALDRI et barnesete med ryggen mot kjreretningen i et sete som er beskyttet med en frontal AKTIVERT KOLLISJONSPUTE, BARNET risikerer
bli DREPT eller HARDT SKADET.
PL NIGDY nie instalowa fotelika dziecicego
g wppozycji
y j "tyem
y do kierunku jjazdy"na
y siedzeniu wyposaonym
yp y w CZOOW
PODUSZK
POWIETRZN
w
stanie AKTYWNYM.W przeciwnym razie dziecko naraone bdzie na MIER lub BARDZO POWANE OBRAENIA CIAA w momenicie wyzwolenia
poduszki powietrznej
PT NUNCA instale um sistema de reteno para crianas de costas para a estrada, num banco protegido por um AIRBAG frontal ACTIVADO. Esta instalao
poder provocar FERIMENTOS GRAVES ou a MORTE da CRIANA.
RO Nu instalati NICIODATA un sistem de retinere pentru copii, dispus cu spatele in directia de mers, pe un loc din vehicul protejat cu AIRBAG frontal
ACTIVAT. Aceasta ar putea provoca MOARTEA COPILULUI sau RANIREA lui GRAVA.
RU

,

,,
.

SK NIKDY nepouvajte
p j na prednom
p sedadle chrnenom AKTVNYM AIRBAGOM detsk zadriavacie zariadenie umiestnen v proti smere jazdy. Me to
spsobi SMR, alebo VNE ZRANENIE DIEAA.
SL
SR
NIKOLI ne nameajte
j otrokega
g sedea s hrbtom v smeri vonje,
j , e jje VARNOSTNA BLAZINA pred sprednjim sopotnikovim sedeem AKTIVIRANA.
Takna namestitev lahko povzroi SMRT OTROKA ali HUDE POKODBE.
NIKADA ne koristite deje sedite koje se okree unazad na seditu zatienim AKTIVNIM VAZDUNIM JASTUKOM ispred njega, jer mogu nastupiti
SMRT ili OZBILJNA POVREDA DETETA.
6
SV Anvnd ALDRIG en baktvnd barnstol i ett ste skyddat av en AKTIV AIRBAG framfr det. Det kan orsaka ALLVARLIGA eller DDLIGA skador p
barnet.
TR KESNLKLE HAVA YASTII AKTF olan n koltua yz arkaya dnk bir ocuk koltuu yerletirmeyiniz. Bu OCUUN LMESNE veya OK AIR
YARALANMASINA sebep olabilir.
245

Safety
Child seat at the rear

"Rearward facing" "Forward facing" Seats in the 3rd row
When a "rearward facing" child seat is installed When a "forward facing" child seat is installed
on a rear passenger seat, move the vehicle's on a rear passenger seat, move the vehicle's When a child seat is installed on a 3 rd row
front seat forwards and straighten the backrest front seat forwards and straighten the backrest passenger seat, move the 2nd row seat
so that the "rearward facing" child seat does so that the legs of the child in the "forward forwards and straighten the backrest so that the
not touch the vehicle's front seat. facing" child seat do not touch the vehicle's child seat and the legs of the child do not touch
front seat. the 2nd row seat.
A child seat with a stay must never be installed
on a 3 rd row passenger seat.
246

Safety
Child seats recommended by CITRON

CITRON offers a complete range of recommended child seats which are secured using
a three point seat belt:
Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg Groups 1, 2 and 3: from 9 to 36 kg
L2
L1
"KIDDY Comfort Pro"
"RMER Baby-Safe Plus"
The impact shield must be
Installed in the rearwards-
used for carrying young
facing position.
children (from 9 to 18 kg).
Groups 2 and 3: from 15 to 36 kg
L4
6
"KLIPPAN Optima"
From approxmately 6 years (22 kg), the booster is used on its own.
L5
"RMER KIDFIX"
Can be fitted to the vehicle's ISOFIX mountings.
The child is restrained by the seat belt.
247

Safety
Installation of child seats secured using

the seat belt
In accordance with European regulations, this table indicates the options for installing child seats secured using the seat belt and universally approved (a)
in relation to the weight of the child and the seat in the vehicle.
Weight of the child / indicative age
Seat Groups 0 (b) and 0+ Group 1 Group 2 Group 3

Birth to 13 kg From 9 to 18 kg From 15 to 25 kg From 22 to 36 kg
Front passenger seat (c)
1st row - fixed U U U U
- height adjustable U(R) U(R) U(R) U(R)
Fixed outer rear

U U U U
seats (d)
Outer rear seats with

2nd row U U U U
longitudinal adjustment (d) (e)
e
Centre rear seat (d) U U U U
248

Safety
(a) Universal child seat: child seat which can be U: seat suitable for the installation of a child
Remove and stow the head restraint
installed in all vehicles using the seat belt. seat secured using the seat belt and
before installing a child seat on a
(b) Group 0: from birth to 10 kg. Infant car seats universally approved "rearward facing" and/
passenger seat. Refit the head restraint
and "car cots" cannot be installed on the or "forward facing", with the passenger seat
once the child seat has been removed.
front passenger seat. When installed in the adjusted to the midway longitudinal position.
2nd row, they may prevent use of the other U(R): same as U, with the passenger's seat
seats. adjusted to the low position with
(c) Consult the legislation in force in your 11 actions on the height control lever and
country before installing your child on in the midway longitudinal position.
this seat.
(d) To install a child seat on a rear seat,
"rearward facing" or "forward facing", move
the front seat forward, then straighten the
backrest to allow enough space for the child
seat and the child's legs.
(e) To install a child seat on a rear seat,
"rearward facing" or "forward facing", adjust
the rear seat to the fully back position, with
6
the backrest upright.
249

Safety
Installation of child seats secured using

the seat belt
In accordance with European regulations, this table indicates the options for installing child seats secured using the seat belt and universally approved (a)
in relation to the weight of the child and the seat in the vehicle.
Seat Groups 0 (b) and 0+ Group 1 Group 2 Group 3

Birth to 13 kg From 9 to 18 kg From 15 to 25 kg From 22 to 36 kg
Front passenger seat (c)
1st row - fixed U U U U
- height adjustable U(R) U(R) U(R) U(R)
Outer rear
U U U U
seats
Outer rear seats with

2nd row U U U U
longitudinal adjustment (d) (e)
e
Centre rear seat (d) U U U U
3rd row Outer rear seas U U U U
250

Safety
(a) Universal child seat: child seat which can be U: seat suitable for the installation of a child
installed in all vehicles using the seat belt. seat secured using the seat belt and
(b) Group 0: from birth to 10 kg. Infant car seats universally approved "rear facing" and/or
and "car cots" cannot be installed on the "forward facing", with the passenger seat
front passenger seat or in the 3rd row. When adjusted to the midway longitudinal position.
installed in the 2nd row, they may prevent U(R): same as U, with the passenger's seat
use of the other seats. adjusted to the low position with
(c) Consult the legislation in force in your 11 actions on the height control lever and
country before installing your child on in the midway longitudinal position.
this seat.
(d) To install a child seat on a rear seat,
"rearward facing" or "forward facing", move
the front seat forward, then straighten the
backrest to allow enough space for the child
seat and the child's legs.
(e) To install a child seat on a rear seat,
"rearward facing" or "forward facing", adjust
the rear seat to the fully back position, with
6
the backrest upright.
251

Safety
"ISOFIX" mountings
latest ISOFIX regulations.
The seats, represented below, are fitted with regulation ISOFIX mountings:
To secure the child seat to the TOP TETHER:
- remove and stow the head restraint before
installing the child seat on this seat (refit it
after the child seat has been removed),
- remove the TOP TETHER cover by pulling
at its cut-out,
- pass the child seat strap behind the seat
backrest, centred between the holes for the
head restraint rods,
- secure the upper strap fixing to the ring B,
- tighten the upper strap.
The ISOFIX mountings are three rings for each seat: - a ring B, located under a cover on the back
of the top of the seat backrest, referred to as
the TOP TETHER R for fixing the upper strap.
Its position is indicated by a marking. The incorrect installation of a child seat
Located on the back of the seat backrest, the in a vehicle compromises the child's
top tether is used to secure the upper strap of protection in the event of an accident.
child seats that have one. This device limits Observe strictly the fitting instructions
forward tipping of the child seat, in the event of provided with the child seat.
a front impact.
This ISOFIX mounting system ensures fast,
reliable and safe fitting of the child seat in your
vehicle.
- two rings A , located between the vehicle The ISOFIX child seats are fitted with two For information on the possibilities
seat back and cushion, indicated by a latches which are secured easily on the two for fitting ISOFIX child seats to your
marking, rings A. vehicle, refer to the table of seating
Some also have an upper strap (or top tether) positions.
which is attached to ring B.
252

Safety
ISOFIX child seats recommended by CITRON and approved for

your vehicle
"RMER Baby-Safe Plus and its Baby-Safe Plus ISOFIX base" (size category: E)
Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg
Installed "rearward facing" using an ISOFIX base which is attached to the rings A.
The base has a stay, adjustable for height, which sits on the vehicle's floor.
This seat can be secured with a seat belt. In this case, only the shell is used and attached to the
vehicle's seat by the three-point seat belt.
Baby P2C Midi and its ISOFIX base (size categories: D, C, A, B, B1) 6
Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg
Installed "rearward facing" using an ISOFIX base which is attached to the rings A
The base has a stay, adjustable for height, which sits on the vehicle's floor.
This child seat can also be used "forward facing".
This seat can not be secured with a seat belt.
We recommend that you use the seat in the "rearward facing" position up to the age of 3 years.
253

Safety
Locations for installing ISOFIX

child seats
In accordance with European Regulations, this table indicates the options for installing ISOFIX child seats on seats in the vehicle fitted with ISOFIX
mountings.
In the case of universal and semi-universal ISOFIX child seats, the ISOFIX size category, determined by a letter from A to G, is indicated on the child
seat next to the ISOFIX logo.
Less than 10 kg
Less than 10 kg
(group 0)
(group 0) From 9 to 18 kg (group 1)
Less than 13 kg
Up to approx. From approx. 1 to 3 years
(group 0+)
6 months
Up to approx. 1 year
Type of ISOFIX child seat Sleeper cot* "rearwards-facing" "rearwards-facing" "forwards-facing"
ISOFIX size category F G C D E C D A B B1
Front passenger seat Not ISOFIX
Outer rear seats, fixed IL-SU** IL-SU IL-SU X IUF / IL-SU
IUF / IL-SU
Outer rear seats, adjustable longitudinally IL-SU** IL-SU IL-SU IUF / IL-SU
(1)
Centre rear seat X IL-SU IL-SU IUF / IL-SU IUF / IL-SU
* Sleeper cots cannot be fitted to the front passenger's ** The ISOFIX sleeper cot, secured to the lower rings of an ISOFIX seat,
seat. occupies the full width of the rear seats.
254

Safety
IUF: seat suitable for the installation of an For advice on securing of the top belt, refer to
ISOFIX Universal seat, " Forwards-facing" the "Isofix Mountings" section.
secured using the top strap to the top X: seat not suitable for the installation of a
tether on ISOFIX seats. child seat or sleeper cot for the weight group
IL-SU: seat suitable for the installation of an indicated.
Isofix Semi- Universal seat either: (1): The outer seat in row 2 must be adjusted
- "rearwards-facing" fitted with a top belt to 3 notches back from the fully forward
or a stay, position.
- "forwards-facing" fitted with a stay,
- a sleeper cot fitted with an upper strap
or a stay.
255

Safety
Locations for installing ISOFIX

child seats
mountings.
In the case of universal and semi-universal ISOFIX child seats, the ISOFIX size category, determined by a letter from A to G, is indicated on the child
seat next to the ISOFIX logo.
Less than 10 kg
Less than 10 kg
(group 0)
(group 0) From 9 to 18 kg (group 1)
Less than 13 kg
Up to approx. From approx. 1 to 3 years
(group 0+)
6 months
Up to approx. 1 year
Type of ISOFIX child seat Sleeper cot* "rearwards-facing" "rearwards-facing" "forwards-facing"
ISOFIX size category F G C D E C D A B B1
Front passenger seat Not ISOFIX
Outer rear seats, fixed IL-SU** IL-SU IL-SU IUF / IL-SU IUF / IL-SU
Outer rear seats, adjustable longitudinally IL-SU** IL-SU IL-SU IUF / IL-SU IUF / IL-SU
Centre rear seat X IL-SU IL-SU IUF / IL-SU IUF / IL-SU
Rear seat in the 3rd row Not ISOFIX
* Sleeper cots cannot be fitted to the front passenger's ** The ISOFIX sleeper cot, secured to the lower rings of an ISOFIX seat,
seat. occupies the full width of the rear seats.
256

Safety
IUF: seat suitable for the installation of an For advice on securing of the top belt, refer to
ISOFIX Universal seat, " Forwards-facing" the "Isofix Mountings" section.
secured using the top strap to the top X: seat not suitable for the installation of a
tether on ISOFIX seats. child seat or sleeper cot for the weight group
IL-SU: seat suitable for the installation of an indicated.
Isofix Semi- Universal seat either: (1): The outer seat in row 2 must be adjusted
- "rearwards-facing" fitted with a top belt to 3 notches back from the fully forward
or a stay, position.
- "forwards-facing" fitted with a stay,
- a sleeper cot fitted with an upper strap
or a stay.
257

Safety
Advice on child seats

The incorrect installation of a child seat in a Children at the front As a safety precaution, do not leave:
vehicle compromises the child's protection in - one or more children alone and
The legislation on carrying a child on the
the event of an accident. unsupervised in a vehicle,
front passenger seat is specific to each
Remember to fasten the seat belts or the - a child or an animal in a vehicle which
country. Refer to the legislation in force in
child seat harnesses keeping the slack in is exposed to the sun, with the windows
your country.
relation to the child's body to a minimum, closed,
Deactivate the passenger's airbag when a
even for short journeys. - the keys within reach of children inside
"rearward facing" child seat is installed on
For optimum installation of the "forward the vehicle.
the front seat. Otherwise, the child would risk
facing" child seat, ensure that the back of To prevent accidental opening of the doors,
being seriously injured or killed if the airbag
the child seat is as close as possible to the use the "Child lock".
were deployed.
backrest of the vehicle's seat, or in contact Take care not to open the rear windows by
if possible more than one third.
The head restraint must be removed before To protect young children from the rays of
installing a child seat with a backrest on the
Installing a booster cushion the sun, fit side blinds on the rear windows.
passenger seat. The chest part of the seat belt must be
Ensure that the head restraint is stowed or positioned on the child's shoulder without
attached securely so that it is not thrown touching the neck.
around the vehicle in the event of sharp Ensure that the lap part of the seat belt
braking. passes correctly over the child's thighs.
Refit the head restraint as soon as the child CITRON recommends the use of a booster
seat is removed. seat which has a back, fitted with a seat belt
guide at shoulder level.
258

Safety
Manual child lock

This mechanical system prevents opening of the rear door using its interior control.
The control is located on the edge of each rear door.
Locking
Using the integral ignition key, turn the
control as far as it will go:
Unlocking
Using the integral ignition key, turn the
control as far as it will go:
6
- to the left on the left-hand rear door, - to the right on the left-hand rear door,
- to the right on the right-hand rear door. - to the left on the right-hand rear door.
259

Practical information
Temporary puncture repair kit

Complete system consisting of a compressor Access to the kit
and a sealant cartridge which permits
temporary repairr of a tyre so that you can
drive to the nearest garage.
It is designed to repair most punctures which
could affect the tyre, located on the tyre tread
or shoulder.
This kit is installed in the storage box, under the Depending on version, the kit is stowed under
boot floor. the front passenger's seat or in the storage
box under the second row footwell.
260

List of tools
All of these tools are specific to your vehicle
and can vary according to equipment. Do not
use them for other purposes.
1. 12 V compressor.
Contains a sealant cartridge for the
temporary repair of a tyre and can also be
used for adjusting tyre pressures.
2. Chocks* to immobilise the wheels of the
vehicle.
3. Bolt cover removal tool*.
For removing the wheel bolt finishers
(covers) on alloy wheels.
4. Removable towing eye.
See the "Towing the vehicle" section.
261

Description of the kit
The tyre inflation pressures are given on this A. "Sealant" or "Air" position selector. F. Sealant cartridge.
label. B. On "I" / off "O" switch. G. White pipe with cap for repair.
C. Deflation button. H. Black pipe for inflation.
D. Pressure gauge (in bar and p.s.i.). I. Speed limit sticker.
E. Compartment housing:
- a cable with adaptor for 12 V socket,
- various inflation adaptors for
accessories, such as balls, bicycle
tyres...
The speed limit sticker I must be affixed

to the vehicle's steering wheel to remind
you that a wheel is in temporary use.
Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph
(80 km/h) when driving with a tyre
repaired using this type of kit.
262

Repair procedure
1. Sealing
Switch off the ignition. Uncoil the white pipe G fully. Connect the compressor's electric plug to
Turn the selector A to the "sealant" Unscrew the cap from the white pipe. the vehicle's 12 V socket.
position. Connect the white pipe to the valve of the Start the vehicle and leave the engine
Check that the switch B is in tyre to be repaired. running.
position "O".
7
Take care, this product is harmful Do not start the compressor before
(e.g. ethylene-glycol, colophony...) if connecting the white pipe to the tyre
swallowed and causes irritation to the eyes. valve: the sealant product would be
Avoid removing any foreign bodies Keep this product out of the reach of expelled through the pipe.
which have penetrated into the tyre. children.
263

Switch on the compressor by moving Remove the kit and screw the cap back on
the switch B to position "I" until the tyre the white pipe.
pressure reaches 2.0 bars. Take care to avoid staining your vehicle
The sealant is injected into the tyre under with traces of fluid. Keep the kit to hand.
pressure; do not disconnect the pipe from Drive immediately for approximately
the valve during this operation (risk of three miles (five kilometres), at reduced
splashing). speed (between 15 and 35 mph (20 and
60 km/h)), to plug the puncture. Tyre under-inflation
Stop to check the repair and the tyre detection
If after around 5 to 7 minutes the pressure using the kit.
After repair of the tyre, the warning
pressure is not attained, this indicates lamp will remain on until the system is
that the tyre is not repairable; contact reinitialised.
a CITRON dealer or a qualified For more information, refer to the
workshop for assistance. "Under-inflation detection" section.
264

2. Inflation
Turn the selector A to the "air" Connect the compressor's electric plug to Adjust the pressure using the compressor
position. the vehicle's 12 V socket. (to inflate: switch B in position "I"; to
Uncoil the black pipe H fully. Start the vehicle again and leave the deflate: switch B in position "O" and press
Connect the black pipe to the engine running. button C), in accordance with the vehicle's
valve of the wheel. tyre pressure label (located on the left hand
door aperture).
A loss of pressure indicates that the
7
As soon as possible, go to a CITRON puncture has not been fully plugged;
dealer or a qualified workshop. contact a CITRON dealer or qualified
You must inform the technician that you workshop for assistance.
have used this kit. After inspection, the Remove and stow the kit.
technician will advise you on whether Drive at reduced speed (50 mph [80 km/h]
the tyre can be repaired or if it must be max) limiting the distance travelled to
replaced. approximately 120 miles (200 km).
265

Stow the black pipe.

Beware of discharges of fluid.
Detach the angled base from the white pipe.
The expiry date of the fluid is indicated
Support the compressor vertically.
on the cartridge.
Unscrew the cartridge from the bottom.
The sealant cartridge is designed for
single use; even if only partly used, it
must be replaced.
After use, do not discard the cartridge
into the environment, take it to an
authorised waste disposal site or a
CITRON dealer.
Do not forget to obtain a new sealant
cartridge, available from CITRON
dealers or from a qualified workshop.
266

Checking tyre pressures /

inflating accessories
You can also use the compressor, without Connect the compressor's electrical
Should the pressure of one or more
injecting any product, to: connector to the vehicle's 12 V socket.
tyres be adjusted, it is necessary to
- check or adjust the pressure of your tyres, Start the vehicle and let the engine run.
reinitialise the tyre pressures (see the
- inflate other accessories (balls, bicycle Adjust the pressure using the compressor
"Under-inflation detection" section).
tyres...).
Turn the selector A to the "Air"

(to inflate: switch B in position "I"; to
deflate: switch B in position "O" and press
button C), according to the vehicle's tyre
pressure label or the accessory's pressure
7
position. label.
Uncoil the black pipe H fully. Remove the kit then stow it.
Connect the black pipe to the
valve of the wheel or accessory.
If necessary, fit one of the adaptors
supplied with the kit first.
267

Changing a wheel
Procedure for changing a faulty wheel for the spare wheel using the tools provided with the vehicle.
Access to the tools
List of tools*
All of these tools are specific to your
vehicle and can vary according to the level
of equipment. Do not use them for other
purposes.
1. Wheelbrace.
For removing the wheel trim and removing
the wheel bolts.
2. Chocks for immobilising the vehicle (except
versions with manual gearbox).
3. Jack with integral handle.
The tools are installed in the boot under the For raising the vehicle.
floor. 4. Wheel bolt cover removal tool.
Remove the boot carpet for access to them. For removing the finishers on the heads of
the wheel bolts on alloy wheels.
5. Socket for the security bolts (located in the
glove box).
For adapting the wheelbrace to the special
"security" bolts.
* According to equipment.
268

Access to the spare wheel

The spare wheel is located in the boot under
the floor.
For access to the spare wheel, refer to the
"Access to the tools" section.
Putting the spare wheel back in

place
Return the wheel to its housing. Return the box to its position in the middle
Unscrew the central screw a few turns, of the wheel.
Taking out the wheel
Unscrew the central green screw.
Lift the spare wheel towards you from the
then put it in place in the middle of the
wheel.
Fully tighten the central screw to secure the As the spare wheel is narrower than the
wheels on the vehicle, in the event of a
7
wheel correctly.
rear. puncture, the punctured wheel must be
Remove the wheel from the boot. carried in the boot.
269

Changing a wheel
Procedure for changing a wheel with a punctured tyre by the spare wheel using the tools provided with the vehicle.
Access to the vehicle's tools*

2. Wheel chocks for immobilising the vehicle
(except versions with manual gearbox).
3. Jack with integral handle.
For raising the vehicle.
4. Wheel bolt head cover removal tool.
For removing the wheel bolt head finishers
on alloy wheels.
5. Socket for the security bolts (stowed in the
glove box).
For adapting the wheelbrace to the special
security bolts.
6. Wheelbrace extension.
Some of the tools are accessible from inside For unscrewing/tightening the spare wheel
the boot. The wheel chocks 2 as well as the carrier drive.
wheelbrace extension 6 are stowed under the 7. Towing eye.
right hand boot sill.
The wheelbrace 1 and the towing eye 7 are
stowed under the left hand boot sill.
The other tools, the jack 3 and the tool for
removing the wheel bolt head finishers for alloy Wheel with trim
wheels 4, are stowed in a box attached to the When removing the wheel, detach the trim
spare wheel. The assembly is secured under first using the wheelbrace 1 pulling at the valve
the vehicle in a carrier. See the "Access to the
List of tools* passage hole.
spare wheel" section). All of these tools are specific to your vehicle When refitting the wheel, refit the trim
and can vary according to equipment. Do not starting by placing its notch facing the valve
use them for other purposes. and press around its edge with the palm of your
1. Wheelbrace. hand.
* Depending on version. The complete tooling For removing the wheel trim and the wheel
is with the spare wheel. fixing bolts.
270

Access to the spare wheel*
The spare wheel is supported by a carrier Taking out the spare wheel
underneath the vehicle.
Fold the concertina board and put the left Detach the wheel/box assembly from the
hand third row seat into position (if your rear of the vehicle.
Only a "space-saver" type of spare vehicle has them). Remove the hook with its connection plate
wheel can be fitted under the vehicle. Raise the pre-cut section of carpet to
expose the nut for operating the spare
wheel carrier.
to release the wheel/box assembly, as
shown in the illustration.
Pull out the wheel to gain access to the
7
Using the extension 6 fitted to the end of box.
the wheelbrace, turn the nut clockwise to
unwind the carrier cable until the spare
wheel reaches the ground. Unwind the
length needed for access to the wheel.
* Depending on version.
271

Stowing the tools

Return the tools to the box and stow the
box in the vehicle's boot.
Wind in the carrier by turning the
wheelbrace clockwise: once the cable is
fully wound in you should no longer feel
any resistance.
Stow the other tools in the locations
provided in the boot.
A puncture wheel from the vehicle Putting the spare wheel back in
Press the tongue, slide the box cover to the cannot be fitted under the vehicle. It place
centre and remove it for access to the other must be carried in the boot. Use a cover Stow the corresponding tools in the box
tools (jack and wheel bolt head finisher to protect the boot. and close the cover.
removal tool for alloy wheels). Position the tool box on the ground.
272

Position the spare wheel on the box so that Pass the hook with its connection plate into Raise the wheel/box assembly underneath
the positioning indicator will be introduced the wheel then the box, as illustrated. the vehicle by turning the carrier drive nut
into the bolt hole in the middle of the box. anticlockwise using the wheelbrace and
the extension.
Tighten fully. When the cable is fully wound
7
in, rotation of the nut no longer presents
any resistance.
Check that the wheel is horizontally flat
against the floor.
273

Parking the vehicle

Immobilise the vehicle where it does not
block traffic: the ground must be level,
stable and not slippery.
Apply the parking brake unless it has
been programmed to automatic mode,
switch off the ignition and engage first
gear* to block the wheels.
Check that the braking warning lamp
and the P warning lamp in the parking
brake control lever come on.
For greater safety, place a chock 2 List of operations
against the wheel opposite to the one Remove the finisher from from each of bolts using the tool 4 (depending on equipment).
being changed. Fit the security socket 5 on the wheelbrace 1 to slacken the security bolt (if fitted).
The occupants must get out of the Slacken the other bolts (no more than a 1/4 turn) using the wheelbrace 1 only.
vehicle and wait where they are safe.
Never go underneath a vehicle raised
using a jack; use an axle stand.
* Position R for an electronic gearbox or P for

an automatic gearbox.
274

Place the jack 3 in contact with one of the Extend the jack 3 until its base plate is in Raise the vehicle until there is sufficient
two front A or rear B locations provided on contact with the ground. Ensure that the space between the wheel and the ground
the underbody, whichever is closest to the centreline of the jack base plate is directly to admit the spare (not punctured) wheel
wheel to be changed. below the location A or B used. easily.
Remove the bolts and store them in a clean
place.
Remove the wheel.
7
275

Fitting a wheel
Fitting the "space-saver"
spare wheel
If your vehicle is fitted with alloy wheels,
when tightening the bolts on fitting, it
is normal to notice that the washers
do not come into contact with the
"space-saver" spare wheel. The wheel
is secured by the conical surface of
each bolt.
After changing a wheel List of operations

Put the wheel in place on the hub.
To correctly store the punctured wheel
Screw in the bolts fully by hand.
in the boot (not in the location of the
Pre-tighten the security bolt using the
space-saver wheel), first remove the
wheelbrace 1 fitted with the security
central cover.
socket 5 (depending on equipment).
When using the "space-saver" type
Pre-tighten the other bolts using the
spare wheel, do not exceed 50 mph
wheelbrace 1 only.
(80 km/h).
Have the tightening of the bolts and the
pressure of the spare wheel checked
workshop without delay.
Have the punctured wheel repaired
and refitted to the vehicle as soon as
possible.
276

Lower the vehicle fully. Tighten the security bolt using the
The tyre inflation pressures are given
Fold the jack 3 and detach it. wheelbrace 1 fitted with the security
on this label.
socket 5 (depending on equipment).
Tighten the other bolts using the
wheelbrace 1 only.
Refit the bolt covers on each of the bolts or
7
the hub cap (depending on equipment).
Store the tools in the box.
277

Snow chains
In wintry conditions, snow chains improve traction as well as the behaviour of the vehicle when
braking.
The snow chains must be fitted only

Use only chains designed to be fitted the type Advice on installation
of wheel on your vehicle:
to the front wheels. They must never If you have to fit the chains during a
be fitted to "space-saver" type spare journey, stop the vehicle on a flat surface
wheels. on the side of the road.
Specification of Apply the parking brake and position any
Original tyre size wheel chocks to prevent movement of your
chains.
vehicle.
205/60 R16 Fit the chains following the instructions
Maximum link size:
provided by the manufacturer.
205/55 R17 9 mm
Move off gently and drive for a few
moments, without exceeding 30 mph
(50 km/h).
THULE model
225/45 R18 Stop your vehicle and check that the snow
K-Summit K34 only
chains are correctly tightened.
For more information on snow chains, contact a

CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop.
Avoid driving on roads that have been
cleared of snow, to avoid damaging your
vehicle's tyres and the road surface. It
Take account of the legislation in force is recommended that before you leave,
in your country on the use of snow you practise fitting the snow chains on
chains and the maximum running speed a level and dry surface. If your vehicle
authorised. is fitted with alloy wheels, check that
no part of the chain or its fixings is in
contact with the wheel rim.
278

Changing a bulb
Front lamps
Risk of electrocution
Xenon bulbs (D5S-25W) must be
replaced by a CITRON dealer or a
qualified workshop.
For H7 type bulbs with lugs... take care

to observe their correct installation so as
to ensure the best lighting performance.
In some weather conditions (e.g. low

temperature or humidity), the presence
of misting on the internal surface of the
glass of the headlamps and rear lamps
is normal; it disappears after the lamps
Model with xenon headlamps

1. Directional dipped beam headlamps
Model with halogen headlamps
1. Dipped beam headlamps (H7-55W).
have been on for a few minutes.
7
(D5S-25W). 2. Main beam headlamps (H7-55W).
2. Main beam headlamps (H7-55W). 3. Daytime running lamps/sidelamps
3. Daytime running lamps / sidelamps (4 light emitting diodes - LEDs). Changing the light emitting
(6 light emitting diodes - LEDs). 4. Direction indicators (PWY24W). diode-LED lamps
4. Direction indicators 5. Foglamps (H11-55W).
For replacement, contact a CITRON dealer or
(6 light emitting diodes - LEDs).
qualified workshop.
5. Front foglamps (H11-55W).
279

The headlamps are fitted with

polycarbonate glass with a protective
coating:
do not clean them using a dry
or abrasive cloth, nor with a
detergent or solvent product,
use a sponge and soapy water or a
pH neutral product,
when using a high pressure washer
on persistent marks, do not keep
the lance directed towards the
lamps or their edges for too long,
so as not to damage their protective Directional dipped beam Main beam headlamps (xenon model)
coating and seals. headlamps (xenon model)
Changing a bulb should only be done Remove the protective plastic cover by
after the headlamp has been switched D5S xenon bulbs must be changed
pulling the tab.
off for a few minutes (risk of serious by a CITRON dealer or a qualified
Push the connector.
burns). workshop, as there is a risk of
Remove the bulb and change it.
Do not touch the bulb directly with electrocution.
For reassembly, carry out these operations in
your fingers, use a lint-free cloth. In the event of failure of one of the D5S
reverse order.
It is imperative to use only anti- bulbs, it is recommended that the bulb
ultraviolet (UV) type bulbs to avoid on the other side be changed at the
damaging the headlamp. same time.
Always replace a failed bulb with a
new bulb with the same type and
specification.
280

Dipped beam headlamps Main beam headlamps Daytime running lamps / sidelamps
(halogen model) (halogen model)
Turn the protective plastic cover to Remove the protective plastic cover by For the replacement of this type of LED lamp
remove it. pulling the tab. and lighting guides, contact a CITRON dealer
Disconnect the connector. Push the connector. or a qualified workshop.
Release the clips.
reverse order.
A replacement kit for the LEDs is available from
CITRON dealers. 7
reverse order.
281

Direction indicators Direction indicators (light Front foglamps

emitting diodes - LED)
For the replacement of this type of lamp, Unclip the finisher by pulling at the top.
Faster flashing of a direction indicator
contact a CITRON dealer or a qualified Remove the two screws to remove the unit.
warning lamp (left or right) indicates a
workshop. Turn the bulb holder a quarter turn.
failed bulb on that side.
Remove the bulb holder.
Change the failed bulb.
The direction indicator bulb is located below the reverse order, pressing on the finisher to refit it.
front lamp.
Turn the bulb holder a quarter turn anti-
clockwise.
Remove the bulb holder.
Change the failed bulb.
reverse order.
282

Door mirror spotlamps Rear lamps
1. Direction indicator (PY21W amber).

2. Sidelamp / foglamp (P21/5W).
Model with conventional bulb lamps
You should contact a CITRON dealer or a
3. Brake lamp / sidelamp (P21/5W).
qualified workshop for the replacement of the
4. Reversing lamp (W16W).
light emitting diode - LED.
5. Direction indicator (PY21W).
Integrated direction indicator

side repeaters
7
You should contact a CITRON dealer or a
qualified workshop for the replacement of these Changing the light emitting
bulbs.
Model with LED lamps diode-LED lamps
For replacement, contact a CITRON
3. Brake lamp / sidelamp (light emitting
dealer or qualified workshop.
diodes-LED).
4. Reversing lamp (W16W).
5. Direction indicator (PY21W).
283

Model with LED lamps
Lamps on the tailgate

Identify the failed bulb. Remove the three lamp fixing screws A .
Open the boot. Disconnect the lamp connector.
Remove the access cover. Carefully remove the lamp from the outside
by pressing the retaining clip B.
Turn the bulb holder a quarter of a turn

anti-clockwise and pull the bulb out.
Change the bulb.
reverse order.
284

Rear lamps
1. Direction indicator (PY21W amber). Model with LED lamps Model with conventional bulb lamps
2. Sidelamp / foglamp (P21/5W).
3. Sidelamp (light emitting diodes-LED). 3. Sidelamp (P21/5W).
4. Brake lamp (light emitting diodes-LED). 4. Brake lamp / sidelamp (P21/5W).
5. Direction indicator (PY21W). 5. Direction indicator (PY21W).
6. Reversing lamp (light emitting
diodes-LED).
6. Reversing lamp (P21W).
7
285

Lamps on the tailgate Model with LED lamps
Identify the failed bulb. Remove the three lamp fixing screws A.
Open the boot. Disconnect the lamp connector.
Remove the access cover. Carefully remove the lamp from its housing.
Turn the bulb holder a quarter of a turn
anti-clockwise and pull the bulb out.
Change the bulb.
reverse order.
286

Direction indicator, sidelamp and Third brake lamp (light emitting Number plate lamps (W5W)
foglamp diodes-LED)
Access is by passing a hand under the bumper. For the replacement of this type of lamp, Insert a thin screwdriver into one of the
Turn the bulb holder a quarter of a turn and contact a CITRON dealer or a qualified cutouts in the the lens.
pull it out. workshop. Push it outwards to unclip it.
Change the bulb.
For reassembly carry out these operations in
reverse order.
Remove the lens.
Change the faulty bulb. 7
You can also contact a CITRON dealer or a
To refit, press on the lens to clip it in place.
qualified workshop for the replacement of these
bulbs.
287

Changing a fuse
Access to the tools Changing a fuse
Before changing a fuse:
the cause of the failure must be identified
and rectified,
all electrical consumers must b switched
off,
the vehicle must be immobilised with the
ignition off, Good Failed
identify the failed fuse using the tables and
layout drawings in the following pages.
The extraction tweezer is located in the To replace a fuse, you must:

dashboard fusebox compartment. use the special tweezer to extract the fuse
For access to it: from its housing and check the condition of Tweezer
unclip the cover by pulling at the top right, its filament.
then left, always replace the failed fuse with a fuse
disengage the cover completely, by of the same rating (same colour); using a
carefully pulling in the direction indicated different rating could cause faults (risk of
by the arrow, The replacement of a fuse not shown in
fire).
remove the tweezer. the tables below may cause a serious
If the fuse fails again soon after replacement,
malfunction of your vehicle. Contact
have the vehicle's electrical system checked by
a CITRON dealer or a qualified
a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop.
workshop.
288

Configurations
Installing electrical
accessories
Your vehicle's electrical system is
designed to operate with standard or
optional equipment.
Before installing other electrical
equipment or accessories on your
vehicle, contact a CITRON dealer or a
qualified workshop.
The type of electrical system of the vehicle depends on its level of equipment.
CITRON will not accept responsibility To identify the type of electrical system on your vehicle, open the bonnet: the presence of an
for the cost incurred in repairing your additional fusebox in front of the battery indicates that it is type 2.
vehicle or for rectifying malfunctions The type 1 electrical system does not have any fuses in front of the battery.
resulting from the installation of
accessories not supplied and not
recommended by CITRON and
not installed in accordance with its
7
instructions, in particular when the
combined consumption of all of the
additional equipment connected
exceeds 10 milliamperes.
289

Dashboard fuses
Type 1 fuse tables
Fusebox 1
Fuse N Rating Functions
F8 5A Steering mounted controls
Touch screen tablet, audio and navigation system, CD player,

F18 20 A
USB ports and auxiliary sockets.
F16 15 A Front 12V socket.
F15 15 A Boot 12V socket.

The fusebox is located in the lower dashboard
(left-hand side). F28 5A START/STOP button.
F30 15 A Rear wiper.
F27 15 A Front screenwash pump, rear screenwash pump.
F26 15 A Horn.
F20 5A Airbags.
F21 5A Instrument panel.
F19 5A Rain and sunshine sensor.
F12 5A Keyless starting unit.
F2 5A Manual headlamp adjustment control.

Access to the fuses
Refer to the paragraph "Access to the tools".
290

Fusebox 2
F9 15 A Rear 12V socket.
291

Type 2 fuse tables

F3 3A START/STOP button.
Touch screen tablet, audio and navigation system, CD player,

F6 A 15 A
USB ports and auxiliary sockets.
F8 5A Alarm.
F9 3A Steering mounted controls.
F19 5A Instrument panel.
F24 3A Rain and sunshine sensor.
F25 5A Airbags.
F33 3A Memorisation of driving position.
F34 5A Electric power steering.
F13 10 A Front 12V socket.
F14 10 A Boot 12V socket.
F16 3A Map reading lamps in row 1 courtesy lamps.
F27 5A Electronic gearbox gear selector.
F30 20 A Rear wiper.
F38 3A Manual headlamp adjustment control.
292

Engine compartment fuses
The fusebox is placed in the engine Access to the fuses

compartment near the battery (left-hand side).
Unclip the cover, by pushing the two red
latches towards the rear of the vehicle.
Change the fuse (see corresponding
paragraph).
When you have finished, close the cover
carefully to ensure correct sealing of the
7
fusebox.
An additional fusebox is fitted in front of the

battery, for type 2.
293

Type 1 fuse table

F18 10 A Right hand main beam
F19 10 A Left hand main beam.
Type 2 fuse table

Fusebox 1
F9 30 A Motorised tailgate.
F18 25 A Hi-Fi amplifier.
F21 3A Hands-free starting reader unit.
Fusebox 2
F19 30 A Front wiper slow / fast speed.
F20 15 A Front and rear screenwash pump.
F21 20 A Headlamp wash pump.
294

12 V battery
Procedure for starting the engine using another battery or charging a discharged battery.
Access to the battery Starting using another
battery
When your vehicle's battery is discharged, the
engine can be started using a slave battery
(external or on another vehicle) and jump lead
cables.
First check that the slave battery has a

nominal voltage of 12 V and a capacity
The presence of this label, in particular
at least equal to that of the discharged
with the Stop & Start system, indicates
battery.
the use of a 12 V lead-acid battery with
The battery is located under the bonnet. Do not try to start the engine by
special technology and specification;
For access to the (+) terminal: connecting a battery charger.
the involvement of a CITRON dealer
release the bonnet using the interior lever, Do not disconnect the (+) terminal when
or a qualified workshop is essential
then the exterior safety catch, the engine is running.
when replacing or disconnecting the
battery. raise the bonnet and secure it with its stay,
Connect the red cable to the positive
lift the plastic cover for access to the (+)
terminal. terminal (+) of the flat battery A, then to the
positive terminal (+) of the slave battery B.
Connect one end of the green or black
7
After refitting the battery, the Stop & cable to the negative terminal (-) of the
Start system will only be active after a Before doing any work slave battery B (or earth point on the other
continuous period of immobilisation of the vehicle).
Immobilise the vehicle: apply the
vehicle, a period which depends on the Connect the other end of the green or black
parking brake, put the gearbox in
climatic conditions and the state of charge cable to the earth point C on the broken
neutral, then switch off the ignition.
of the battery (up to about 8 hours). down vehicle (or on the engine mounting).
Check that all electrical equipment is
Start the engine of the vehicle with the
switched off.
good battery and leave it running for a
few minutes.
295

Before disconnecting the battery

Wait 2 minutes after switching off the ignition
before disconnecting the battery.
Close the windows and the doors before
disconnecting the battery.
Following reconnection
of the battery Disconnecting the (+) cable
Following reconnection of the battery, switch on Raise the locking tab D fully to release the
the ignition and wait 1 minute before starting to cable terminal clamp E.
permit initialisation of the electronic systems.
Reconnecting the (+) cable
However, if problems remain following this
operation, contact a CITRON dealer or a Position the open clamp E of the cable on
qualified workshop. the positive post (+) of the battery.
Referring to the corresponding section, you Press vertically on the clamp E to position
Operate the starter on the broken down it correctly on the battery.
must yourself reinitialise (depending on
vehicle and let the engine run Lock the clamp by spreading the
version):
If the engine does not start straight away, positioning lug and then lowering the tab D.
- the remote control key,
switch off the ignition and wait a few
- the electric blind(s),
moments before trying again. Do not apply excessive force on the
- ...
Wait until the engine returns to idle then tab as locking will not be possible if the
disconnect the jump lead cables in the clamp is not positioned correctly; start
reverse order. the procedure again.
296

Charging the battery using The batteries contain harmful substances Protect your eyes and face before
a battery charger such as sulphuric acid and lead. They handling the battery.
must be disposed of in accordance All operations on the battery must be
The Stop & Start battery does not have with regulations and must not, in any carried out in a well ventilated area and
to be disconnected for charging. circumstances, be discarded with household away from naked flames and sources
waste. of sparks, so as to avoid the risk of
Take used remote control batteries and explosion or fire.
Disconnect the battery from the vehicle. vehicle batteries to a special collection point. Do not try to charge a frozen battery;
Follow the instructions for use provided by the battery must first be thawed out to
the manufacturer of the charger. avoid the risk of explosion. If the battery
Connect the battery starting with the has been frozen, before charging have
It is advisable to disconnect the battery
negative terminal (-). it checked by a CITRON dealer or a
if the vehicle is to be left unused for
Check that the terminals and connectors qualified workshop who will check that
more than one month.
are clean. If they are covered with sulphate the internal components have not been
(whitish or greenish deposit), remove them damaged and the casing is not cracked,
and clean them. which could cause a leak of toxic and
corrosive acid.
Do not reverse the polarity and use only
a 12 V charger.
Do not disconnect the terminals while
the engine is running.
7
Do not charge the batteries without
disconnecting the terminals first.
Wash your hands afterwards.
Do not push the vehicle to start the

engine if you have an electronic
gearbox or automatic gearbox.
297

Load reduction mode Energy economy mode

System which manages the use of certain System which manages the duration of use of Exiting economy mode
functions according to the level of charge certain functions to conserve a sufficient level
These functions are reactivated automatically
remaining in the battery. of charge in the battery.
next time the vehicle is driven.
When the vehicle is being driven, the load After the engine has stopped, you can
In order to restore the use of these
reduction function temporarily deactivates still use functions such as the audio and
functions immediately, start the engine and
certain functions, such as the air conditioning, telematics system, windscreen wipers, dipped
let it run:
the heated rear screen... beam headlamps, courtesy lamps, etc. for
- for less than ten minutes, to use the
The deactivated functions are reactivated a maximum combined duration of about
equipment for approximately five
automatically as soon as conditions permit. forty minutes.
minutes,
- for more than ten minutes, to use the
equipment for up to approximately
Switching to economy mode thirty minutes.
A message then appears in the instrument Let the engine run for the duration specified to
panel screen indicating that the vehicle has ensure that the battery charge is sufficient.
switched to economy mode and the active Do not repeatedly and continuously restart the
functions are put on standby. engine in order to charge the battery.
If a telephone call is being made at this time, it A flat battery prevents the engine from starting
will be maintained for around 10 minutes with (refer to the "Battery" section).
the Bluetooth hands-free system of your audio
system.
298

Changing a wiper blade

Before removing a front Fitting
wiper blade Put the corresponding new wiper blade in
Within one minute after switching off place and clip it.
the ignition, operate the wiper stalk to Fold down the wiper arm carefully.
position the wiper blades vertically on the
windscreen,
or
From one minute after switching off the
ignition, reposition the arms manually.
Removing After fitting a front wiper

Raise the corresponding wiper arm. blade
Unclip the wiper blade and remove it. Switch on the ignition.
Operate the wiper stalk again to park the
wiper blades.
Replacement of the arms must be done

7
workshop.
299

Towing the vehicle

Procedure for having your vehicle towed or for towing another vehicle using the towing eye.
Access to the tools
General recommendations
Observe the legislation in force in your country.
Ensure that the weight of the towing vehicle is higher than that of the towed vehicle.
The person at the wheel of the towed vehicle must have a valid driving licence.
When towing a vehicle with all four wheels on the ground, always use an approved towing
bar; rope and straps are prohibited.
When towing a vehicle with the engine off, there is no longer any power assistance for
braking or steering.
In the following cases, you must always call on a professional recovery service:
- vehicle broken down on a motorway or fast road,
The towing eye is installed in the boot under - 4 wheel drive vehicle,
the floor. - when it is not possible to put the gearbox into neutral, unlock the steering, or release the
To gain access to it: parking brake,
open the boot, - towing with only two wheels on the ground,
lift the floor and remove it, - where there is no approved towing bar available...
remove the towing eye from its housing.
300

Towing your vehicle Towing another vehicle
Place the gear lever in neutral

(position N on an electronic or
automatic gearbox).
Failure to observe this instruction
could result in damage to
certain components (braking,
transmission...) and the absence
of braking assistance the next time
the engine is started.
On the front bumper, unclip the cover by Unlock the steering by turning the key On the rear bumper, unclip the cover by
pressing on the left. in the ignition one notch and release the pressing at the bottom.
Screw the towing eye in fully. parking brake. Screw the towing eye in fully.
Install the towing bar. Switch on the hazard warning lamps on
both vehicles.
Move off gently, drive slowly and for a short
distance.
Install the towing bar.
Switch on the hazard warning lamps on
both vehicles.
Move off gently, drive slowly and for a short
7
distance.
301

Towing a trailer
Towbar suitable for the attachment of a

We recommend the use of genuine Driving with a trailer places greater
trailer or installation of a bicycle carrier, with
CITRON towbars and their harnesses demands on the towing vehicle and the
additional lighting and signalling.
that have been tested and approved driver must take particular care.
from the design stage of your vehicle,
and that the fitting of the towbar is
Your vehicle is primarily designed for
entrusted to a CITRON dealer or a
transporting people and luggage, but it may
qualified workshop.
also be used for towing a trailer.
If the towbar is not fitted by a CITRON
dealer, it is imperative that it is
fitted in accordance with the vehicle
manufacturer's instructions.
302

Driving advice
Distribution of loads Cooling Braking
Distribute the load in the trailer so that the Towing a trailer on a slope increases the Towing a trailer increases the braking distance.
heaviest items are as close as possible to temperature of the coolant. To avoid overheating of the brakes on a long
the axle and the nose weight approaches the As the fan is electrically controlled, its cooling mountain type of descent, the use of engine
maximum permitted without exceeding it. capacity is not dependent on the engine speed. braking is recommended.
Air density decreases with altitude, thus To lower the engine speed, reduce your
reducing engine performance. Above speed.
1 000 metres, the maximum towed load must The maximum towed load on a long incline
be reduced by 10 % for every 1 000 metres of depends on the gradient and the ambient
altitude. temperature.
In all cases, keep a check on the coolant Tyres
temperature. Check the tyre pressures of the towing
Refer to the "Technical data" section for details vehicle and of the trailer, observing the
of the weights and towed loads which apply to recommended pressures.
your vehicle.
If the warning lamp and the
STOP warning lamp come on,
Side wind
stop the vehicle and switch off
the engine as soon as possible. Lighting
Check the electrical lighting and signalling
7
on the trailer.
Take into account the increased sensitivity
to side wind.
The rear parking sensors will be

When not towing a trailer, remove the deactivated automatically if a genuine
quickly-detachable tow ball before CITRON towbar is used.
driving.
303

Roof bars
For safety reasons and to avoid damaging the Version without longitudinal Version with longitudinal
roof, it is essential to use transverse roof bars
that are approved for your vehicle.
bars bars
Observe the fitting instructions and the

conditions of use given in the information
provided with the roof bars.
To install the roof bars, you must secure You must fit the transverse bars to the
them only to the four anchorage points in the longitudinal bars at the fixing points indicated
roof frame. These points are masked by the by engraved markings on the longitudinal bars.
vehicle's doors when closed.
The roof bar fixings include a stud that should
be introduced into the aperture at each
anchorage point.
304

Recommendations Maximum load, distributed over the roof

Distribute the load evenly, avoiding bars, for a loading height not exceeding
overloading on one side. 40 cm: 80 kg.
Arrange the heaviest part of the load as This value is subject to change, please
close as possible to the roof. check the maximum load stated in the
Anchor the load securely and fit a warning instructions provided with he roof bars.
flag if part of it overhangs the vehicle. If the height exceeds 40 cm, adapt the
Drive gently, as the vehicle will be more speed of the vehicle to the profile of the
liable to the effects of side winds (vehicle road to avoid damaging the roof bars
stability may be affected). and the fixings on the vehicle.
Remove the roof bars as soon as they are Please refer to national legislation so as
no longer needed. to meet the requirements on carrying
objects that are longer than the vehicle.
When carrying long objects, it is

7
recommended that you deactivate the
motorised operation of the tailgate.
305

Very cold climate screen*

Removable protective screen which prevents the accumulation of snow at the radiator cooling fan.
Fitting Removal
Offer up the very cold climate screen to Use a screwdriver as a lever to release
the front of the lower section of the front each fixing clip in turn.
bumper.
Press around its edge to engage its fixing
clips one by one. Do not forget to remove the very cold climate
screen when:
- the ambient temperature exceeds 10 C,
- towing,
- driving at speeds above 75 mph
(120 km/h).
360 Vision system

The pre-cut zone must be removed
before fitting the screen to the front
bumper, to allow operation of the
camera.
When the very cold climate screen
is fitted, the image provided by the
camera is slightly different.
* According to country.
306

Accessories
A wide range of accessories and genuine parts is available from the CITRON dealer network.
These accessories and parts have been tested and approved for reliability and safety.
They are all adapted to your vehicle and benefit from CITRON's recommendation and warranty.
"Comfort": "Styling": "Protection":

door deflectors, side window blinds, rear screen gear lever knobs, aluminium foot rest, alloy mats*, seat covers compatible with lateral
blind, insulated module, coat hanger fixed to wheels... airbags, mud flaps, door protective mouldings,
head restraint, mobile reading lamp, mirror bumper protection strips, vehicle cover, boot
for caravan, parking sensors, programmable sill protector, door sill protectors, seat and boot
additional heating, smoker's kit, solar film for protective covers for pets...
rear door windows... The rear bodywork has been designed to avoid
spray.
"Transport systems": "Security and safety":

child seats and booster cushions, boot carpet, anti-intrusion alarm, stolen vehicle tracking
boot liner, boot net, boot spacers, transverse system, child seats and booster cushions,
roof bars, ski carrier, roof boxes, towbars, breathalyser, first aid kit, fire extinguisher,
towbar wiring harnesses, bicycle carriers warning triangle, high visibility vest, wheel
for towbar and roof bars, towbars with fixed
and detachable towball, high level load
retaining net, sliding carrier, boot organiser
security bolts, snow chains, non-slip covers,
winter tyres, foglamp kit, security film for front
door windows, load retaining net, pet seat belt...
7
(Grand C4 Picasso)...
If a towbar and wiring harness are fitted
outside the CITRON dealer network, the
installation must be done strictly in line with the
manufacturer's recommendations. * To avoid any risk of jamming the pedals:
If your vehicle has a detachable towball, it is - ensure that mats are correctly positioned
recommended that the ball be removed when and secured,
not towing. - never fit one mat on top of another.
307

"Multimedia": Installation of radio Depending on the legislation in force

Speakers, Hi-Fi module, Bluetooth hands-free communication in the country, it may be compulsory
system, head-up display screen, portable transmitters to have a high visibility safety vest,
satellite navigation system, semi-integral warning triangle, breathalyzers and
Before installing any after-market radio
support bracket for portable navigation system, spare bulbs and fuses available in the
communication transmitter, you can
driving assistance systems, reversing camera, vehicle.
contact a CITRON dealer for the
portable video screen, portable video carrier,
specification of transmitters which can
telephone carrier, two-screen video pack,
be fitted (frequency, maximum power,
portable video player, CD player, solar USB
aerial position, specific installation
charger, 230 V/50 Hz socket, 230 V/12 V
requirements), in line with the Vehicle
adaptor, iPhone/iPad charger, Wi-Fi on board... The fitting of electrical equipment
Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive
or accessories which are not
(2004/104/EC).
recommended by CITRON may result
By visiting a CITRON dealer you can also in a failure of your vehicle's electronic
obtain cleaning and maintenance products system and excessive electrical
(interior and exterior) - including ecological consumption.
products in the "TECHNATURE" range, Please note this precaution. You
products for topping up (screenwash...), paint are advised to contact a CITRON
touch-up pens and aerosols for the exact colour representative to be shown the range
of your vehicle, refills (sealant cartridge for the of recommended equipment and
temporary puncture repair kit...), ... accessories.
308

Checks
TOTAL & CITRON
309

Checks
Bonnet
Before doing anything under the bonnet,
switch off the Stop & Start system to
avoid any risk of injury resulting from an
automatic change to START mode.
Lift the safety catch and raise the bonnet. Unclip the stay from its housing and place it
in the support slot to hold the bonnet open.
Do not open the bonnet under very Closing

windy conditions. Take the stay out of its support slot.
Opening When the engine is hot, handle the Clip the stay back into its housing.
exterior safety catch and the stay with Lower the bonnet and release it at the end
Open the left hand front door. care (risk of burns), using the protected of its travel.
Pull the release lever, located at the bottom area. Pull on the bonnet to check that it has
of the door aperture, towards you. latched correctly.
When the bonnet is open, take care not The cooling fan may start after
to damage the safety catch. switching off the engine: take care
with articles and clothing that might
become caught by the fan blades.
310

Checks
Petrol engines
checking the levels of the various fluids and for
replacing certain components.
1. Screenwash and headlamp wash reservoir.

2. Coolant reservoir.
3. Brake fluid reservoir.
4. Battery / Fuses.
5. Fusebox.
6. Air filter.
7. Engine oil dipstick.
8. Engine oil filler cap.
311

Checks
Diesel engines
The various caps and covers allow access for
checking the levels of the various fluids, for
replacing certain components and for priming
the fuel system.
1. Screenwash and headlamp wash reservoir.

2. Coolant reservoir.
3. Brake fluid reservoir.
4. Battery / Fuses.
5. Fusebox.
6. Air filter.
7. Engine oil dipstick.
8. Engine oil filler cap.
9. Priming pump*.
* According to engine.
312

Checks
Fuel
Capacity of the tank: approximately 57 litres (petrol) or 55 litres (Diesel).
Low fuel level Refuelling

When the low fuel level is reached,
this warning lamp in the instrument
panel comes on, accompanied by an
audible warning, a message and the
last bar of the fuel gauge comes on
in orange.
When it first comes on, about 6 litres of fuel
remain in the tank.
Until sufficient fuel has been added, this warning
lamp appears every time the ignition is switched
on, accompanied by an audible warning and a
message. This audible warning and message A label on the inside of the fuel filler flap Take care to select the pump that delivers
are repeated with increasing frequency as the reminds you of the type of fuel to use, the correct type of fuel for your vehicle.
fuel level drops towards "0". depending on your engine type. Introduce the nozzle so as to push in the
Refuel as soon as possible to avoid running out. Additions of fuel must be of at least 5 litres to metal non-return flap A.
be registered by the fuel gauge. Make sure that the nozzle is pushed in as
far as possible before starting to refuel (risk
of blowback).
Opening the filler flap may result in an inrush of
air. This is entirely normal and results from the
sealing of the fuel system.
Maintain this position throughout the
refuelling operation.
Push the fuel flap to close it.
If you are filling your tank to the top, do
8
With Stop & Start, never refuel with the not persist after the 3rd cut-off; this could
system in STOP mode; you must switch Press the rear edge of the flap to open it
(the filler cap is part of it). cause malfunctions.
off the ignition with the START/STOP
button.
313

Checks
Fuel cut-off
Your vehicle is equipped with a safety device
The petrol or Diesel engine of your vehicle is which cuts off the fuel supply in the event of a
fitted with a catalytic converter, a device which collision.
helps to reduce the level of harmful emissions
in the exhaust gases.
For petrol engines, you must use unleaded
fuel.
The filler neck is narrower, allowing only
unleaded petrol nozzles to be introduced.
If you have put in the wrong fuel

for your vehicle, you must have the
fuel tank drained and filled with
the correct fuel before starting the
engine.
314

Checks
Misfuel prevention (Diesel)*

Mechanical device which prevents filling the tank of a Diesel vehicle with petrol. It avoids the risk of engine damage that can result from filling with the
wrong fuel.
Operation It remains possible to use a fuel can to Travelling abroad

When a petrol filler nozzle is introduced into the fill the tank.
As Diesel fuel pump nozzles may
fuel filler neck of your Diesel vehicle, it comes In order to ensure a good flow of fuel,
be different in other countries, the
into contact with the flap. The system remains do not place the nozzle of the fuel can
presence of the misfuel prevention
closed and prevents filling. in direct contact with the flap of the
device may make refuelling impossible.
Do not persist but introduce a Diesel type misfuel prevention device and pour
Before travelling abroad, we
filler nozzle. slowly.
recommend that you check with the
CITRON dealer network, whether your
vehicle is suitable for the fuel pumps in
the country in which you want to travel.
8
* Depending on country of sale.
315

Checks
Quality of the fuel used for Quality of the fuel used for
petrol engines Diesel engines
The petrol engines are perfectly compatible The Diesel engines are perfectly compatible
with E10 or E24 type petrol biofuels (containing with biofuels which conform to current and
10 % or 24 % ethanol), conforming to European future European standards (Diesel fuel which
standards EN 228 and EN 15376. complies with standard EN 590 mixed with a
E85 type fuels (containing up to 85 % ethanol) biofuel which complies with standard EN 14214)
are reserved exclusively for vehicles marketed available at the pumps (containing up to 7 %
for the use of this type of fuel (BioFlex Fatty Acid Methyl Ester).
vehicles). The quality of the ethanol must The B30 biofuel can be used in certain Diesel
comply with European standard EN 15293. engines; however, this use is subject to strict
application of the special servicing conditions.
workshop.
The use of any other type of (bio)fuel
(vegetable or animal oils, pure or diluted,
domestic fuel...) is strictly prohibited (risk of
damage to the engine and fuel system).
316

Checks
Running out of fuel (Diesel)

1.6 litre HDi engine
Fill the fuel tank with at least five litres of
diesel.
Open the bonnet.
If necessary, unclip the styling cover for
access to the priming pump.
On vehicle fitted with HDi engines, the fuel Squeeze and release the priming pump
system must be primed if you run out of fuel; repeatedly until resistance is felt (there may
refer to the corresponding engine compartment be resistance at the first press).
view. Operate the starter until the engine starts
(if the engine does not start at the first
attempt, wait around 15 seconds before
trying again).
If the engine does not start after a few
If the tank on your vehicle is fitted with attempts, operate the priming pump again
a misfuel prevention device, refer to the then start the engine.
"Misfuel prevention (Diesel)" section. Clip the styling cover back in place.
Close the bonnet.
If the engine does not start first time,

don't keep trying but start the procedure
again from the beginning.
8
317

Checks
Checking levels
Check all of these levels regularly, in line with the maintenance and warranty guide. Top them up if necessary, unless otherwise indicated.
If a level drops significantly, have the corresponding system checked by a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop.
Take care when working under the bonnet, as certain areas of the engine may be extremely
hot (risk of burns) and the cooling fan could start at any time (even with the ignition off).
Oil level
The check is carried out either when Engine oil change Dipstick
the ignition is switched on using the
Refer to the maintenance and warranty guide There are two marks on the dipstick:
oil level indicator in the instrument
for details of the interval for this operation.
panel, or using the dipstick. A = maximum
In order to maintain the reliability of the engine
It will only be correct if the vehicle is on level If you fill past this mark,
and emission control system, the use of
ground and the engine has been off for more contact a CITRON dealer
additives in the engine oil is prohibited.
than 30 minutes. or a qualified workshop.
It is normal to top up the oil level between B = minimum
two services (or oil changes). CITRON Top up the level through the
recommends that you check the level, and top oil filler orifice, using the
up if necessary, every 3 000 miles (5 000 kms). Oil specification correct grade of oil for your
After topping up the oil, the check when The oil must be the correct grade for your engine. The level must never
switching on the ignition with the oil level engine and conform to the manufacturer's be below this mark.
indicator in the instrument panel is not valid recommendations.
during the 30 minutes after topping up.
318

Checks
Brake fluid level
The brake fluid level should be close The coolant level should be close Fluid specification
to the "MAX" mark. If it is not, check to the "MAX" mark but should never
The coolant must conform to the
the brake pad wear. exceed it.
manufacturer's recommendations.
When the engine is warm, the temperature of
the coolant is regulated by the fan.
Changing the fluid
Refer to the maintenance and warranty guide
for details of the interval for this operation. The cooling fan may start after switching
off the engine: take care with articles and
clothing that might become caught by the
fan blades.
Fluid specification
The brake fluid must conform to the In addition, as the cooling system is pressurised,
manufacturer's recommendations and meet the wait at least one hour after switching off the
DOT3 or DOT4 standard. engine before carrying out any work.
To avoid any risk of scalding, unscrew the cap
by two turns to allow the pressure to drop. When
the pressure has dropped, remove the cap and
top up the level. 8
319

Checks
Screenwash/headlamp Diesel fuel additive level Used products

wash level low (Diesel with particle
emissions filter)
fluids with the skin.
In the case of vehicles fitted with The additive reservoir low level is Most of these fluids are harmful to
headlamp washers, when the fluid indicated by fixed illumination of this health or indeed very corrosive.
reservoir low level is reached this warning lamp, accompanied by an
warning lamp comes on in the audible signal and a message that
instrument panel, accompanied by the particle emissions filter additive
an audible signal and a message. level is too low.
Do not discard used oil or fluids into
The warning lamp comes on when the ignition sewers or onto the ground.
is switched on, or every time the stalk is Topping up Take used oil to a CITRON dealer or
operated, until the reservoir is refilled. a qualified workshop (France) or to an
The reservoir must be topped up without delay
Next time you stop, refill the screenwash / authorised waste disposal site.
by a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop.
headlamp wash reservoir.
320

Checks
Checks
Unless otherwise indicated, check these components in accordance with the maintenance and warranty guide and according to your engine.
Otherwise, have them checked by a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop.
12 V battery Air filter and passenger compartment filter Particle emissions filter (Diesel)
The battery does not require any maintenance. Refer to the maintenance and The start of saturation of the
However, check that the terminals are clean warranty guide for details of the particle filter is indicated by the
and correctly tightened, particularly in summer replacement intervals for these fixed illumination of this warning
and winter. components. lamp accompanied by a warning
When carrying out work on the battery, refer Depending on the environment (e.g. dusty message.
to the "12 V battery" section for details of the atmosphere) and the use of the vehicle
(e.g. city driving), replace them twice As soon as the traffic conditions permit,
precautions to be taken before disconnecting regenerate the filter by driving at a
the battery and following its reconnection. as often if necessary. y
A clogged passenger compartment filter may speed of at least 40 mph (60 km/h) until
have an adverse effect on the performance the warning lamp goes off.
of the air conditioning system and generate If the warning lamp stays on, this
undesirable odours. indicates a low additive level.
On a new vehicle, the first particle

filter regeneration operations may be
The presence of this label, in particular with Oil filter accompanied by a "burning" smell,
the Stop & Start system, indicates the use of
Replace the oil filter each time the which is perfectly normal.
a specific 12 V lead-acid battery with special
engine oil is changed. Following prolonged operation of the
technology and specification. The involvement
of a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop is
essential when replacing or disconnecting the
battery.
Refer to the maintenance and
warranty guide for details of the
replacement interval for this
vehicle at very low speed or at idle,
you may, in exceptional circumstances,
notice the emission of water vapour at
8
component. the exhaust on acceleration. This does
not affect the behaviour of the vehicle or
the environment.
321

Checks
Manual gearbox Brake pads Electric parking brake

The gearbox does not require any
maintenance (no oil change). Brake wear depends on the style
This system does not require any
Refer to the maintenance and of driving, particularly in the case
routine servicing. However, in the
warranty guide for the details of of vehicles used in town, over short
event of a problem, have the system
the level checking interval for this distances. It may be necessary to
checked by a CITRON dealer or a
component. have the condition of the brakes checked, even
qualified workshop.
between vehicle services.
Unless there is a leak in the circuit, a drop in For more information, refer to the "Electric
6-speed electronic gearbox the brake fluid level indicates that the brake parking brake - Operating faults" section.
pads are worn.
The gearbox does not require any

maintenance (no oil change).
Refer to the maintenance and Brake disc wear Only use products recommended by
warranty guide for details of the CITRON or products of equivalent
checking interval for this component. quality and specification.
For information on checking brake
disc wear, contact a CITRON dealer In order to optimise the operation of
or a qualified workshop. units as important as those in the
Automatic gearbox braking system, CITRON selects and
offers very specific products.
After washing the vehicle, dampness,
The gearbox does not require any or in wintry conditions, ice can form
maintenance (no oil change). on the brake discs and pads: braking
To avoid damaging the electrical units,
Refer to the maintenance and efficiency may be reduced. Make light
the use of a high pressure washer
warranty guide for details of the level brake applications to dry and defrost
in the engine compartment is strictly
checking interval for this component. the brakes.
prohibited.
322

Technical data
Petrol engines and gearboxes

Petrol engines VTi 120 THP 155
Manual Manual
Gearboxes
(5-speed) (6-speed)
Model codes:
5FS0/1 5FV8 - 8/1
3D... 3E... 3A...
Cubic capacity (cc) 1 598 1 598
Bore x stroke (mm) 77 x 85.8 77 x 85.8
Max power*: EU standard (kW) 88 115
Max power engine speed (rpm) 6 000 6 000
Max torque: EU standard (Nm) 160 240
Max torque engine speed (rpm) 4 250 1 400
Fuel Unleaded Unleaded
Catalytic converter yes yes
Oil capacities (in litres)
Engine (with filter replacement) 4.25 4.25
3D...: CITRON C4 Picasso (5-seat). 3E...: CITRON Grand C4 Picasso (5-seat). 3A...: CITRON Grand C4 Picasso (7-seat).
9
* The maximum power corresponds to the value type-approved on a test bed, under conditions defined in European legislation (Directive 1999/99/EC).
323

Technical data
Petrol weights and towed loads (in kg)

Petrol engines VTi 120 THP 155
Manual Manual
Gearboxes
(5-speed) (6-speed)
3D... 3E... 3A... 3D... 3E... 3A...
Model codes:
5FS0/1 5FV8 - 8/1
- Unladen weight 1 252 - 1 276 - 1 278 1 296 - 1 311 - 1 313
- Kerb weight* 1 327 - 1 351 - 1 353 1 371 - 1 386 - 1 388
- Gross vehicle weight (GVW) 1 900 - 2 060 - 2 110 1 940 - 2 100 - 2 150
- Gross train weight (GTW)

2 900 - 2 860 - 2 860 3 360 - 3 350 - 3 350
on a 12 % gradient
- Braked trailer (within GTW limit)
1 000 - 800 - 750 1 420 - 1 250 - 1 200
on a 10 % or 12 % gradient
- Braked trailer** (with load transfer within the
1 200 - 1 100 - 1 050 1 620 - 1 550 - 1 500
GTW limit)
- Unbraked trailer 660 - 675 - 675 685 - 690 - 690
- Recommended nose weight 70 - 70 - 70 70 - 70 - 70
* The kerb weight is equal to the unladen weight + driver (75 kg).
** The weight of the braked trailer can be increased, within the GTW limit, if the GVW of the towing vehicle is reduced by an equal amount; warning,
towing using a lightly loaded towing vehicle may have an adverse effect on its road holding.
The GTW and towed load values indicated are valid up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned must be reduced by 10 % for
each additional 1 000 metres of altitude.
The speed of a towing vehicle must not exceed 60 mph (100 km/h) (comply with the legislation in force in your country).
High ambient temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle to protect the engine; if the ambient temperature is above 37 C,
limit the towed load.
324

Technical data
Diesel engines and gearboxes

e-HDi 90
Diesel engines HDi 90
Airdream
Manual Electronic gearbox system

Gearboxes
(5-speed) (6-speed)
Model codes:
9HP0/1 9HP8/2PS
3D... 3E... 3A...
Cubic capacity (cc) 1 560
Bore x stroke (mm) 75 x 88.3
Max power*: EU standard (kW) 68
Max power engine speed (rpm) 4 000
Max torque: EU standard (Nm) 230
Max torque engine speed (rpm) 1 750
Fuel Diesel
Catalytic converter yes
Particle emission filter yes
Engine (with filter replacement) 3.75
.../S: e-HDi model fitted with Stop & Start.

3D...: CITRON C4 Picasso (5-seat).
3E...: CITRON Grand C4 Picasso (5-seat).
3A...: CITRON Grand C4 Picasso (7-seat).
9
325

Technical data

e-HDi 115
Airdream
Manual Manual Electronic gearbox system

Gearboxes
(6-speed) (6-speed) (6-speed)
Model codes:
9HC8/1 9HC8/1S 9HC8/1PS - 8/2PS
3D... 3E... 3A...
Cubic capacity (cc) 1 560 1 560
Bore x stroke (mm) 75 x 88.3 75 x 88.3
Max power*: EU standard (kW) 85 85
Max power engine speed (rpm) 3 600 3 600
Max torque: EU standard (Nm) 270 270 - 285
Max torque engine speed (rpm) 1 750 1 750
Fuel Diesel Diesel
Catalytic converter yes yes
Particle emission filter no yes
Engine (with filter replacement) 3.75 3.75
.../S: e-HDi model fitted with Stop & Start. 3E...: CITRON Grand C4 Picasso (5-seat).
3D...: CITRON C4 Picasso (5-seat). 3A...: CITRON Grand C4 Picasso (7-seat).
326

Technical data

e-HDi 150
Diesel engines
Airdream
Manual Automatic
Gearboxes
(6-speed) (6-speed)
Model codes:
AHXM/S - M/1S AHXT/S - T/1S
3D... 3E... 3A...
Cubic capacity (cc) 1 997
Bore x stroke (mm) 85 x 88
Max power*: EU standard (kW) 110
Max power engine speed (rpm) 3 750
Max torque: EU standard (Nm) 370
Max torque engine speed (rpm) 1 750
Fuel Diesel
Catalytic converter yes
Particle emission filter yes
Engine (with filter replacement) 6.1
.../S: e-HDi model fitted with Stop & Start.

3D...: CITRON C4 Picasso (5-seat).
3E...: CITRON Grand C4 Picasso (5-seat).
3A...: CITRON Grand C4 Picasso (7-seat).
9
327

Technical data
Diesel weights and towed loads (in kg)

e-HDi 90
Airdream
Gearboxes
(5-speed) (6-speed)
3D 3D... 3E... 3A
Model codes:
9HP0/1 9HP8/2PS
- Unladen weight 1 279 1 289 - 1 314 - 1 316
- Kerb weight* 1 354 1 364 - 1 389 - 1 391
- Gross vehicle weight (GVW) 1 920 1 940 - 2 110 - 2 160

3 170 3 140 - 3 160 - 3 160
on a 12% gradient
1 250 1 200 - 1 050 - 1 000
on a 10% or 12% gradient
- Braked trailer** (with load transfer with the
1 450 1 400 - 1 350 - 1 300
GTW limit)
- Unbraked trailer 675 680 - 690 - 695
- Recommended nose weight 70 70 - 70 - 70
328

Technical data

e-HDi 115
Airdream
Manual Manual Electronic gearbox system
Gearboxes
(6-speed) (6-speed) (6-speed)
3D... 3E... 3A... 3D... 3E... 3A... 3D... 3E... 3A...
Model codes:
9HC8/1 9HC8/1S 9HC8/1PS - 8/2PS
- Unladen weight 1 298 - 1 318 - 1 320 1 298 - 1 318 - 1 320 1 295 - 1 318 - 1 320
- Kerb weight* 1 373 - 1 393 - 1 395 1 373 - 1 393 - 1 395 1 370 - 1 393 - 1 395
- Gross vehicle weight (GVW) 1 940 - 2 110 - 2 150 1 940 - 2 110 - 2 150 1 940 - 2 110 - 2 150

2 740 - 2 910 - 2 950 3 340 - 3 350 - 3 350 3 340 - 3 350 - 3 350
on a 12% gradient
800 - 800 - 800 1 400 - 1 240 - 1 200 1 400 - 1 240 - 1 200
800 - 800 - 800 1 600 - 1 540 - 1 500 1 600 - 1 540 - 1 500
GTW limit)
- Unbraked trailer 685 - 695 - 695 685 - 695 - 695 685 - 695 - 695
- Recommended nose weight 70 - 70 - 70 70 - 70 - 70 70 - 70 - 70
limit the towed load. 9
329

Technical data

e-HDi 150
Diesel engines
Airdream
Gearboxes
(6-speed) (6-speed)
3D... 3E... 3A... 3E... 3A ...
Model codes:
AHXM/S - M/1S AHXT/S - T/1S
- Unladen weight 1 415 - 1 428 - 1 430 1 474 - 1 476
- Kerb weight* 1 490 - 1 503 - 1 505 1 549 - 1 551
- Gross vehicle weight (GVW) 2 030 - 2 200 - 2 250 2 200 - 2 280

3 530 - 3 560 - 3 650 3 580 - 3 580
on a 12% gradient
1 500 - 1 450 - 1 400 1 380 - 1 300
1 700 - 1 750 - 1 700 1 680 - 1 600
GTW limit)
- Unbraked trailer 745 - 750 - 750 750 - 750
- Recommended nose weight 70 - 70 - 70 70 - 70
330

Technical data
Dimensions (in mm)

These dimensions have been measured on a vehicle that is not loaded.
9
* Mirrors folded.
331

Technical data
Dimensions (in mm)

These dimensions have been measured on an unladen vehicle.
* Mirrors folded.
332

Technical data
Identification markings
Various visible markings for the identification of your vehicle.
D. Tyre/paint label.
This label, affixed to the centre pillar, on
the driver's side, contains the following
information.
- the tyre inflation pressures with and
without load,
- the tyre sizes (including the tyre load
index and speed rating),
- the inflation pressure for the spare
wheel,
- the paint colour code.
A. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) C. Manufacturer's label.

The tyre pressures must be checked
under the bonnet. This self-destroying label affixed to
when the tyres are cold, at least once
This number is engraved on the chassis the centre pillar, right or left hand side,
a month.
near the right hand front wheel arch. contains the following information.
- the manufacturer's name,
- the European whole vehicle type approval number,
- the vehicle identification number (VIN),
B. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) on
- the maximum authorised weight (gross vehicle
the windscreen lower cross member.
This number is indicated on a self-
adhesive label which is visible through the
weight),
- the maximum authorised weight with trailer (gross
train weight),
If the tyre pressures are too low, this
increases fuel consumption. 9
windscreen.
- the maximum front axle weight,
- the maximum rear axle weight.
333

Technical data
334

EMERGENCY OR ASSISTANCE CALL
335

EMERGENCY OR ASSISTANCE CALL
CITRON Localised Emergency Call CITRON Localised Assistance Call
In an emergency, press this button for more than Press this button for more than 2 seconds to request
2 seconds. Flashing of the green LED and a voice assistance if the vehicle breaks down.
messageg confirm that the call has been made to the A voice message confirms that the call has been made*.
"CITRON Localised Emergency Call" service*.
Pressing this button again immediately cancels the request.
Pressing this button again immediately cancels the request. The green The cancellation is confirmed by a voice message.
LED goes off.
Operation of the system

The green LED remains on (without flashing) when communication is
established. It goes off at the end of communication.
When the ignition is switched on, the green
This call is dealt with by the "CITRON Localised Emergency Call" LED comes on for 3 seconds indicating
centre which receives locating information from the vehicle and can that the system is operating correctly.
send a detailed alert to the appropriate emergency services. In countries
in which the team is not operational, or when the locating service has If the orange LED flashes: there is a
been expressly declined, the call is dealt with directly by the emergency system fault.
services (112) without the vehicle location. If the orange LED is on continuously: the
backup battery must be replaced.
In either case, contact a CITRON dealer.
If an impact is detected by the airbag control unit, and
independently of the deployment of any airbags, an emergency call
is made automatically. If you purchased your vehicle outside the CITRON dealer network,
we invite you to have a dealer check the configuration of these services
and, if desired, modified to suit your wishes. In a multi-lingual country,
If yyou benefit from the CITRON eTouch offer,, yyou also have available configuration is possible in the official national language of your choice.
additional services in your MyCITRON personal space, via the CITRON
Internet website in your country, accessible on www.citroen.com.
For technical reasons, particularly to improve the quality of Telematic
* These services are subject to conditions and availability. services to customers, the manufacturer reserves the right to carry out
Consult a CITRON dealer. updates to the vehicle's on-board telematic system.
336

Touch screen tablet
SATELLITE NAVIGATION SYSTEM
MULTIMEDIA AUDIO SYSTEM
BLUETOOTH TELEPHONE
CONTENTS
01 General operation p. 8
operate in your vehicle.
02 First steps - Control panel p. 340
03 Steering mounted controls p. 341
04 Media p. 342
05 Navigation p. 358
06 Configuration p. 378
For safety reasons, the driver must carry out operations
which require prolonged attention while the vehicle is 07 Connected services p. 388
stationary.
When the engine is switched off and to prevent 08 Telephone p. 390
discharging of the battery, the system switches off
following the activation of the energy economy mode.
Frequently asked questions p. 400
337

01 GENERAL OPERATION
"Air conditioning"
allows control of the
settings for temperature, "Configuration"
air flow. allows settings for
sound, the colour
scheme.
"Driving assistance"
allows certain vehicle
functions to be activated, "Connected services"
deactivated and settings
adjusted. allows connection to
an applications portal
to facilitate, make
safe and personalise
journeys by means of a
connection key available
p
on subscription from a
"Media" CITRON dealer.
allows selection of a
radio station, MP3 music,
display of photographs.
"Telephone"
allows the connection
of a mobile telephone
"Navigation" via Bluetooth so as to
allows settings for be able to make calls
navigation and the safely.
choice of a destination
(depending on version).
338

01 GENERAL OPERATION
Use the buttons on either side of the touch screen tablet for access to the menus, then press the
virtual buttons on the touch screen tablet.
Each menu is displayed on one or two pages (primary page and secondary page).
An example of using the touch screen tablet:
These screens are the representation of a colour scheme.

To change the colour scheme refer to the "CONFIGURATION" section.
In very hot conditions, the system may go into stand-by (screen and sound completely off) for a minimum period of 5 minutes.
339

02 FIRST STEPS
Volume adjustment (each source is
independent, including Traffic announcements
(TA) and navigation instructions).
Following prolonged operation in

sunny conditions, the volume may
be limited to protect the system. The
return to normal takes place when
the temperature in the passenger
compartment drops.
Selecting the audio source (depending on version):

- "FM" / "AM" / "DAB"* radio wavebands.
- "USB" memory stick.
- CD player (located in the glove box)*.
- Jukebox*, after first copying audio files to the internal memory of the touch screen tablet.
- Telephone connected by Bluetooth and Bluetooth audio streaming.
- Media player connected to the auxiliary socket (jack, cable not supplied).
The screen is of the "resistive" type, it is necessary to press firmly, particularly for "flick" gestures (scrolling through a list, moving the map...).
A simple wipe will not be enough. pressing with more than one finger is not recognised.
The screen can be used when wearing gloves. This technology allows use at all temperatures.
To clean the screen, use a soft non-abrasive cloth (spectacles cloth) without any additional product.
Do not use pointed objects on the screen.
Do not touch the screen with wet hands.
340

03 STEERING MOUNTED CONTROLS
- Mute. - Short press:

Change the multimedia source.
- Volume increase / decrease. Accept an incoming call.
- Radio: display the list of stations. Call in progress: access to the telephone menu (End call,
Secret mode, Hands-free mode).
Media: display the list of tracks.
- Long press:
- Rotation Reject an incoming call.
Radio: automatic selection of next / previous frequency. End a call in progress.
Media: previous / next track. Other than call in progress: access to the telephone
menu (Dial, Contacts, Call log, Answerphone).
- Press then rotation: access to preset stations.
- Rotation.
- Change the audio source. Radio: automatic search for previous / next station.
Media: previous / next track.
- Move in the menus. - Press: confirmation.
Zoom the map in and out
Press: confirmation, choice of source accepted
- Short press:
- TEL button: Radio: display the list of stations.
Access to the telephone menu: Media: display the list of tracks.
Call list / Contacts / Hands-free mode / Answer / - Long press: update the list of stations received.
Hang up.
Accept an incoming call - Increase volume.
Long press: reject an incoming call or end the current call. - Decrease volume.
341

04 MEDIA
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
"Media" List of FM stations

Primary page
Recalling preset stations
342

Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Comments
List of FM stations Press on a radio station to select it.

Media
List
Confirm Save the settings.
FM Radio
DAB Radio
AM Radio
Jukebox
Media CD
Select change of source
Source USB
iPod
Bluetooth
AUX
Video
Media
Recall of preset
Press on a radio station to select it.
stations
Memo
343

04 MEDIA
"Media" List of FM stations
Secondary page
Photos
Media
Copy to Jukebox Manage Jukebox
344

Preset Press a radio station to select it.
Media
Update list Update the list of stations received.
Secondary page
Frequency Enter the desired radio frequency.
Radio list
Page selection Display the selected photo full screen.
Rotate Rotate the photo 90.
Media Select all the photos in the list.

Select all
Press again to deselect.
Secondary page Previous photo.
Slideshow Pause / Play. Display the photos in sequence, full screen.

Photos
Next photo.
Sort by folder
Sort by album Choose the selection mode.
Media Select all

Create folder
Secondary page
Rename
Choose the handling mode.
Magnifying glass Delete
Manage Jukebox
Select all
Confirm Save the options.
Copy Save the settings
345

04 MEDIA
"Media"
Secondary page
Media
Radio settings
Media options
t
Radio settings
346

Media
Secondary page Presentation of the last media used.
Media list
Random (all tracks):
Media
Random (current album): Choose the play settings.
Media options
Loop:
Aux. amplification
Media RDS options
Radio DAB/FM options

Secondary page Activate or deactivate the options.
Display Radio Text
Radio settings
Media options DAB radio thumbnails
Traffic announcements (TA)

Announcements
Weather
Activate or deactivate the options.
Varied - Sport
Radio settings
Alert settings

347

04 RADIO
Selecting a station
Press on Media to display the primary page.

or Press Media to display the primary
Press on Media to display the primary page page then select "Memo".
then go to the secondary page.
OR
Select "List" in the primary page.

or Select a preset radio station in the list.
Select "Radio list" in the secondary page.
Select a radio station from the list offered. If necessary, select change of source.
Select "Update list" to refresh the list. Select "FM Radio" or "AM Radio".
The exterior environment (hills, buildings, tunnel, car park, below ground...) may prevent reception, even in RDS station tracking mode.
This phenomenon is normal in the propagation of radio waves and is in no way indicative of a fault with the audio system.
348

04 RADIO
Changing a radio frequency
Press on Media to display the primary Press on Media to display the primary
page. page then press on the secondary
page.
OR
By automatic frequency
search Press on "Enter frequency" to display
Press or to move the cursor the primary page then press on the
for an automatic search down or up secondary page.
for a radio frequency.
THEN
Enter the frequency in full (e.g.:

Select change source. 92.10 MHz) using the keypad then
"Confirm".
OR
By alphabetical list
Select "FM Radio" or "AM Radio". Press the current radio band then
choose the radio station from the list
offered.
349

04 RADIO
Preset a station Activate/ Deactivate RDS
Select a radio station or frequency

(refer to the corresponding section). Press on Media to display the primary page
then go to the secondary page.
Press on "Preset".
Select "Settings".
Select a number in the list to preset the

previously chosen radio station.
A long press on a number presets (memorises) Select "Radio".
the station.
Or
A press on this button presets all of the stations
one after the other.
Activate/deactivate "RDS options".
Recall pre-set stations RDS, if activated, allows you to continue listening to the same
station by automatic retuning to alternative frequencies. However, in
certain conditions, coverage of an RDS station may not be assured
Press on Media to display the primary page throughout the entire country as radio stations do not cover 100 % of
then select "Memo". the territory. This explains the loss of reception of the station during
a journey.
350

04 RADIO
DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) - Digital radio
Digital radio provides higher quality reception and also the graphical display of current information on the radio station, by selecting "Video
mode" in "Radio settings".
The range of all stations available is displayed in alphabetical order.
Automatic DAB-FM station tracking allows you to continue

Press on Media to display the primary page. listening to the same station, by temporarily switching to the
equivalent analogue station until the digital signal is stable again.
Press on Media to display the primary page

Select change of source. then go to the secondary page.
Select "DAB Radio". Select "Settings".
Select "List" in the primary page.

or Select "RADIO".
Select "Radio list" in the secondary page.
Select "Digital/FM station tracking" then

Select the radio station from the list offered. "Confirm".
351

04 MUSIC
CD, MP3 CD, USB player, auxiliary input
Selection of source
Insert the CD in the player, insert the USB
memory stick in the USB player or connect the
USB peripheral to the USB port using a suitable
cable (not supplied) Press on Media to display the primary page.
The system builds playlists (in temporary
memory), an operation which can take from
a few seconds to several minutes at the first Select change of source then choose the
connection. source.
Reduce the number of non-music files and the
number of folders to reduce the waiting time.
The playlists are updated every time the ignition
is switched off or connection of a USB memory
stick. However, the system memorises these
lists and if they are not modified, the loading
time will be shorter.
The steering mounted SRC (source) button can be used to go to the

next media source, available if the source is active.
"CD / CD MP3"
"Radio" "USB, iPod"
"Auxiliary" "Bluetooth (streaming)"
352

04 MUSIC
CD, MP3 CD / USB player
Information and advice
The audio equipment will only play audio files with ".wma, .aac,
.flac, .ogg and .mp3" file extensions and with a bit rate of between The system supports USB mass storage devices, BlackBerry
32 Kbps and 320 Kbps. devices or Apple players via the right hand USB port. The adaptor
It also supports VBR (Variable Bit Rate) mode. cable is not supplied.
No other type of file (.mp4, ...) can be played. Control of the peripheral device is with the audio system controls.
WMA files must be of the standard wma 9 type. Other peripherals, not recognised on connection, must be connected
to the auxiliary socket using a Jack cable (not supplied).
The sampling rates supported are 11, 22, 44 and 48 KHz.
In order to be read, a USB memory stick must be formatted

It is advisable to restrict file names to 20 characters, without using of FAT 16 or 32.
special characters (e.g.: " " ? ; ) to avoid any playing and displaying
problems.
The system does not support two identical devices connected at the
same time (two memory sticks, two Apple players) but it is possible to
In order to be able to play a recorded CDR or CDRW, when connect one memory stick and one Apple player at the same time.
recording it is preferable to select the ISO 9660 level 1, 2 or Joliet
standard.
If the disc is recorded in another format it may not be played
correctly. It is recommended that official Apple USB cables are used to
It is recommended that the same recording standard is always used ensure correct operation.
for an individual disc, with as low a speed as possible (4x maximum)
for optimum sound quality.
In the particular case of a multi-session CD, the Joliet standard is
recommended.
353

04 MUSIC
Selecting a track to play
Previous track. / List of USB or CD tracks and folders.
Next track. / Up or down in the list.
Previous folder. Confirm, next menu level.
Next folder. Up one menu level.
Pause.
354

04 MUSIC
Connecting APPLE players Audio streaming
For issues related to the power consumption

of devices, connect the Apple player to the
right hand USB port using a suitable cable Streaming allows audio files on your telephone to be played via the
(not supplied). vehicle's speakers.
Play starts automatically.
Control is via the audio system.

Connect the telephone : see the "Telephone" section, then
"Bluetooth".
The classifications available are those of the portable device Choose the "Audio" or "All" profile.
connected (artists / albums / genres / playlists / audiobooks /
podcasts).
The default classification used is by artist. To modify the
classification used, return to the first level of the menu then select
the desired classification (playlists for example) and confirm to go
down through the menu to the desired track. If play does not start automatically, it may be necessary to start the
audio playback from the telephone.
Control is from the peripheral device or by using the audio system
buttons.
Copies of photos and album artwork are not compatible with the
audio system. These appear only with a USB memory stick.
Once connected in streaming mode, the telephone is considered to

The version of software in the audio system may not be compatible be a media source.
with the generation of your Apple player. It is recommended that you activate "Repeat" on the Bluetooth
The list of devices compatible
p with software versions is available peripheral.
from CITRON dealers.
355

04 MUSIC
Using the auxiliary input (AUX)
(cable not supplied)
Connect the portable device (MP3 player) to the auxiliary JACK

socket using an audio cable. Select Media to display the primary page.
Select change the source.
Select the AUXILIARY

Y source.
First adjust the volume of your portable device (to a high level). Then
adjust the volume of your audio system.
Display and management of the controls are via the portable device.
356

04 MUSIC
Managing the Jukebox
Connect the device (MP3 player...) to the USB port or auxiliary Select the magnifying glass to enter the folder
socket using a suitable audio cable. or album and select audio file by audio file.
When no audio file is copied to the system with a capacity of 8GB, Select "Confirm" then "Copy".
all of the Jukebox function symbols are greyed and are not available.
Select "Media list". Select "New folder" r to create a folder structure

in the Jukebox or select "Keep structure" to
retain the structure from the device.
Select copy "Copy Jukebox".
While copying the system returns to the primary

page; you can go back to the copy view at any
time by selecting this button.
Select "Sort by folder"
r or "Sort by album".
357

05 NAVIGATION
"Navigation"
Primary page
Navigation Route settings
358

Recent destinations Display recent destinations
Fastest
Shortest
Time/distance
Choose the navigation criteria.
Ecological The map displays the route chosen according to
these criteria.
Calculatory criteria Tolls
Ferries
Navigation
Strict - Close
Settings Show route on map Display the map and start navigation.
Navigation Confirm Save the options.
Save current location Save the current address.
Stop navigation Delete the navigation information.
Choose the volume for voice and announcement of

Voice synthesis
street names.
Diversion Detour from your initial route by a certain distance.
Zoom in.
Zoom out.
Navigation
Use the arrows to move the map.
Calculatory criteria
Map
Add a waypoint.
Switch to 2D map.
359

05 NAVIGATION
"Navigation" Enter destination Enter address
For managing contacts and

Secondary page their addresses, refer to the
"Communications" section.
Contacts
Navigation Search for a point of interestt To use the telephone functions,

refer to the "Communications"
section.
Search for a point of interestt
Point of interest displayed on the map
360

Curr. location
Points of Interest Address settings
Town centre
Enter address
Save Save the current address.
Add waypoint Add a waypoint to the route.
Navigate to Press to calculate the route.
Navigation
Addresses
Secondary page Add contact

Contacts Add waypoint Select a contact then calculate the route.
Enter destination
Search for contact
Navigate to
From map Display the map and zoom to view the roads.
Add waypoint Create, add or delete a waypoint or view the itinerary.

Stop navigation Delete navigation information.
Navigate to Press to calculate the route.
All POIs
Navigation Garage
List of categories available.
Dining/hotels
Secondary page After choosing the category, select the points of interest.
Personal
Search for a point of
interest By name
Navigation Select all

Delete Choose the display settings for POIs.
Secondary page
Import POIs
Display point of interest Confirm Save the options.
361

05 NAVIGATION
Diversion
Traffic messages
"Navigation"
Secondary page
Map settings
Map settings
Navigation
Settings
Settings
Settings
Moving between the
two menus.
362

On the route
Navigation Around
Settings for the choice of messages and the filter
Near destination radius.
Secondary page
Detour over a distance
Traffic messages Detour
Recalculate route
Finish Save the options.
Flat view north heading
Orientation Flat view vehicle heading
Navigation Perspective view
News Choose the display and orientation of the map.

Secondary page
"Day" map colour
Map settings Aspect "Night" map colour
Automatic day/night
Route settings
Navigation
Voice synthesis
Enter settings and choose the volume for the voice
and announcement of street names.
Secondary page Alert!
Traffic options
Settings
Confirm Save the options.
363

05 NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
Choosing a new destination
Select "Navigate to".
Towards a new destination
Press on Navigation to display the primary Choose the navigation criteria : "Fastest" or
page then go to the secondary page. "Shortest" or "Time/distance" or "Ecological".
Choose the restriction criteria : "Include

Select "Enter destination". tollroads", "Include ferries", "Traffic", "Strict",
"Close".
Select "Address". Select "Confirm" or press "Show route on

map" to start navigation guidance.
Select the "Country:" from the list offered then

in the same way : To delete navigation information, press on
the "City:" or its post code, the "Road:", the "Settings" then "Stop navigation".
"N:". Confirm each time.
Select "Save" to save the address entered as a

contact entry. To restore the navigation information press on
"Settings" then "Resume navigation".
The system allows up to 200 entries.
364

Towards a recent destination Towards a contact
Press on Navigation to display the primary Navigation towards a contact imported from a telephone is only
page then go to the secondary page. possible if the address entered is compatible with the system.
Press on Navigation to display the primary

page then go to the secondary page.
Select "Enter destination".
Select an address from the list offered.
Select "Contacts".
Select the criteria then "Confirm" or press
"Show route on map" to start guidance.
Select a destination from the contacts in the list
offered.

Select the criteria then "Confirm" to start
guidance.
365

Towards GPS coordinates Towards a point on the map
Press on Navigation to display the primary Press on Navigation to display the primary
page then go to the secondary page. page then go to the secondary page.
Select "Enter destination". Select "Enter destination".
Select "Address". Select "From map".
Enter the "Longitude:" then the "Latitude:". Zoom in on the map then select the point.

Select the criteria then "Confirm" or press A long press displays the surrounding tourist attractions.
"Show route on map" to start guidance.
366

Points of Interest (POI) show all of the locations of services nearby (hotels,
retail outlet, airports, ...).
Press on Navigation to display the primary Select a point of interest from the list offered.

Select "Search for a point of interest".
An annual mapping update allows new points of interest to be

Select "All POIs" or "Garage" or "Dining/ presented to you.
hotels" or "Personal" or "By name". You can also update the Risk areas / Danger areas every month.
The detailed procedure is available on http://citroen.navigation.com.
Select a category from the list offered.
Select "Search".
367

Towards points of interest (POI)

Select "Show POIs".
Select a category from the list offered then

"Confirm".
368

Risk area alert settings
Press on Navigation to display the primary Select "Confirm".

These functions are only available if Risk Areas have been

Select "Settings". downloaded and installed on the system.
Select "Alert config.".
It is then possible to activate Risk Areas alerts then:

- "Audible warning"
- "Alert only when navigating"
- "Alert only for overspeed"
- "Display speed limits"
- Timing: the choice of timing allows the time before giving a Risk
Area alert to be defined.
369

Adding a waypoint Organising waypoints
Press on Navigation to display the primary To organise waypoints, carry out the previous operations 1 to 3
page then go to the secondary page. again (Adding a waypoint).

Select the waypoint that you want to move in
the order.
Select "Itinerary".
Select "Up".
Select "Add waypoint" then "Enter address".

Select "Down".
The address of the waypoint is entered in

the same way as a destination, so enter
the "City:" or post code, the "Road:" and Select "Delete".
the "N:". Confirm each time.
Then select "Add waypoint".

Select the criteria then "Confirm" to start Select "Road map" to view the changes made
guidance and give the general direction of the to the route.
navigation route.
370

Route options
Calculation criteria
It is then possible to choose:

Press Navigation to display the primary page - the navigation criteria: "Fastest", "Shortest", "Time/distance",
then go to the secondary page. "Ecological".
- the exclusion criteria: "Include tollroads", "Include ferries",
"Traffic", "Strict", "Close".
Select "Settings". Select "Confirm".
Select "Criteria". The ecological calculation is based on mapping data but this may
not always be correct.
371

05 TRAFFIC
Traffic information
Display of messages Setting filters
Press on Navigation to display the primary Press on Navigation to display the primary
Select "Traffic messages". Select "Settings".
Set the "On the route", "Around", "Near Select "Info option".
destination" filters to fine-tune the list .
Press again to remove the filter.
Select:
- "Warn of new messages",
- "Speak messages",
Select the message from the list offered. Then enter the filter radius.
Select the magnifying glasses to have the
information spoken.
Select "Confirm".
TMC (Traffic Message Channel) messages contain information on We recommend a filter radius of:
traffic and weather conditions, received in real time and transmitted
to the driver in the form of audible announcements and symbols on - 12 miles (20 km) in urban areas,
the navigation map. - 30 miles (50 km) on motorways.
372

05 TRAFFIC
Main traffic symbols Receiving TA messages
Red and yellow triangle: traffic information, for example:

Select "Settings".
Select "Voice".
Activate / Deactivate "Traffic (TA)".

Black and blue triangle: general information, for example:
The TA (Traffic Announcement) function gives priority to TA alert

messages. To operate, this function needs good reception of a
radio station transmitting this type of message. When a traffic report
is transmitted, the current audio source (Radio, CD, USB, ...) is
interrupted automatically to play the TA message. Normal playback
of the audio source resumes at the end of the transmission of the
message.
373

05 TRAFFIC
Diverting from a route
Press on Navigation to display the primary Select "Recalculate route". The route
page then go to the secondary page. will be modified in time and distance.
Select "Traffic messages". Select "Confirm".
The route may be diverted following the reception of a traffic

Select "Diversion". information message.
Select the diversion distance by pressing + or -.
374

05
Map settings
Map orientation
Press on Navigation to display the primary Select:

page then go to the secondary page. - "Flat view north heading" to keep the map
always North up,
- "Flat view vehicle heading" to have the
map follow the direction of travel,
Select "Map settings". - "Perspective view" to display a
perspective view.
Select "Orientation". Select "Confirm" to save the modifications.
375

05 MAP
Configure
Select:
- ""Day" map colour" r to have the map
always in day mode.
page then go to the secondary page. - ""Night" map colour" r to have the map
always in night mode.
- "Automatic day/night" to have
the brightness of the map adjusted
automatically according to the ambient light
level.
This mode makes use of the vehicle's
Select "Map settings". sunshine sensor or by manual operation of
the vehicle's lighting.
Then "Confirm" to save the modifications.
Select "Aspect".
Street names are visible on the map from the 100 m scale.
376

05 SETTINGS
Navigation speech synthesis
Volume / Street names

Select "Voice synthesis" and/or "Male voice"

and/or "Female voice" and/or "Speak road
names".
Select "Settings".
Select "Voice synthesis". Select "Confirm" to save the modifications.
377

06 CONFIGURATION
"Configuration" Audio settings
Primary page Audio settings
Choice of colours
Audio settings
378

Ambience Choose the sound ambience.
Set the position of the sound in the vehicle using the

Balance
Arkamys system.
Configuration
Choose the volume or activate the link to vehicle
Sound effects
speed.
Audio settings
Choose the volume for the voice and announcement
Voice
of street names.
Audio settings
Ringtones Choose the telephone ringtone and volume.
Configuration
Color Confirm After choosing the colour scheme, save the setting.
Choice of colour scheme
Configuration
Consult the Interactive help.
Interactive help
379

06 CONFIGURATION
Level 1 Level 2
"Configuration" Units
Secondary page
Factory settings
Configuration Time/Date
Display screen
380

Level 1 Level 2 Comments
Set the units used to display distance, fuel

Units
consumption and temperature.
Configuration
Erase data Select the desired data in the list then press Delete.
Secondary page
Factory settings Return to factory settings.

System
Configuration
Configuration
Secondary page Confirm Set the date and time then confirm.
Time/Date
Brightness
Configuration
Automatic text scrolling
Secondary page Make the setting then confirm.

Deactivate animations
Screen settings
Validate
381

06 CONFIGURATION
Level 1 Level 2
"Configuration" Choice of language
Secondary page
Configuration Calculator
Calendar
382

Configuration
Secondary page Confirm Select the language then confirm.
System languages
Configuration
Secondary page Select the calculator.
Calculator
Configuration
Secondary page Select the calendar.
Calendar
383

06 CONFIGURATION
Audio settings
Press on Configuration to display the primary - "Ambience" (choice of 6 musical ambiences)

page. - "Bass"
- "Treble"
- "Loudness" (Activate/Deactivate)
Select "Audio settings". - Balance ("Surround", "Driver",
r "All passengers", "Front only",
"ByPass")
- "Audio setting on touch screen"
- "Volume linked to vehicle speed:" (Activate/Deactivate)
Select "Ambience" or "Balance" or "Sound

effects" or "Voice" or "Ringtones".
On-board audio: Arkamys Sound Staging.
With Sound Staging, the driver and passengers are immersed in an
"audio scene" recreating the natural atmosphere of an auditorium:
truly a part of the scene and its surroundings.
This new sensation is made possible by software in the audio
The distribution (or spatialisation using the Arkamys system) system which processes the digital signals from the media players
of sound is an audio process that allows the audio quality to be (radio, CD, MP3) without changing the audio settings. This
adapted to the number of listeners in the vehicle. processing takes account of the characteristics of the passenger
compartment to produce optimum results.
The Arkamys software installed in your audio system processes
the digital signal from the media players (radio, CD, MP3, ...) and
The audio settings (Ambience, Bass, Treble and Loudness) are recreates a natural musical scene, with harmonious placement of
different and independent for each sound source. instruments and voices in the space in front of passengers, level with
The settings for distribution and balance are common to all the windscreen.
sources.
384

06 CONFIGURATION
Colour schemes Interactive help
Press on Configuration to display the primary Press on Configuration to display the primary
page. page.
Select "Colour schemes". Select "Interactive help".
The interactive version of your handbook available in this touch

Select the colour scheme in the list then screen is not intended as a substitute for the more complete content
"Confirm". of the printed document.
At each change of colour scheme the touch screen tablet's system For safety reasons, consultation of your handbook is only possible
restarts, showing a black screen for a few moments. with the vehicle stationary.
For safety reasons, the procedure for changing the colour scheme is
only possible with the vehicle stationary.
385

06 CONFIGURATION
System
Modify system settings
Press on Configuration to display the primary Press on Configuration to display the primary
Select "System configuration". Select "Screen settings".
Select "Units" to change the units of distance,

fuel consumption and temperature. Select "Brightness" to switch off the screen or
adjust the brightness.
Activate or deactivate "Activate automatic text
scrolling" and "Activate animations".
Select "Delete data" to delete the list of recent

destinations, personal points of interest,
contacts in the list.
Choose the item then select "Delete".
Select "Factory settings" to return to the

original settings.
386

06 CONFIGURATION
Press on Configuration to display the primary

Select:
- "Time/Date" to change the time zone,
synchronisation with GPS, time and its
format and then the date.
- "Languages" to change the language.
- "Calculator"
r to display a calculator
- "Calendar"
r to display a calculator.
387

07 CONNECTED SERVICES
Level 1 Level 2
"Connected services" Identification
Primary page: Secondary page:

Driving assistance Internet navigation via
applications,
pp , see following Bluetooth telephone Dial-Up
page on "CITRON Networking (DUN).
MULTICITY CONNECT"*.
Internet Navigation DUN connection settings

It may be that certain new
generation smartphones
are not compatible with this
standard.
Transfer rate
p g on country.
* Depending y
388

07 CITRON MULTICITY CONNECT
"CITRON MULTICITY CONNECT" is a driving assistance applications service that gives access in real time to useful information such as the
state of the traffic, danger zones, fuel prices, the availability of parking places, tourist sites, weather conditions, correct addresses
It includes access to the mobile network associated with the use of these applications.
pp "CITRON MULTICITY CONNECT" is a service
contract taken out at CITRON dealer, available according to country and the type of touch screen, either before or after delivery of the
vehicle.
Plug the "CITRON MULTICITY CONNECT" connection key into the

right hand USB port.
The applications use vehicle

data such as the current speed,
mileage, remaining fuel range
or even GPS position to provide
pertinent information.
For safety reasons, some functions can only be used when

stationary.
Press on the "Connected services" menu to display the applications.
The "MyCITRON" application

is a link between the user, the
manufacturer and its dealer
network.
It allows the customer to know
everything about their vehicle:
servicing booklet, accessory range,
service contracts taken out.
It also makes possible the sending
of the vehicle's mileage
g to the
"MyCITRON" website, or to
identify a dealer.
389

08 TELEPHONE
"Telephone"
Primary page
Contacts
Call log
390

Addresses
New
Modify
Delete
Add contact
Telephone Delete all
After making choices, start the call.
Contacts Search for contact
Confirm
Add waypoint
By name
Call
All calls
Incoming calls
Outgoing calls
Telephone
Contact After making choices, start the call.
Call log
View contact
Magnifying glass
New
Call
391

08
"Telephone" Bluetooth menu
Secondary page
Telephone
p
Telephone options
392

Search Start the search for another peripheral device to

connect.
Stop the Bluetooth connection to the selected
Telephone Disconnect
peripheral device.
Import the contacts from the selected telephone to
Secondary page Update
store them in the audio system.
Bluetooth menu Delete Delete the selected telephone.
Telephone profile
Telephone
Secondary page Streaming profile Start the search for peripheral devices
Search for devices

Internet profile
Cut the microphone temporarily so that the contact

Put on hold cannot hear your conversation with a passenger.
Import the contacts from the selected telephone to

Update save then in the audio system.
Telephone
Secondary page Choice of ringtone: Choose the telephone ringtone and volume.
Telephone options Contact records used and free, percentage of storage

Memory info. space used by internal contacts and Bluetooth
contacts.
393

08 BLUETOOTH
For reasons of safety and because they require prolonged attention
Pairing a Bluetooth telephone on the part of the driver, the operations for pairing the Bluetooth
mobile telephone to the hands-free system of the audio system must
First connection be carried out with the vehicle stationary.
Activate the telephone's Bluetooth function

and ensure that it is "visible to all" (telephone Choose a code for the connection then
configuration). "Confirm".
Press on Telephone to display the primary

page then go to the secondary page. Enter the same code on the telephone then
accept the connection.
Select the "Bluetooth" menu. The system offers to connect the telephone:
- in "Telephone profile" (telephone only).
- in "Streaming profile" (streaming: playing audio files from the
telephone),
Select Search.
- in "Internet profile" (internet browser only),
The list of peripherals detected is displayed.
Select and Confirm.
If the peripheral is not detected, it is recommended that you switch The "Hands-free" profile should be used in preference if "Streaming"
the Bluetooth function on your telephone off and then on again. is not desired.
The ability of the system to connect with only one profile depends on
the telephone. The two profiles may both connect by default.
Select the name of the desired peripheral from
the list and Confirm.
Visit www.citroen.co.uk for more information (compatibility, additional
help, ...).
394

08 BLUETOOTH
The services available depend on the network, the SIM card and the Connecting a Bluetooth peripheral
compatibility of the Bluetooth telephone used. Check the telephone
manual and with your network provider for details of the services
available to you. Automatic reconnection
On switching on the ignition, the telephone connected when the

ignition was last switched off is automatically reconnected, if this
The telephone is added to the list. connection mode had been activated during the pairing procedure
(see previous pages).
The connection is confirmed by the display of a

message and the name of the telephone.
Depending on your telephone, you may be asked to accept

automatic connection every time the ignition is switched on. Manual connection

Depending on the type of telephone, the system
will ask you to accept or not the transfer of your
contacts. Select "Bluetooth" to display the list of paired
peripherals.
If not, select "Update".

Select the peripheral to connect.
On return to the vehicle, the last telephone connected automatically

reconnects, within around 30 seconds after switching on the ignition Press on "Search".
(Bluetooth activated).
To modify the automatic connection mode, select the telephone in
the list then select the desired profile. The connection is confirmed by the display of a
message and the name of the telephone.
395

08 BLUETOOTH
Managing paired telephones Receiving a call
This function allows the connection or disconnection of a peripheral

device as well as the deletion of a pairing. An incoming call is announced by a ring and a superimposed display
in the screen.

Make a short press on the steering mounted
TEL button to accept an incoming call.
Select "Bluetooth" to display the list of paired

peripheral devices.
Make a long press on the steering mounted
TEL button to reject the call.
or
Select the peripheral in the list. Select "End call".
Select:
- "Search" or "Disconnect" to connect or
disconnect the Bluetooth connection with
the peripheral selected.
- "Delete" to remove the pairing.
396

08 CONTACTS
Use of the telephone is not recommended while driving.
Making a call We recommended that you park safely or make use of the
steering mounted controls.
Calling a new number Calling a contact
Press on Telephone to display the primary Press on Telephone to display the primary
page. page.
Or make a long press on the steering mounted

Enter the phone number using the keypad then TEL button.
"Call" to start the call.
Select "Contacts".
Select the desired contact from the list offered.
Select "CALL".
397

08 CALL LOG
Ending a call
Calling a recently used number

page.
Select "End call".
or
Make a long press on the steering mounted
Select "Call log". TEL button.
Select the desired contact from the list offered.
It is always possible to make a call directly from the telephone; park

the vehicle first as a safety measure.
398

08 SETTINGS
Ringtones Managing contacts / Entries
Press on Telephone to display the primary Press on Telephone to display the primary
page then go to the secondary page. page.
Select "Contacts".
Select "Telephone options".
Select "View contact".
Select "Choice of ringtone:".
Select:
- "New" to add a new contact.
- "Modify" to edit the selected contact.
You can select the ringtone used and adjust its volume.
- "Delete" to delete the selected contact.
- "Delete all" to delete all of the information
for the selected contact.
Select "Confirm".
Select "Directory information" for the number
of entries used, available, ...
399

FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
The following table groups together the answers to the most frequently asked questions concerning your audio system.
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION

Navigation, guidance
The route calculation is The guidance criteria may conflict with the current location (exclusion of Check the guidance criteria on the Navigation
not successful. toll roads on a toll motorway). Menu, "Guidance options"\ "Define calculation
criteria".
I am unable to enter my The system only accepts post codes of up to 5 characters.

post code.
The POIs do not appear. The POIs have not been selected. Select the POIs in the list of POIs.
The risk areas audible The audible warning is not active. Activate audible warnings in the Guidance options
warning does not work. menu, "Navigation - guidance", "Set parameters
for risk areas".
The system does not The guidance criteria do not take account of TMC messages. Select the "Traffic info" function in the list of
suggest a detour around guidance criteria.
an incident on the route.
I receive a Risk area alert Other than guidance, the system announces all Risk areas positioned in a Zoom in on the map to view the exact position of
which is not on my route. cone located in front of the vehicle. It may provide an alert for a Risk area the Risk area. Select "On the route" to no longer
located on nearby or parallel roads. receive alerts other than guidance or to reduce the
time for the announcement.
400

Certain traffic jams On starting, it is several minutes before the system begins to receive the Wait until the traffic information is being received
along the route are not traffic information. correctly (display of the traffic information icons on
indicated in real time. the map).
The filters are too restrictive. Modify the "Geographic filter" settings.
In certain countries, only major routes (motorways...) are listed for the This phenomenon is normal. The system is
traffic information. dependent on the traffic information available.
The altitude is not On starting, the initialisation of the GPS may take up to 3 minutes to Wait until the system has started up completely.
displayed. receive more than 4 satellites correctly. Check that there is a GPS coverage of at least
4 satellites (long press on the SETUP button, then
select "GPS coverage").
Depending on the geographical environment (tunnel...) or the weather, This phenomenon is normal. The system
the conditions of reception of the GPS signal may vary. is dependent on the GPS signal reception
conditions.
Telephone, Bluetooth
I cannot connect my The telephone's Bluetooth function may be switched off or the telephone - Check that your telephone's Bluetooth
Bluetooth telephone. may not be visible. function is switched on.
- Check in the telephone settings that it is
"visible to all".
The Bluetooth telephone is not compatible with the system. A list of compatible Bluetooth mobile telephones is
available from the dealer network.
The volume of the The volume depends both on the system and on the telephone. Increase the volume of the audio system, to
telephone connected maximum if required, and increase the volume of
in Bluetooth mode is the telephone if necessary.
inaudible.
The ambient noise level has an influence on the quality of telephone Reduce the ambient noise level (close the windows,
communication. reduce the booster fan speed, slow down, ...).
401

Some contacts are The options for synchronizing contacts are synchronizing the contacts Select "Display SIM card contacts" or "Display
duplicated in the list. on the SIM card, the contacts on the telephone, or both. When both telephone contacts".
synchronizations are selected, some contacts may be duplicated.
Contacts are not shown Some telephones offer display options. Depending on the settings Modify the display setting in the telephone
in alphabetical order. chosen, contacts can be transferred in a specific order. directory.
The system does not The Bluetooth mode does not permit sending SMS text messages to the
receive SMS text messages. system.
CD, MP3
The CD is ejected The CD is inserted upside down, is unplayable, does not contain any - Check that the CD is inserted in the player the right
automatically or is not audio data or contains an audio format which the player cannot play. way up.
played by the player. - Check the condition of the CD: the CD cannot be
played if it is too damaged.
The CD has been recorded in a format that is not compatible with the player. - Check the content in the case of a recorded CD:
refer to the advice in the "AUDIO" section.
The CD is protected by an anti-pirating protection system which is not - The audio system's CD player does not play DVDs.
recognised by the audio system. - Some recorded CDs will not be played by the audio
system because they are not of the correct quality.
There is a long waiting When a new medium is inserted, the system reads a certain amount of This phenomenon is normal.
period following the insertion data (directory, title, artist, etc.). This may take from a few seconds to a
of a CD or connection of a few minutes.
USB memory stick.
The CD player sound is The CD used is scratched or of poor quality. Insert good quality CDs and store them in suitable
poor. conditions.
The audio equipment settings (bass, treble, ambiences) are unsuitable. Set the treble or bass level to 0, without selecting
an ambience.
402

Some characters in the The audio system does not display some types of characters. Use standard characters to name tracks and
media information are not folders.
displayed correctly while
playing.
Playing of streaming files The peripheral device connected does not support automatic play. Start the playback from the device.
does not start.
The names of tracks and The Bluetooth profile does not allow the transfer of this information.
the track length are not
displayed on the screen
when streaming audio.
Radio
The quality of reception The vehicle is too far from the transmitter used by the station listened Activate the "RDS" function by means of the
of the radio station to or there is no transmitter in the geographical area through which the short-cut menu to enable the system to check
listened to gradually vehicle is travelling. whether there is a more powerful transmitter in the
deteriorates or the stored geographical area.
stations do not function
(no sound, 87.5 Mhz is The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, basement car parks...) block This phenomenon is normal and does not indicate
displayed...). reception, including in RDS mode. a fault with the audio system.
The aerial is absent or has been damaged (for example when going Have the aerial checked by a CITRON dealer.
through a car wash or into an underground car park).
I cannot find some radio The station is not received or its name has changed in the list.
stations in the list of
stations received.
Some radio stations send other information in place of their name (the
title of the song for example).
The name of the radio The system interprets this information as the name of the station.
station changes.
403

Settings, configuration
In changing the setting The selection of an equalizer setting imposes the balance settings. Modify the balance or equalizer settings to obtain
of treble and bass the Modifying one without the other is not possible. the desired musical ambience.
equalizer setting is
deselected.
In changing the equalizer

setting, treble and bass
return to zero.
When changing the The selection of a distribution setting imposes the balance settings. Modify the balance or distribution settings to
balance settings, the Modifying one without the other is not possible. obtain the desired musical ambience.
distribution setting is
deselected.
When changing an
distribution setting,
the balance setting is
deselected.
There is a difference in For optimum sound quality, the audio settings for Volume, Bass, Treble, Check that the audio settings for (Volume, Bass,
sound quality between Equalizer and Loudness can be adapted to the different sound sources, Treble, Equalizer, Loudness) are adapted to
the different audio which may result in audible differences when changing source (radio, the sources listened to. It is advisable to set the
sources (radio, CD...). CD...). AUDIO functions (Bass, Treble, Fr-Re balance,
Le-Ri balance) to the middle position, select the
"None", musical ambience and set the loudness
correction to the "Active" position in CD mode or
to the "Inactive" position in radio mode.
404

With the engine off, the When the engine is switched off, the system's operating time depends on Start the vehicle's engine to increase the battery
system switches off after the battery charge. charge.
a few minutes of use. The switch-off is normal: the system switches to economy mode and
switches off to prevent discharging of the vehicle's battery.
USB, portable player, connection key

Playback of my USB Some files supplied with the memory stick may greatly slow down access Delete the files supplied with the memory stick
memory stick starts only to reading the memory stick (multiplication by 10 of the catalogue time). and limit the number of sub-folders in the file
after a very long wait structure on the memory stick.
(around 2 to 3 minutes).
When I connect my When the iPhone connects automatically as a telephone, it forces the Disconnect and reconnect to the USB port (the
iPhone as telephone and streaming function. The streaming function takes the place of the USB USB function takes priority over streaming).
to the USB port at the function which is then not useable, there is a period without sound of the
same time, I am unable track being played with Apple players.
to play the music files.
When I connect my Apple players, Blackberry devices and connection keys draw more than Disconnect all devices from all the USB ports
Apple player, my 0.5 amp. then reconnect the Apple player, Blackberry or
Blackberry or my The left hand USB port is limited to 0.5 amp, the right hand USB port is connection key to the right hand USB port.
connection key to the left limited to 1 amp.
hand USB port, I get an
error message.
405

Alphabetical index
C
360 vision......................................................192 Audible warning ............................................222 Capacity, fuel tank ........................................ 313
Audio cable ...................................................356 CD .................................................................352
Audio streaming (Bluetooth) ................ 352, 355 CD MP3.........................................................352
Automatic headlamps .............................40, 208 Central locking ....................................61, 64, 68
Automatic illumination Changing a bulb .................................... 279-287
of headlamps ......................................203, 207 Changing a fuse .................................... 288-294
A Automatic operation of hazard
warning lamps.............................................222
Changing a wheel ................................. 268-277
Changing a wiper blade ........................218, 299
Accessories ................................................. 307 Automatic rain sensitive Changing the date ...........................................57
Accessory position........................................140 windscreen wipers .............................. 214, 217 Changing the remote
Accessory socket, 12V ................. 118, 122, 126 Auxiliary ............................................... 352, 356 control battery...............................................70
Access to the 3rd row .....................................96 Changing the time...........................................57
Adjusting headlamps .................................... 211 Checking levels..................................... 318-320
Adjusting head restraints ..........................88, 93 Checking the engine
Adjusting seat belt height..............................230 oil level ....................................................53, 318
Adjusting the steering wheel.........................103 Checking tyre pressures
Advice on care and
maintenance ...............................................322
B (using the kit).................................................267
Checks .................................. 311, 312, 321, 322
Airbags ....................................................48, 235 Backup starting .............................................295 Child lock.......................................................259
Airbags, curtain .....................................239, 240 Battery........................................... 295-297, 321 Children.........................103, 234, 236, 243-259
Airbags, front.........................................236, 240 Battery, charging...........................................297 Child seats ........... 241, 242, 246-248, 250, 258
Airbags, lateral ......................................238, 240 Battery, remote control ............................. 70, 71 Child seats, conventional..............................247
Air conditioning .......................................24, 105 Black panel......................................................56 Child surveillance mirrorr ............................... 103
Air conditioning, digital..........................105, 109 Blind for panoramic sunroof..........................
f 220 Citron Localised Assistance Call................336
Air conditioning, manual .......................105, 107 Blinds..................................................... 119, 126 Citron Localised Emergency Call ...............336
Air distribution adjustment ............ 106, 108, 111 Blind spot sensors.........................................186 CITRON MULTICITY
Air filterr .......................................................... 321 Bluetooth (hands-free) ......................... 394, 395 CONNECT ..................................................389
Air flow ..........................................................104 Bluetooth (telephone) ........................... 394, 395 Closing the boot ........................................75, 76
Air flow adjustment ........................106, 107, 111 Bonnet ........................................................... 310 Closing the doors ................................62, 65, 67
Air intake ............................................... 108, 112 Bonnet stay ................................................... 310 Cold climate screen ......................................306
Air recirculation ..................................... 108, 112 Boot ........................................................... 75-78 Colour screen................................................338
Air vents ........................................................104 Boot (opening) .................................................61 Concertina boards ..........................................97
Alarm ...............................................................79 Boot lamp ......................................................134 Connectors, audio .........................................122
Anti-pinch ................................................82, 220 Brake discs....................................................322 Coolant level ................................................. 319
Anti-theft........................................................140 Brake lamps .......................................... 283-287 Courtesy lamps .............................................219
Armrest, front ..................................................91 Brake pads ....................................................322 Cruise control.................................167, 171, 174
Assistance call ............................. 223, 335, 336 Brakes ...........................................................322 Cruise control, active .................................... 174
Cup holder.....................................................
r 118
406

Alphabetical index
D G
DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) ................351 Emergency warning lamps .................. 222, 223 Gearbox, automatic ..............154, 160, 297, 322
Date (setting)...................................................57 Energy economy mode.................................298 Gearbox, electronic...............150, 160, 297, 322
Daytime running lamps .................210, 279, 281 Engine, Diesel ................ 312, 316, 317, 325-327 Gearbox, manual ..........................149, 160, 322
Deactivating ESP ..........................................229 Engine, petrol ................................ 311, 316, 323 Gear shift
Deactivating the passenger airbag...............236 Engine compartment............................. 311, 312 indicatorr ...................................................... 159
Deadlocking ....................................... 63, 66, 69 Engine compartment fusebox .......................293 Gear lever, manual
Defrosting.............................................. 114, 115 Engine oil ...................................................... 318 gearbox.......................................................149
Demisting .............................................. 114, 115 Engine oil level indicatorr ......................... 53, 318 Gear selectorr ........................................ 150, 154
Diesel ...................................................... 41, 316 Engines ......................................... 323, 325-327 Glove box .............................................. 118, 119
Diesel additive level ......................................320 Environment ...... 24, 70, 105, 115, 224, 297, 320 Guidance.......................................................358
Diesel engine pre-heat warning lamp ............. 41 ESC/ASR.......................................................227 Guide-me-home....................................206, 207
Digital Audio Broadcasting (DAB) ................351
Dimensions ...........................................331, 332
Dipped beam.......................... 99, 202, 279, 280
Dipstick....................................................53, 318
Directional lighting ................................ 212, 213
Direction indicators ............... 222, 279, 282-286
Distance alert................................163, 182, 183 F H
Doors...............................................................73 Filling with fuel .............................. 313, 315, 316
Doors back-up control .................................... 74 Fitting a wheel ...............................................276 Halogen headlamps......................................279
Driving positions (storing) ..............................87 Fitting roof bars .............................................304 Hands-free kit....................................... 394, 395
Driving economically.......................................24 Fittings, rearr .................................................. 125 Hazard warning lamps ......................... 222, 223
Dynamic emergency braking ........................145 Flashing indicators........................................222 Headlamp adjustment................................... 211
Dynamic stability control (DSC) ........43, 47, 229 Foglamps, front .............................204, 212, 282 Headlamps, directional .........................213, 279
Foglamps, rearr ..............................................204 Headlamp wash ............................................216
Folding the rear seats .................. 92, 94, 96, 97 Head restraints, front ......................................88
Fragrance cartridge ...................................... 116 Head restraints, rearr ....................................... 93
Frequency (radio) ................................. 349, 350 Heated seats ...................................................90
Front seats ..........................................84, 86, 87 Heating.......................................... 106, 107, 109
E Fuel............................................................... 316
Fuel consumption............................................24
Height and reach adjustment,
steering wheel ............................................103
Eco-driving .....................................................24 Fuel filler cap................................................. 313 Hill start assist...............................................148
Economy mode .............................................298 Fuel filler flap......................................... 313, 315 Hooks ............................................................130
Electronic engine immobiliser.................
r 71, 140 Fuel gauge ........................................33, 34, 313
Electronic stability programme (ESC) ..........227 Fuel tank................................................ 313, 315
Fusebox, dashboard .....................................290
Emergency boot release.................................78
Emergency call ............................ 223, 335, 336 Fuses .............................................................288
.
407

Alphabetical index
I L
Identification plates.......................................333 Labels, identification .....................................333 Mirror, rear view ............................................102
Ignition on......................................................140 Lamps, warning and indicator...................
r 38-50 Mirrors, door..................................
r 101, 102, 186
Indicator lamps, status.............................. 38-50 Lane Departure Warning System Misfuel prevention......................................... 315
Indicators, direction ............. 222, 282, 285, 287 (LDWS) .......................................................185 Modularity, seats.............................................99
Inflating accessories (using the kit) ..............267 LED daytime running lamps.......................... 210 Motorised boot ..........................................76, 77
Inflating tyres ..................................................24 Leg rest, electric .............................................90 Motorway function
Instrument panels .....................................33, 34 Level, brake fluid ........................................... 319 (three flashes of the direction indicators)...222
Instrument panel screen .........................35, 159 Level, headlamp wash ..................................320 Mountings for ISOFIX seats .........................252
Intelligent Traction Control............................228 Levels and checks................................. 310-322 Multimedia, rearr ............................................ 127
Interior fittings ....................................... 118, 119 Lighting, guide-me home ......................206, 207
Interior mood lighting ....................................221 Lighting, interiorr .................................... 219, 221
ISOFIX child seats ................................ 252-256 Lighting bulbs (replacement) ................ 279-287
ISOFIX mountings.........................................252 Lighting control stalk ............................ 202, 206
Loading............................................................24
Load reduction mode ....................................298
Locating your vehicle ......................................63
Locking from the inside...................................72
N
Number plate lamps......................................287
Locking the doors ...........................................72
Low fuel level ................................................ 313
J Luggage coverr .............................................. 132
Lumbarr ............................................................ 89
Jack ....................................................... 268-270
Jack cable .....................................................356
JACK socket ..................................................356
Jukebox (playing) ..........................................357 O
Oil filterr .......................................................... 321
M Oil level....................................................53, 318
Opening the bonnet ...................................... 310
Main beam ...................... 40, 202, 279-281, 283 Opening the boot ................................61, 64, 75
Maintenance....................................................24 Opening the doors ....................................61, 64
K Map reading lamps .......................................219
Markings, identification.................................333
Opening the panoramic
sunroof blind ...............................................220
Keeping children safe .... 103, 234, 236, 243-259 Massage function ...........................................89 Operation indicator lamps......................... 38-50
Key ..................................................... 61-71, 140 Mat ................................................................123
Key, electronic ........................................... 61-63 Memorising a speed .....................................167
Keyless Entry and Starting ....................... 61-63 Menu ................................... 342, 344, 346, 358,
360, 362, 378, 390, 392
408

Alphabetical index
P
Paint colour code ..........................................333 Replacing the air filterr ................................... 321 Spare wheel ...........................................271-273
Panoramic glass sunrooff ..............................220 Replacing the oil filterr ................................... 321 Speed limiterr ......................................... 167, 168
Parcel shelf, rear...........................................
r 130 Replacing the passenger Spotlamps, side ....................................210, 283
Park Assist ....................................................194 compartment filterr ...................................... 321 Start ing using another battery .....................295
Parking brake, electric .......................... 141, 322 Replacing wiper blades.........................218, 299 Starting the vehicle ............... 135, 137, 150, 154
Parking lamps ...............................................206 Resetting the service indicatorr ....................... 52 Steering mounted controls............................341
Parking sensors, front ...................................190 Resetting the trip recorder..............................
r 54 Stopping the vehicle ............. 135, 137, 150, 154
Parking sensors, rear....................................
r 189 Reversing camera .........................................191 Stop Start ............................... 60, 114, 160, 161,
Particle emission filterr ...................310, 319-321 Reversing lamp ..................................... 283-286 295, 310, 313, 321
Passenger compartment filterr ...................... 321 Risk areas (update) .......................................367 Storage.......................................................... 118
Port, USB ......................................................122 Roof bars .......................................................304 Storage boxes ....................................... 124, 126
Priming the fuel system ................................ 317 Routine checks .....................................321, 322 Storing driving positions .................................87
Protecting children ........103, 234, 236, 243-259 Running out of fuel (Diesel) .......................... 317 Sun visorr ....................................................... 119
Puncture........................................................260 Synchronising the remote control...................70
Synthesiser, voice.........................................377
System settings.............................................386
R S
Safety for children.........103, 234, 236, 243-259
Radio .............................................................348 Scented air freshenerr ................................... 116
RDS...............................................................350 Screen menu....................... 342, 344, 346, 358,
Reading lamps, rear......................................
r 125 360, 362, 378, 390, 392
Rear foglamp........................ 204, 283, 285, 287
Rear screen (demisting) ................................ 115
Recharging the battery .................................297
Screenwash, front .........................................216
Screenwash fluid level ..................................320 T
Seat adjustment ........................................ 84-94 Table of weights ............................ 324, 328-330
Reduction of electrical load ..........................298 Seat belts .............................................. 230-234 Tables of engines .......................... 323, 325-327
Regeneration of the particle emissions Seat configurations.........................................99 Tables of fuses ..............................................288
filterr ............................................................. 321 Seats, electric .................................................86 Tank, fuel............................................... 313, 315
Reinitialising the remote control .....................70 Seats, rear.................................................
r 92-98 Technical data....................................... 323-330
Remote control...........................................61-71 Serial number, vehicle ..................................333 Telephone .............................................394-398
Removable screen (snow shield)..................306 Service indicatorr ............................................. 51 Temperature adjustment ............... 106, 107, 109
Removing a wheel ........................................ 274 Servicing .........................................................24 Temperature control for heated seats ............90
Removing the mat .........................................123 Setting the clock .............................................57 Temporary tyre repair kit...............................260
.
Repair kit, puncture.......................................260 Sidelamps ............ 202, 206, 279, 281, 283, 285 TMC (Traffic info) ..........................................372
Replacing bulbs .................................... 279-287 Side repeater.................................................283 Tools ......................................................268, 270
Replacing fuses ............................................288 Snow chains..................................................278 Torch .............................................................134
409

Alphabetical index
V
Total distance recorderr ...................................54 Vehicle identification .....................................333
Touch screen.....................................55-58, 337 Ventilation ...................... 104, 105, 107, 111, 114
Towbar...........................................................
r 302 Visibility ......................................................... 114
Towed loads .................................. 324, 328-330
Towing another vehicle .................................301
Traction control (ASR) ...................... 43, 47, 227
Traffic information (TA) .................................373
Traffic information (TMC)......................372, 373
Trailerr ............................................................302
Trip computerr ............................................ 58-60 W
Trip distance recorder.....................................
r 54 Warning lamps .......................................... 38-50
Tyre pressures ......................262, 267, 277, 333 Warning triangle............................................223
Tyres................................................................24 Wash-wipe, rear............................................
r 215
Tyre under-inflation detection .......................224 Washing (advice)...........................................322
Weights ......................................... 324, 328-330
Welcome lighting........................................... 210
Window controls..............................................82
Wiper, rear.....................................................
r 215
Wiper control stalk ........................ 214, 215, 217
U Wipers ............................................. 42, 214, 217
Under-inflation (detection) ............................224
Under floor storage .......................................130
Unlocking ..................................................61, 64
Unlocking from the inside ...............................72
Unlocking the boot ..........................................61
Unlocking the doors ........................................72
Update risk areas..........................................367
X
Xenon headlamps .........................................279
Updating the date............................................57
Updating the time............................................57
USB ...............................................................352
410

Visual search
Exterior
Electronic key / "Keyless Entry and
Starting" system 61-71
- opening / closing
- anti-theft protection Wipers, screenwash 214-218
- back-up control Changing a wiper blade 299
- battery Panoramic sunroof 220
Roof bars 304-305
Accessories 307-308
Exterior welcome lighting 210
Boot 75-78 Door mirror spotlamps 210
- opening / closing
Cornering lighting 212
- emergency release
Directional lighting 213
Headlamp height adjustment 211
Changing bulbs 279-283
- front lamps
Changing bulbs 283-287 - foglamps
- rear lamps - direction indicator repeaters
- 3rd brake lamp
- number plate lamps
- foglamps
Door mirrors 101-102
Parking sensors 189-190 Doors 73-74

Reversing camera 191 - opening / closing
ESC, ABS, EBA, ASR, DSC 227-229 - emergency control
360 Vision 192-193 Tyre under-inflation detection 224-226
Park Assist 194-201 Central locking 72
Tyre pressures 333 Alarm 79-81
Towbar 302-303 Temporary puncture
Towing 300-301 Electric windows 82-83
repair kit 260-267
Changing a wheel 268-277
- tools
- removing / refitting
Snow chains 278
Fuel tank, misfuel
prevention 313-315
.
411

Visual search
Interior
Interior fittings 125-128

Side blinds 126
3rd row rear seats 96-98
Rear multimedia 127-128
Seat modularity /
configurations 99-100
Seat belts 230-234
C4 Picasso boot fittings 129

- rings, hooks
- storage box
- boot lamp
Grand C4 Picasso boot fittings 131 Front fittings 118-124
- rings Mats 123
- boot lamp
- concertina boards
Luggage cover roller 132-133
Warning triangle 223
Airbags 235-240
Deactivating the passenger's front
Front seats 84-91 airbag 236
- manual
2nd row rear seats 92-95
- electric
Child seats 241-251
ISOFIX child seats 252-257
Child lock 259
412

Visual search
Instruments and controls
Courtesy lamps 219

Rear view mirror 102 Instrument panels 33-37
Automatic gearbox 154-158 Panoramic sunroof 220 Lighting dimmer 55
Electronic gearbox system 150-153 Warning lamps 38-50
Gear shift indicator 159 Indicators 51-53
- service indicator
- oil level indicator
Touch screen tablet 26-32

Equipment settings 28-30
Door mirrors 101-102
Setting the date/time 57
Electric windows, deactivating 82-83
GPS Navigation / Multimedia audio
system / Bluetooth telephone 337-405
Ventilation 104-105
Heating 106
Dual-zone manual air
Opening the bonnet 310 conditioning 107-108
Dual-zone automatic air
conditioning 109-114
Demisting / defrosting 114-115
5/6-speed manual gearbox 149

Gear shift indicator 159 Electric parking brake 141-147
.
413

Visual search
Instruments and controls (cont.)

START/STOP button 135-140
Lighting controls 202-210

Direction indicators 222
Wiper and screenwash

controls 214-218
Trip computer 58-60
Headlamp height adjustment 211
Dashboard fuses 288-292 Steering wheel adjustment 103

Horn 222
Memorising speeds 167

Speed limiter 168-170
Cruise control 171-173
Active cruise control 174-181
414

Visual search
Maintenance - Technical data
12V battery 295-297

Running out of fuel, Diesel 317 Load reduction, economy mode 298
Engine compartment fuses
288-289, 293-294
Diesel weights 328-330

Checking levels 318-320
- oil
- brake fluid
- coolant
- screenwash/headlamp wash fluid
Checking components 321-322
- air filter
- passenger compartment filter
- oil filter
- electric parking brake
- brake pads / discs
Changing bulbs 279-287

- front
- rear
Identification markings 333

Opening the bonnet 310 Dimensions 331-332
Under the bonnet, petrol 311
Under the bonnet, Diesel 312
Petrol engines
Diesel engines
323
325-327
.
415

This handbook describes all of the equipment Automobiles CITRON declares, by application
available in the whole range. of the provisions of the European regulation
Your vehicle will be fitted with some of this (Directive 2000/53) relating to End of Life Vehicles,
equipment described in this document, depending that it achieves the objectives set by this regulation
on its trim level, version and the specification for the and that recycled materials are used in the
country in which it is sold. manufacture of the products that it sells.
The descriptions and illustrations are given without Reproduction or translation of all or part of this
any obligation. Automobiles CITRON reserves handbook is prohibited without written authorisation
the right to modify the technical specifications, from Automobiles CITRON.
equipment and accessories without having to update
this edition of the handbook. For any work on your vehicle, use a qualified
This document is an integral part of your vehicle. It workshop that has the technical information,
should be passed on to the new user in the event of competence and equipment required, which a
sale or transfer. CITRON dealer is able to provide. Printed in the EU
Anglais
03-13

13B78.0041
Anglais
2013 DOCUMENTATION DE BORD
4Dconcept
Diadeis
Edipro
CRATIVE TECHNOLOGIE

c4 Picasso

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

c4 Picasso

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

c4 Picasso

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What is the purpose of the owner's manual?

What is the purpose of the owner's manual?

What details are provided about accessing the owner's manual online?

What details are provided about accessing the owner's manual online?

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.

com manuals search engine

If the "MyCitron" function is not available on the CITRON public Select:

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

At the wheel of your new vehicle,

refer to the page indicated more comfortable and more enjoyable.

Grand C4 Picasso with 5 seats

Grand C4 Picasso with 7 seats

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Familiarisation Access Driving

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Visibility Practical information Technical data

Audio and telematics

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

A system that allows the unlocking, locking and

Active cruise control

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Park Assist Front and rear parking

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Under-inflation detection Temporary puncture repair

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Massage system Electric parking brake Electric leg rest

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

103 Once these adjustments have been made,

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Adjustment Manual day/night model

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1. Fastening the buckle.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Ring A Stalk A: windscreen wipers Switching on "AUTO"

Front and rear foglamps. Intermittent wipe.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

A. Warning lamp for not fastened (front seat

1. Insert the key (integral to the electronic key).

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

From the primary page, use this

Use this button to return to the

"Air conditioning". "Connected services".

"Configuration". Use a clean soft cloth to clean the touch

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Manual application / release Automatic application / release

If this warning lamp is on in the instrument

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Gear selector positions Gear selector positions

150 To come out of position P, press the brake

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

3. Courtesy lamp on / off.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Maintain a safe distance between vehicles, use engine braking rather